Home

Paragon PSG-155-PRG-PL

1. s If you want to restore the image contents click the Next button In order to cancel click the Cancel button Using the Archive Database To open the Archive Database click the appropriate tab in the Explorer Bar The database window can be conditionally subdivided into several sections that differ in their purpose and functionality Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 80 Archive of Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Vir amp SCSI Disk Dev CD DVD Drives aia 2 COVDVD Drive D aan A Hard Dieks Source Object Size 10GB E 1 VMware VMware Vitual SCSI Disi Archive Size 222 6 MB P 1 Primary NTFS C Location Cac _mew ac _pen J E SRecyde Bin Creation Date 9 2 2009 2 21 01 AM Comments My hdd a Fiags L Compressed arc_new PBF t are ew pim F 1 a e Tp 00 F ae naw 000p pin Testor Archi m arc_new_0101p 000 eee ee N ae new iip pin ac new Mp arc new _D02p pim This wizard helpa you to test existing archives The wizard wil check f the anchive is valid and makes you sure the archive integrity is nol ac new _0103p 000 wolated are new Mippin Aiterentiel Backup H E ochre Use this command to create a differential image of the selected anchive E Bsa reate Incremental File Archive 1 ES Documents and Settings Use thes command to create an incremental fle archive E PeefLage 7 E E
2. BE o Unallocated E o data F Volum sza 143 871 14 MB 94 MB 265 754 MB Free space before 121 523 00 MB O bytes 265 700 04 MB Free space after 0 Bytes sfe Obytes 265 700 04 MB Sector to sector move Select this option fo move partition areas that dant contain any date This allows you to keep the pation content after move exactly as f was but wi maguire more ime 7 Now you can resize the extended partition to take the block of free soace out of it Call the context menu for It right click of the mouse button to launch the Move Resize dialog 8 In the opened dialog shift the edge of the extended partition to the right Q Are you sure you want to move resize extended partition on disk 0 Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev Unallocated Me EE pox Bo Teme l l 140 4GB NTFS ME joo 7 Gp Faraz Volume size 247 038 60MB 247 038 MB 366 969 MB Free space before 121 930 84MB 5 Obytes 121 930 84 MB Free space ater 0 Bytes OME eee Por By eh nr n a Select this option ic mov patton areas that dant contain any data This allows you to keep the paritions content aier move exacty as was but wi egurre more lma 9 The block of free soace has been released Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev
3. Connecting virtual disks to a new virtual machine For VMware Workstation To connect a VMware Workstation virtual disk to a new virtual machine please do the following 1 Click New Virtual Machine VMware Workstation Veware Workstation allows multiple standard operating systems and ther aophcations to nun with high performance in secure and transportable virtual machines Each virtual machine is equivalent to a PC with a unique network address and full complement of hardware choices ik thes button to create a new virtual machine You then can instal and run a variety of standard operating systeme in the virtual machine kk the button to create a new team You then can add several virtual medines and connect them with private team LAN segments Chick this button to browse for virtual machines or teams and to select ene to display in this panel You then can interact with the guest operating system within this desplay as you would a standard PC Open Exsting WM or Team 2 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 On the next page select Typical What type of configuration do you want Typical recommended Create a Workstation 6 5 virtual machine in a few easy steps C Custom advanced Create a virtual machine with advanced options such as a SCSI adapter type virtual disk type and compatibility with Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 2 7 4 Sele
4. Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev 341 266 NTFS Create new patton as Please soecty new partition sire 225451 7 MB 349 651 ME deve letter Please soecty size of free space before the partition 4 OMB 329 437 MB Please comcfy size of free mace afterthe patton gt OMB 349 443 MB Pisaae select fle sytem for new partition NTFS Plann enter new volumne leial Hew Vokrri Piere specify ditve better e space GB Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 241 6 Define parameters of the future partition By all means it has to be primary and since we are going to install Windows XP the most preferable file systems are NTFS and FAT32 Click the Yes button to continue Create new partition as Ed Please specfy new pattion size 343451 7MB 249 451 MB Please speci size of free space before the partition a OMB 345 437 MB Please soecty size cf free space atter the partition i OMB 349 443 ME Please select file system fornew patton NTFS Please aniar naw volume laba hen cure Fissse spec dive later F Mom options Yas The Create Partition dialog offers a number of additional parameters that can also be of help However here we pay attention to the most relevant to fulfill our task 7 As aq result of the operation we have got a newly created FAT32 partition just enough in size to comfortably work with Windows XP
5. e Registration of new users e Registration of purchased products for registered users e Available around the clock downloading center where registered users can get product updates upgrades as well as all the necessary documentation e Downloadable free demo versions and open documentation for all users It is recommended to use Internet Explorer 5 or any compatible browser To register as a new user To register as a new user please do the following 1 Run an Internet browser and visit the page www paragon software com my account Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 19 2 Click Create of the Create a Paragon Account section 3 Fill out a registration form 4 Click Register The most important field in the form is an E mail address as it serves as a login to enter the system Besides your access password will be sent to this address as well To register a new product If you are a registered user and would like to register Hard Disk Manager 2010 please do the following l 2 Run an Internet browser and visit the page www paragon software com my account In the Email field of the Authorization section enter an E mail used for registration In the Password field enter a password received after registration Click Sign in If the user name and password are valid you will get to your account Click Register new product of the Products section Enter your produ
6. 10 Now you need to move the second primary partition just the way we did it with the logical partition to make the block of free soace adjoin the system partition Baie Hard Dk 0 Vitware Viware Vital 5 SCSI Dak Dov a i Data F W 140 466 nr Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 230 11 Finally increase size of the system partition Call the context menu for it right click of the mouse button to launch the Move Resize dialog 12 In the opened dialog shift the edge of the partition to the right thus increasing Its size Are you sure you want to move resize system volume C YOu are about to movevreaize NTFS voume No label C Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev Volume sire 162 547 31 MB 4 11 620 MB 162 542 MB Free sace before 0 37 ME O bytes 150 868 20 MB Fes space after 0 Byes a O bytes 150 86039 MB Sector to sector move Satect this option to move partion areas that dont contan any data This allows you to keep the parition s content after move exactly asf was but wil require more time 13 Apply all introduced changes By default our program works in the virtual mode of execution so you have to confirm all operations to let the program accomplish them To do that just click the Apply button on the Virtual Operations Bar Do mot show thie message again ET Laca Disk C ware VMware Virtual SC
7. Disk or Partitions to create a sector based backup of the whole disk system or only separate partitions E mail to create a file based backup of e mail databases accounts and address books of MS Outlook MS Express and Windows Mail Media Files to create a file based backup of all media files photo video music etc stored in the My Documents folder Documents to create a file based backup of all office documents stored in the My Documents folder Other Files and Folders fo create a file based backup of any files and folders 4 Depending on your choice you ll either need to specify more exactly the object of operation and then choose location for the resulted backup relevant for Disk or Partitions or Other Files and Folders or just choose location for the resulted backup for all the others backups as well as location for the resulted backup file please consult the To know more on how to specify the object of operation for sector and file other backup scenarios 5 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 174 Please enter a short comment to deecnbe the archive x Ho comment 6 Choose whether to accomplish the operation immediately set a time table for it or generate a script 7 On the Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process
8. Free space before 0 102093 Mb Z Mb Pree space afer 0 102093 Mb 10 Apply the pending changes Applying changes 2 pending operations Apply changes 7 You have pending op 11 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Operations list Suboperaiion progress Operaiion progress Time elapsed 00 00 58 Time to finish 01 35 42 Copied so far 248 5 Mb Read so far 365 9 Mb 7 8 Mb s To copy 746Gb Write so far 251 2 Mb 46 0 Mb s Overall progress See Data moving Creating new partition _ Moving drive dev sdadon hard disk 0 Scanning data structure may be a few minutes Restar enabled Data blocks calculating Quick data moving Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 234 Resizing partitions of Apple Boot Camp Let s assume you re a Boot Camp user who s got Windows XP as the second operating system Initially allocated space for the Windows partition has turned out to be insufficient for your current needs The only way out Is to take some space from your Mac partition thus redistributing the unused soace between the partitions To increase size of the Windows partition by taking Unused space from the Mac partition please do the following Express Launcher 1 Click the Partitioning button and then select Resize Partitions 2 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next but
9. Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk f Viste C New Volume F 158 7 GB NTFS 341 2GB NTFS 8 Hide the Windows Vista partition to avoid writing any data on it during the Windows XP installation as it is the best way to provide system independence To do that please call the context menu for it right click of the mouse button and launch the Hide Partition dialog Click the Yes button to continue Volume letter E 24 Volume label gt abe Partition ID O07 NTFS Tuma Sinis AT eee 20 Are you sure you want to hide the partition You are abouli to hide partion E No label NTFS Hiding the partion Suse diva kehes io be Changed A N Hiding of the system partition will make OS non bootable what is quite normal 9 Apply all introduced changes By default our program works in the virtual mode of execution so you have to confirm all operations to let the program accomplish them To do that just click the Apply button on the Virtual Operations Bar Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 10 The program will require the system restart to accomplish the operation in a special boot up mode Click the appropriate button to agree After all the operations are completed you will not be able to restart the system what is quite normal Nevertheless if you do try it the following error will occur Fah STOP cOO0021la Fatal System Error 12 Initial session process
10. S100 Freiburg Germany ang via aa i rou I ng wer Eygu accepi the terms of th agreement click the check box below fe i apcept the terms in the License Agreement a ri i a Decline Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 3 Once you accept the agreement you will see the Universal Application Launcher In general it enables to run components of the product load drivers for undefined hardware or establish a network connection Partitioning Backup and Recovery Copying and Migration Security and Optimization Boot management Tools Support Contacts Help amp Full Scale Launcher 4 Click on the required operation to start Hints on the selected at the moment item will helo you make the right choice Partitioning 29 What would you like to do Create Partition a new patton a ain its propanas Format Partition Fomai parbien to a file system of your chose Note si data this partion cordans wil be Damien Delete Partition Dese existing oadtion and al data amp contains Resize Partitions Mowe bordar of adjacent partitions of the same type both logical or both primary to recsinbute maca bawaan them Note ites wizard covers only banc resize scenanos f Pee Opeaion cani be cared out wih Epresa Hazira byna pease eich to Full Scale Launcher ght clicking on a partition yo
11. To increase size of a system partition by taking unused space from an adjacent partition please do the following Express Launcher 1 Click the Partitioning button and then select Resize Partitions 2 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Click on your system partition By doing that the wizard will automatically select an adjacent partition as well This partition will later act as a soace donor The vized wil resize mace between Local Disk C ari New Volume E cn Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual SCS Disk Dew Select left partition from a pair of adiacent partitions you would like to resize Right adjacent parttion wall be selected sutomaticgly Basic Hard Disk 0 VMwar V4ware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev If you ve got more than two partitions on your hard disk and a partition you A N need to increase is surrounded by other partitions you ve got the choice to 4 choose which partition will act as a space donor Just click on the left partition of the pair as the right one will be selected automatically Increase size of the system partition with the slider or manually by entering the required value Please note when you change size of one partition the size of the other will be changed as well thus redistributing the unused space between the partitions Plgsse spect new sizes of selected partbens Selected part of Basic Hard tek 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev BB New V
12. 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 10 e Smart Backup Wizard to secure system and data with the minimal efforts possible With a Unique intelligent work algorithm and a highly intuitive user interface you can easily back up exactly what you need the whole system e mail databases MS Outlook Express Windows Mail media files or office documents of the My Documents folder or any other files and folders e Smart Driver Injector to make the process of adding new drivers for P2V and P2P operations smooth and easy e Support for the latest operating systems from Microsoft Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 e Backup to an FTP server to provide a new level of system and data protection e Selective Restore to easily extract files and folders from a backup image with the Restore Wizard without the need to restore the whole image e Scheduling for the File backup to set up a timetable for any file based backup operation thus providing a new level of flexibility e Boot Corrector for WinPE to fix most of the system boot problems not only with the Linux and PTS DOS bootable recovery environments but WinPE 2 1 as well e The latest Linux kernel fo enjoy support of a wider range of hardware configurations including the brand new Intel ICH chipset e WinPE 2 1 based bootable recovery environment to enjoy support of a wider range of hardware configurations with the option to add drivers for specific hardware on th
13. Result After the operation is completed you receive a fully functional duplicate of the existing hard disk 3 To make a Win2K operating system bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Available operation scenarios e Migrating system to another hard disk Clone HDD One Button Copy Wizard The One Button Copy Wizard is a new approach of accomplishing such a technically complicated operation as cloning of a hard disk In fact with its helo you can do it just by pressing one button Restrictions So to successfully accomplish the operation your system should meet the following requirements e Atleast two hard disks one of which should contain data and the other is empty e The destination hard disk should have enough space to take contents of at least first partition of the source disk Startup There are several ways to start the One Button Copy Wizard Launcher e Inthe Main Menu select Wizards gt One Button Copy Wizard e On the Common Tasks Bar click the One Button Copy Wizard item of the Wizards menu Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 94 Setup If your system meets the mentioned above requirements the wizard will automatically accomplish the copy operation after a ten second pause fg One Button Copy Wizard Copying the hand disk This wizard wil copy hard disk Oto hand disk 3 Original hard dsk Basic Hoard Mak 0 VHware VMwore Vi
14. i Unallocated Volume size 35 44 ME fle 2MB 65 MB Free space before 30 02 MB Le Obytes 63 MB Fee space ater 0 Bytes lt Obyies 63 ME Select ihis option to move pariiion meas that dont contain any data This slows you to Keep the pariton s content ster move execthy as t was but wil require TS teres 5 Now you ve got a block of free space to add to the system partition Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 26 J Local Disk f 44 ME NTFS Enr E aT al l l Local Disk MB 25 4 Me NTFS E FATIE 6 Right click on the system partition then select Move Resize Partition ee Basic GPT Hard Dist IAME foe a Basic Hard Disk 3 24 4 me NTFS J SAHN OL a Mie TH A tt E Move Resize Partition Partition ID E7 NTFS L Convert File System NTFS version 301 we Sne Volume Size 24 2 MB Change Velume Label Partition size anit donee Free space 319MB Mark Partition as Active Activity No Make Partition Logical Hidden state Me Change Cluster Size Change Serial Number Change Partition ID Downgrade NTFS version pes Wipe Partrtion Disk Dev a Clear Free Space Se Test Surface Check File Systern Integrity Edit View Sectors Properties F 7 Inthe opened
15. 52 8Mb Applicatio Arhive details image of the hard disk farc_2705081452096 7 Nar 270508145209671 PBF 2008 May 27 Toe 14 5255 7 On the next page specify a hard disk to restore the image fo if several in your computer By default the program offers to restore the archive exactly where it belongs That s what we actually need Basic Disk 0 WMware Virtual IDE Hard Drive 40 0Gb _ Basic Disko Model VMware Virtual IDE Hard Drive Se 40 0 Gb Basic Disk 0 Sie 40 0 Gb C Primary NTFS 3 0 Gb WinkP Abo No D Primary NTFS 5 8 Gb Applic ation Mio No i Primary BackupCapsule 10 0 Gb No label Yes Yes pt Primary Free 17 2 Gb Ao No C Resize proportionally You can also make the program resize the on disk partitions proportionally if necessary by marking the appropriate checkbox i All contents on the disk selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during A N the operation 8 On the Restore Summary page you can see your hard disk layout before and after the operation Click the Next button to initiate the restore process View changes on Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 188 9 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Operations list Suboperaiion progress 1 Restore panition or disk P L Operation progress rns _ Time elapsed 00 00 31 Time 10 finish 00 03 47 Co
16. Creating a cyclic partition backup To automate the partition backup process please do the following Launcher 1 Launch the Cyclic Backup Wizard by selecting in the Main Menu Wizards gt Backup Utilities gt Cyclic Backup 2 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 On the What to back up page select a partition you want to make a cyclic backup of Chick the check box next to any hard disk deve or partition you want to back up Name Type a A My Computer My Computer a Basc Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev intemal Hard Desk Drs First Hard Disk Track Firat Track M GF Master Boot Record MER Primary 7 E Base Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual SSCS Disk Dev intemal Hard Disk Dris E First Hard Disk Track First Track Ge Master Boot Record MER Local Disk E Primary Be Local Disk 7 Primary 5 Local Disk 7 Primary GP Local Disk 7 F Basic Hard Disk 2 Vihware WMwane Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev The sire of obiectis to back up 499 9 GB Estimated archive size 7 2 GB A one partition at a time an FTP server to place backup images to Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved The current version of the program enables to make a cyclic backup of only 4 On the Backup Destination page select a mounted unmounted partition a network share or 175 Select a folder where archive should be placed and spectfy archive name Arc
17. Initially the program suggests some consistent value for this parameter So you may just press the Yes button to confirm the operation Assign a drive better This allows access to the volume by using the dive letter assigned The asegnment is not mcommended fF the volume containa a fhe system not supported by your operating system Asaga the folowang dave letter ay However you can manually define the required letter by selecting it from the pull down list of available drive letters 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation The current version of the program allows the user to mount archives of separate partitions only There is no possibility to mount archives located on physical unmounted partitions or in the bootable capsule Archives will only be mounted for the current session and won t be available after the system restart It is strongly recommended not to un mount backup images with Windows Disk Manager or other third side software Remove Drive Letter In order to un mount a backup image you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a backup image in the Archive Database 2 Call the Unmount Archive dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it Select in the Main Menu Archives gt Unmount the Selected Archive Onthe Explorer bar select the Unmount Archive item Call the popup menu for the selected image right click of the mouse button
18. Microsoft Hyper V object exceeds the maximum capacity for a certain virtual disk its vendor will Not all vendors may be available to choose If the capacity of the selected be shadowed 6 Depending on your choice the next page of the wizard enables to set the following parameters For a separate partition e Size of the virtual disk By default the program offers to create a virtual disk exactly the size of the selected object which you can upsize however Please note you can only increase size of the resulted virtual disk e Take all space for the partition If you Upsize the resulted virtual disk you can choose whether to occupy the whole disk soace by that partition or not e Adjust OS to virtual hardware to make sure the operating system will be bootable after the operation Please preview the resulling layout of the virtual disk before you proceed Basie Hard Disk 4 VMware virlual image Virtual Image p t Local Disk EE 24GB NTFS Avadabis options Curent size 2472 MB 2 GB 950 GE Take af space for the pattan Adu OS to vwrivel hardware For a hard disk e Size of the virtual disk By default the program offers to create a virtual disk exactly the size of the selected object which you can resize however e Resize partitions proportionally If you upsize the resulted virtual disk you can make the program proportionally change the size of partitions keeping their relative order intact e Adj
19. Save date to physical partitions Bum the data to CD or DVD 4 On the Select Destination Path page specify the exact place to copy the data to Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 22 Please select the destination path where to save the data from clipboard wkn io x 2 Address C B F Local Disk C D fiac B d arc_new Ea d archdb o E he b Total data size 4i2 KB Space avaliable on destination 489 8 GB 5 On the Transfer Summary page check all parameters of the operation Click the Next button to accomplish the operation Please overview the transler options You can etum to the comesponding page and change the ootiens by im CEL IE s selected 1 Total data sinc 412 KE 421 965 Bytes Transter Gestnation Destination path cy Space available on destination 429 6 GB 525 927 419 904 Bytes Overwnte existing files Peo 6 After the operation is completed close the wizard by pressing the appropriate button Volume Explorer To restore separate files and folders from a backup image with Volume Explorer please do the following Launcher 1 Click the Disk View tab and then choose Volume Explorer Name SS iio k _ Mrs ap Na ell eg 5 F 1 VMware VMware Vetual 5 SCSI Disk Devi 500 GB GP 1 Primary NTFS C3 495 9 GB 4 E 2 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Desk Devi 10GB E 3 VMware VMware Vitual 5 SCSI Disk Devi 80
20. Votual 5S SUSI iak er ij Be w New Volume Ej Piaese select the method of new partition creator Take all unallocated space at the end of the disk io Smart Mode Use 241 3 GB to cate a patton More info Advanced Mode Use 141 4 GB to create a partion More rig The number of available methods depends on your disk layout To learn more on the way the wizard works please click the corresponding link on the first page of the wizard 4 That s basically it By clicking the Next button the wizard will start modifying your disk layout If you ve got to do with the system partition resize like we do in our case you will be asked to restart your computer in a soecial boot up mode to accomplish the operation So click the appropriate button to agree Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 224 a Express Create Partition Wizard CPs Creating the partition The Wizard is now cresting the partion rin Top xpress Create Partition W ard System restart is required to complete the operation What would you like to do The operation Mowe parition needs ecclusive sooess to the volume C and gannad be completed without system restart After restart the operation wil continue in boottime mods Do not tum off the computer until the operation completes Restart the computer Fisease conim renat of your computer The operabon will be combnued ster EP Retry Manually close used files and
21. al the files that do not conform to the mask wil be omitted and will not get into the archive De not use include masks al files wil be included into the archive Use include masks Readable files 15 fiters A i filter Ren amis cated Soy Dame cegar chm Delete fitter him Delete fiker himi Delete fher pH Delete fiter id Delete fier hip Delete fie tt Delete fher xis Delete fiter i m P Fii Add category You can also create your own filter by clicking the Add category button i ai Create new category Name Fiter A You can use wildcards and Tio specty the mask Ox __ Canoe e Name Give to the filter any name you like but try to use an informative one e Filter Press the Browse button to select files or folders you would like to be included or specify a filter mask by using or wildcards e Description Add a short description to the filter not to miss it up later Click the OK button and you will get a new item on the list of filters By marking Uunmarking a checkbox opposite its name you can choose whether to use it or not _ By setting an include mask you automatically ignore files that do not match to AN it thus they won t be added to the backup image 7 Specify exclude masks The program includes a lot of ready made filters to effectively control contents of your backup images Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 165 Excl
22. extratunctionalty partion information png H A Existing file C Users user Desktop images extratunctionality_sendlogliles png has beer Existing fle C Users User Desktop imagen mdraluncionalty test _sufaca png has bem E 2 sting iie C lsers user Desktop images extrafunctionalty viewlogfiles png has been f This operation can also be accomplished with the WinPE recovery environment Restoring a file increment to a partition backup Let s assume that your operating system gives trouble because of a virus attack But you ve got a backup of your system partition on a local disk Besides you make file Increments of your documents and e mail database to that backup on a regular basis That s just enough to easily roll everything back to the point when run smoothly Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 205 To restore your system partition with a file increment from a backup image located on a local disk please do the following Launcher 1 Click the Restore item of the Wizards menu any of the ways described earlier can also be used here 2 On the Restore Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 On the Browse for Archive page specify the required file increment archive to your system partition backup e By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of Images contained in the Archive Database if any RI Show al z amp R ik Type Creati
23. ge Recent 7 13 2009 9 53 55 PM F jy Saved Games 7 13 2009 7504 25 PM To continue cick Mert E a E TE farn 5 Specify include masks The program includes a lot of ready made filters to effectively control contents of your backup images Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 170 Include masks manage files and folders that wi be added to the archive F imchade mask is speciied al the files that do not conform to the mask wil be omitted and will not get into the archive De not use include masks al files wil be included into the archive Use include masks Readable files 15 fiters A i filter Ren amis cated Soy Dame cegar chm Delete fitter him Delete fiker himi Delete fher pH Delete fiter id Delete fier hip Delete fie tt Delete fher xis Delete fiter i m P Fii Add category You can also create your own filter by clicking the Add category button i ai Create new category Name Fiter A You can use wildcards and Tio specty the mask Ox __ Canoe e Name Give to the filter any name you like but try to use an Informative one e Filter Press the Browse button to select files or folders you would like to be included or specify a filter mask by using or wildcards e Description Add a short description to the filter not to miss it up later Click the OK button and you will get a new item on the list of filters By marking
24. gt Backup Utilities gt Check Archive Integrity e On the Common Tasks Bar click the Check Archive Integrity item of the Wizards menu e Select a backup image in the Archive Database then call the popup menu for it and choose the menu item Check Archive Integrity Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e An archive to verify The Browse for Archive page enables to find a backup image you need By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 146 F Show al x amp B ik Type Creation Date Source Object Sane E 9 2 2009 5 24 27 AM Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware Vhiware Vitual 5 SCSI Disk Dev 10 9 2 2009 5 20 25 AM New Volume F 24 F 9 2 2009 5 1141 AM Fievel Archive 113 1 F 9 2 2009 5 06 03 AM Filetevel Archive 4 E 9 2 2009 2 33 00 AM Local Disk C 499 9 9 2 2009 2 21 01 AM Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev 10 a Switch to File Vi Archeve Fie Detada Backup date 5 2 2005 5 11 41 AM Total size 113 1 KB 115 869 Bytes Archive size 101 2 KB 103 723 Bytes Fia Cac images FLODIO00DIO00RI0000 archive pi To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details disolay a short description A To know more on the subject please con
25. problems with Linux Moreover you ve got the option to boot into the Low Graphics Safe Mode PTS DOS safe mode to cope with a serious hardware incompatibility In this case only the minimal set of drivers will be included like hard disk monitor and keyboard drivers This mode has simple graphics and a simple menu Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 180 gt Normal Node d Safe Hode d Lou Graphics Safe Mode Floppy disk amp Hard disk H HER Find OSes on your hard disks A By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period 3 In the Linux launch menu select Boot Corrector You can find it in PTS DOS as well p You can create delete and format hard disk Paragon Hard Disk Manager partitions using Paragon Hard Disk Manager which will stan now Upon the yan please select the drive and one of ins partitions or its free space Then activate the Partition pull down menu and select one of One Button Copy Wizard the partitioning operations Simple Restor Wizard Wipe Wrard Express Rese Wizard File Transfer Wizard Boot Corrector fe Network Configurator Log Saver Eject CD DVD Start the command line 4 On the Wizard s Welcome page select the Correct the Master Boot Record MBR option Pease choose the operation Search for Windows installations to correct Correct the Master Boot Record MBR 2 Correct ihe par
26. 140 Name Source Path E Local Dak F J Pg SS images F images Hama D Cin aay Sys hibet sys al a pagefie sys m eee a DVD RW Dive D E Local Disk E 3 E Local Disk F z ee ME F System Volume khiomstsn Total data size 132 8 KB A N Files directories deleted from the Clipboard remain intact on source disks e Destination to store the object s The File Transfer Wizard allows copying data to local or network drives to physical partitions without drive letters assigned or burning them to CD DVDs Choose the way the data will be stored There are several ways the Wizard can store your data Plese select how would you like io save the data G Save data to local networ dives Chena misii files Save data to physical partitions Bum the dats to CO or DVD e Revision of changes The Transfer Summary page provides structurally divided information on all the actions made in the wizard Check the changes and come back to any step of the wizard if necessary by following the required hyperlink Please overview the transfer options You can retum to the comesponding page and change the options by clicking on tithe hyp inki Object s selected 132 8 KB 136 024 Bytes G jf Space available on destination 90 6 GB 526 827 834 752 Bytes Oversrite existing files Na Result After the operation is completed the required data will be placed into the specified destination Availab
27. 4295 P HF Type Partition Version 131083 ommesnil Ne comment Password protection Not protected Time VVA 337221 AM Name arc merge Location Gat meme Comment Backed up on S420053 11 01 06 AM UTC time Extended comment Ho comme nt Password protection ot protected Time 9 3 2009 4 01 07 AM Sire 31 ME 32 574 464 Bytes After the operation is completed you receive a new full partition archive It is placed into the specified destination a local or network disk or a CD DVD disc its features defined by the wizard This function is currently unavailable for modification of entire hard disk backups This operation can also be accomplished with the WinPE recovery environment Recovery Scenarios Fixing MBR after a boot virus attack Let s assume that the MBR Master Boot Record of your hard disk has been corrupted as a result of a boot virus attack thus your system fails to boot To fix the MBR of your hard disk please do the following 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Recovery Media Builder can help you prepare the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery environment either on a CD DVD disc or a thumb drive To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Inthe boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment more preferable or Safe Mode to use the PTS DOS recovery environment in case you ve got
28. 5 GENT Ml 102 5GENT Please select the method of new partition creation Smart Mode Use 182 1 GB io create a partition Mors info i Advanced Mode Use 108 5 GE to create a partion More info Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 100 The number of available methods depends on your disk layout AN To learn more on the way the wizard works please click the corresponding link on the first page of the wizard Create Partition Wizard Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e Partition destination Select a hard disk if the computer has several hard disks and then choose position for the future partition on the disk at the end preferable at the beginning or somewhere in the middle between other partitions Orn this page OU Can saeni Tard Geox end ine cece Wer io cregia 6 new pation Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev j a Local Disk C il a data 2 Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev hi W Local Disk k k i a ia rae EE ea p 2 Baa ety r 5 ra m yri j m on ja ines Lise the Dators lo move the maker 0 TAJ MARA Oy MEUSE AmA DON wi De Created WTAE the makeri By default the program allows you to create a new partition only as the last primary or as the last logical drive within the extended partition However by activating the advance mode on the first page of the wizard you can rem
29. 9 2 2009 50542 AM are_images 9 3 2009 7 33 53 AM DIFFI285646273330000000 9 3 2009 7 20 53 AM 3 j FLOodDDO00N000000000 9 3 2009 7 30 58 AM LEKE SR2W97IESSAM Fies ofpe Archive fies Comment No comment is avaiable Backup date S320053 7 35 58 AM Total size 136 9 KE 140 120 Bytes Archive size 1 8 KB 1 865 Bytes Fia Gare magen DIFF 12694673000000 FL L00000 archive pi Base archive G arc_images arc_images PBF A To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter 4 On the How to Restore File Complement page select whether you want to restore both the partition archive and the desired file increment or just the file increment In our case we choose the first option Tou have selected fie complement lo a volume ahchwe This archive can be restored together wih the Volume or you can oni restore the files saved in the fle archive OD Note you choose to restore archive together wth a volume all data on the target volume will be lost The contents of the volume wil be completely replaced from archive 5 On the Where to Restore page specify a hard disk then one of its partitions to restore the image fo if several in your computer By default the program offers to restore the archive exactly where it belongs That s what we actually need Please select a place you would ike to restore the archive to Note that F you select an edsting hard disk or partition is content wil be de
30. CD DVD discs required for the operation Add comments to your backup describing its contents Pease enter a short comment to descibe the achwa i Ry He comment Choose whether to accomplish the operation immediately or generate a script On the Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process This operation can also be accomplished with the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery environments Backing up a hard disk or partition to a network drive To back up an entire hard disk or a separate partition and then place the resulted image to a network share please do the following Launcher Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 156 1 Click the Back up a Disk or Partition item of the Wizards menu any of the ways described earlier can also be used here 2 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 On the What to back up page mark the appropriate option opposite a hard disk s name or a partition s name depending on the chosen task Gick the check box next to any hard disk dave or partition you want to back up Name Type A My Computer My Computer 3 E F Base Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 505 Disk Dev intemal Hard Desk Orr 3 EN First Hard Disk Track First Track P Ge Master Boot Record MBR fal I ical ek EC B Primary 1 E Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SC
31. Co Local Disk 7 Frmary Lin Ext 14GB 581MB F New Volume F Primary NTFS 24GB 3563MB e FA System Volume infioem H NEW VOLUME E Primary FATI2 34 GE 4 KB Hame New Volume F Volume label New Volume Rie sstem NTFS Total size 24GB Used space 356 3 MB Fee space ZGB To select where to restore the selected objectis cick Nemi Data size to restore 13 2 8 KB If you select separate files or folders to restore the wizard will continue working AN as though you ve got to do with a file backup e A place to restore Selecting the destination please note all contents on the disk selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation Basic Hard isk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev if g Local Disk C 499 98 NTFS Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Dick Dev W Local Disk E z g Unalloc i 14G E 2 2G me 3468 FATI To help you get a clear cut picture of the operation outcome the program allows inspecting the resulted disk layout Restoring Partition e Size of the restored volume and free space before and after it on the disk Geometry Restore Options Please specify the size of the restored partition 2470 amp 36 MB 2470 MB Fiesse apecfy size of free maca befor the partition 0 OMB 2835 ME Pleas epecty size of free space ster tha pariiion 0 gt OMB 2434 MB e Drive letter assignment after restore The pull down list co
32. DARE CONGO OPON eea EE A TATO OA AOA OA heeded 6 FIOM FLOCSSSIM CG OLON lt scceeecetasasea iba ET te sean clas TE cetera eats anes weenie meee 62 RUMANO BOCKUD ODORS arrana sivaaiadsaiuetne eacusaadanamonsconeaaiadaanasn a 63 EASED E D IEEE ET OERE O EAT EEE IE VETIA E A OA E OTT EEE IE VEI OAE EET TI 65 Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved Operaion Dependency ODORS muani raa A EAT A A ees 66 VATS OCS OPISNE marren EE S A E N EER 67 FIIGLS SIGMA Conver Om OO DIOS niare an E E 68 CODY BOCKUO CUGE ODIOS oeron E E EE T E 69 FI BOC KOH CCI OPON S sax pict eaa e ale O E O AN EE EOT E 70 FS BOC KUO ICI GS ODIOS arroen ena AEE E EEE E EE EEEO i EOGGIES OD ONS airen ar detec velba EN O ETIE A TO teas a eens inate aes aceon aie eects 72 WDE IO FIO ING etic aves sts enn 24 pata atone aha lara annette nna ew a ret Sana A alee taser N 73 Getting Information on Disks and BACKUP IMAGEL cccssccsssccesccsscccssccesccesccesccsesccesceesceees 73 Viewing DiI Kk OO CSS aisean nana aa a E a T O A ET O OOA T sabes 73 VIEWING WMOGES Pil OD T O aaron T T E A O 75 Dala BACKUD GING ROS CU 6 cien T T EET teense tens EREE OEE EA 80 CHS GINNO BOC KUO NOS SS ara er AA A TTA OOA AO ON AOA AR 80 RESTONS 51 eand D aa T A E E E T O T T adise tates eee 86 CODY TASKS nonnii E EE E E E ENE NAN 91 COnN AN DE aeaa rear a E ET ANE O E TT OTN T 9 BOOLMONGGEMEN nononono oirein ETO 96 Parion Managemen l enassiencnonoien i i an ae E
33. Disk Dew i w Local Disk er oe nies Basic GPT Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dew J o Unallocated 565 88 2 On the Wipe Mode page select the wipe out all the data to irreversible destroy all on disk information SS ee a Wine out a the data Choose thus option you want to destroy completely afl the daia on the selected obieni Choose ihis opion you want to destroy the traces of date thal may have been left efter en ordinary delete Ci aon 3 On the Wipe Method page select a specific data erasure algorithm or choose to create a customized one in our case we prefer to use a certified military standard US DoD S220 22 M l You can see tha aloorthm desorption and sst the level of verficaton on the next page Create your own Date Santizston method You can create your own Data Saniization method 4 The next page of the wizard enables to get detailed information on the selected algorithm choose whether to carry out residual data verification or not specifying the percentage of sectors to check and estimate the time required to accomplish the operation Vige mathod US DoD 3220 22 M Overate all addressable locations wih a character ie complement then a random character and vey Erase passes court 3 Wery passes count 1 Percentage of sectomto check 100 amp Aporcimate wine time 14 02 40 You can skip verifying completely or partly by disabling amp or reducing percertage
34. Express Create Partition e On the Common Tasks bar click the Express Create item of the Wizards menu Create Partition Wizard Startup There are several ways to start the Create Partition Wizard Express Launcher e Click the Partitioning button and then select Create Partition Launcher e Inthe Main menu select Wizards gt Create Partition e On the Common Tasks bar click the Create Partition item of the Wizards menu Dialog Startup In order to start the operation you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a block of free soace on the Disk Map 2 Call the Create Partition Dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it e Select in the Main Menu Partition gt Create Partition e Call the popup menu for the block of free space right click of the mouse button then select the menu item Create Partition Express Create Partition Wizard Setup Thanks to a highly intelligent work algorithm the wizard requires minimal involvement in the operation thus you only need to choose a method you find the most suitable to create the partition if several available which actually differ in the amount of space to allocate For easy perception you can see the resulted disk layout on the disk map by selecting this or that mode The result yOu Wil gei Bier eooyang ine changes Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev i a Local Disk C a ta data Z 1 i New V 282 GB NTF 108
35. Full Scale Launcher in the Express Launcher 1 In the main window select your hard disk on the Disk Map to make a block of free soace on it Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev UBB Local Disk E 499 5 GB NTFS 2 Release some free space not less than 10 GB fo install Windows XP from the partition To do that please call the context menu for the selected partition right click of the mouse button and launch the Move Resize dialog Are you sure you wani to move resize volume E You are about to move resize NTFS volume Mo label E Basic Hand Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev 511 9978 fe 101 MB 511 997 MB 0 97 MB 2 Obytes 511 991 43 MB 0 Bytes Obytes 511 888 18 MB Sectorte sector move Select this option to move partition areas that dont contain any data This allows you to keap the parbhen s content after move escecth as E was but wi regure more time 3 Inthe opened dialog shift the edge of the partition to the left by the drag and drop technique While doing this free soace from the partition will be released displayed in aqua green You can also do it manually by entering the exact size of free space Click the Yes button to continue Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 240 Are you sure you want to move resize volume E You are about to movey resizne NTFS
36. General copy and backup options Backus mage opini aa T ag ome moms attioning Lopy and backup options Hdd raw processing CHIA g oa ji m STL ORS Cop Backup an amtie hand disk sector by sector without taking into account i Pot procesno options pation structures Sr fue Bee Ue aya pm he et T mpna J T r Email ootions Partition raw pocassig Operation desandency ootions Copy Backup each partion sector by sector All sectors wil be processed one Virtual mode cobors one even unused sectors Requires more bme to complete the o File system compersion options opy Backup exciude options Hie Backup exclude options He Backup include options A F z Anilam T Gi JP le Perform incremental copy This option is intended for copying only changes on the hard disk since a previo copy operation The program pecfonns comparison between a previous copy of i hard diss and ts current state Only sectors that ane diferent wal be written to as 5 copy Wipe Options Shap 05 anday files Choose this option to skip OS acodliary files fie pagefile sys hibecfll sys atc Tr wil reduce operation time and backup image size Shap archive files stored in archive library Choose this optien to skip archive fies stored in archive library he vil reduce operation time and backup image siz This section contains a set of options that will be taken into account during copy an
37. Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dew i io Geometry re Restore Options Please speciy the size of the restored partition 511998 8 15 MB 511958 ME Pease speciy sre of free space before the partition 0 OMB 503279 MB Please specify sre of free space oher the partition 0 A OMB 503279 ME 6 Complete the wizard and then apply the pending changes 7 The program will require the system restart to accomplish the operation in a special boot up mode Click the appropriate button to agree Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved System restart ic required to complete the operation What would you like to do The operation Restore partition or disk needs exclusive access to the volume continue in boottime mode Do not tum off the computer until the Please confirm restart of your computer The operation wll be continued after system restart E Retry The operation cannot be completed without restart because some files are in use and tie prevent e access lo the volume eo ever Ot ae eT ieee 8 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Suboperation progress CC Y Restore partition or disk Hork time dO 00 55 Tine to finishd0 60 26 Done 521 HE Read 532 MB 35 2 MB s All 8 71 GB Hrite 532 MB 53 2 MB s Overall progress LZ Loading Pa
38. Is stored in Log files In order to send log files fo the Paragon Support Team you should take the following steps Express Launcher e Click the Partitioning button and then select Log Saver Launcher 1 Call the Send Log Files dialog in the Main Menu Tools gt Send Log Files Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 149 2 Provide a customer name and a product serial number 3 Give a detailed description on the encountered problem Send log files Send log files Please enter shot desorption of your problem and send log files to support Customer Nama John Smith Serial Number OSide OSdec a4 c 7dal 8 24 7aa Content of inquiry Heip By clicking the Send button the built in mail client will generate a template request with attached compressed log files and then send it to the Paragon Support Team Log Files Log files are simple textual files that can be opened by any text editor There are several log files automatically generated by the program Stubact log Contains in depth information on parameters and performance of all operations carried out by the program Pwlog txt Besides brief overview on operations it also contains detailed information about the state of all hard disks Cdb log Contains low level information on the CD DVD devices used in the system BioNTlog txt Itis an OS dependent supplementary log file derived from Bioxx dll It or Bio95log txt May contain valuable infor
39. It cannot convert a free soace on an existing partition to a new partition 4 cannot copy a partition There can be a number of reasons for that The source or target disk you select is a dynamic disk 4 primary partitions or three primary partitions and an extended one already exist on the target disk 5 need to copy a partition But when selecting a place where to make a copy always get a crossed circle sign no matter which partition is selected The program enables to copy a partition only to a block of Un partitioned space If you don t have a block of free space on your hard disk please delete or reduce an existing partition to accomplish the operation 6 cannot do anything with my USB flash drive get a crossed circle sign when trying to select any area on it Some USB flash drives don t have the MBR Master Boot Record that s the cause of your problem To fix the issue please use the Update MBR function of our program or fixmbr of the Windows installation disc to write a standard code to your flash drive 7 When trying to back up my system the program asks to restart the computer Most likely the Hot Processing mode is disabled Please make it active in the program settings 8 When backing up a partition with the VSS Volume Shadow Copy Service mode the program throws VSS could not be started for processed volume Most likely you try to back up a FAT32 partition which is not supported by VSS
40. KB 9 2 2009 5 11 41 AM Ge es bi Y LEN Archive File Details Comment images Backup date 9 2 2009 5 11 41 AM Total sive 1132 1 KB 115 869 Bytes Archive size 1012 KB 103 723 Bytes Fla Cpe mages FLOD000D000000000000 archive pf A O AANE S T A E g Image Properties chapter After the operation is completed you receive an incremental backup of the selected file archive It is placed into the same destination as the base image A This operation can also be accomplished with the WinPE recovery environment Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 173 Backing up with Smart Backup Wizard To let Smart Backup Wizard help you back up exactly what you need and then place the resulted image to the required location please do the following Launcher 1 Click the Smart Backup item of the Wizards menu any of the ways described earlier can also be used here 2 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 On the What to back up page click on the section you find answering to your task F Disks or Partitions Back up your hamd desk of a spamie partion pA E mail Back up emal messages accounts and the address book of M5 Outlok Outlook Epress and Vinetoves Mal Mecha Ales Back up your photos videos music and other media fies located in the Wy Documents folder Docimenis Back up documents of al mior office famiats located in the My Documents folder saadi files and folders to back up
41. Launcher Click Switch to Full Scale Launcher in the Express Launcher 1 In the main window select the required hard disk if several on the Disk Map S E Basc GPT Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Vitual 5 SCSI Disk Dev E Local Disk f7 fh Ci Uratocates ATIBEBOH Data F B TEMP G 2Q0GBNTFS E 160 3GBFATJZ 2 Choose a space donor partition and then call the context menu for it right click of the mouse button to launch the Move Resize dialog Back Up Partiton pate e ioe Burn Partiton on CO or DVD Took Changes Wizards Hard Disk Partition Archives Vi Restore Partition iF off KC iy Format Partition Disk View Scheduled Tasks Archives Help Delete Partition Mere Min e Hesze Partition ist Check File System Integrety Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disi Edit View Sectors E Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev Convert File spat E Local Disk L g can mnt 4 Change Volume Label Remove Drive Letter 4 E E Eede Partition Sona F Hide Partition a G Teves Make Partition Primary GE Basic Hard Disk i Meare Viiware Virtual S SCS Cesk Der ter Siz A Change Cluster Size a Local Disk Sieh tes x e she ila lt iana Change Serial Number Bia E Basic GPT Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virwal 5 SC51 Disk 3 eh P Change Partition ID P Local Disk E E eslocatad Wipe Parti
42. Please use the Paragon Hot Processing mode instead 9 cannot back up my hard disk to an external hard drive Once started the operation is aborted with the following error Hard Disk management Error Code 0x1 100a What is wrong here Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 284 The problem is that the Microsoft VSS service is set as the default Hot Processing mode in the program But this service has not been started in your WindowsxXP Windows2003 Vista Please start this service right click on My Computer gt Manage gt Services gt find Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy Service and make It active Set also to start it automatically 10 When running a backup operation with the Paragon Hot Processing mode enabled get an error error code 0x1200e Internal error during Hot Backup Most likely your hard disk contains bad blocks Please fix the Issue with your HDD manufacturer s tool You can find a name of the tool you need here http kbo paragon software com 11 When running a backup operation with the Microsoft VSS mode enabled get the following error error code 0x12016 VSS can t read volume data Most likely your hard disk contains bad blocks Please fix the Issue with your HDD manufacturer s tool You can find a name of the tool you need here http kbo paragon software com 12 When trying to back up to a network share get the following error i o error or can t open creat
43. Primary Bi Local ik i Primary Coloca Disk 7 Primary BP Loca Disk i Primary F Basic Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev intemal Hard Disk Dris 4 F The size of obiecdis lo back up 499 9 GB Estimated archive size 7 2 GB You ve got the option to modify the default backup settings by marking the appropriate checkbox on this page By default the program will take into account exclude filters set in the Settings dialog 5 On the Backup Destination page select the Save data to the Backup Capsule option There pe several ways the Wizard can store your dats Fiesse select how would you like to save the achive Save data to the Backup Capsule Save data to local network drives Save data to physical partitions Save data to FTP locations Bum the data to CO or DVD 6 Edit the archive name if necessary Please specty the archive name Archive name wil be used as a subfolder where backup data fies wil be stoned Archive details Archive mame ac 03050507 10071085 Estmated archive size 4 4 G8 Soece avealable on backup destination 33 GB Please take into account values of the parameters Estimated archive size and Space available on backup destination if the archive size exceeds the 4 available space delete outdated backups from the Backup Capsule or resize it with the Manage Backup Capsule Wizard 7 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Pleas
44. Program Files S This wizard allows you to perform a range of operations on the selected a E ProgramData archive to creste a new backup entity that is to synthesize new backup P ES Recovery archives without doing backup physical EZ System Volume kiamat mh es j ilaa p 4 i F Show al SRR E 3 Type Creation Date Source Obeact Sine Flags Co Mounted i 9 2 2008 233 00 AM Local Disk C 455 5 GB Mi a 9 2 2009 2 21 01 AM Base Hard Disk 7 VMware Viware Vieual 5 SCS Disk Dew 10GB 1 Explorer Bar that displays properties of the selected image 2 Volume Explorer that enables to access the selected image as a regular folder to explorer its contents or to retrieve certain files 3 Archive List that displays a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Besides the program provides all the necessary functionality to manage backup images in the database add delete mount refresh etc All panels offer a synchronized layout and are separated by vertical and horizontal expandable sliders allowing the user to customize the screen layout A Data Backup and Rescue In this chapter you will find all the information necessary to establish a reliable data protection system Creating Backup Images We have already mentioned that the most prevalent way to protect valuable data is to create backup copies backup images in terms of the program of it Depending on a type of information Copyright 1994 201
45. The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Change Partition ID Partition ID is a file system identifier It is saved in the Partition Table and is Used to quickly detect a partition of the supported type By manually changing Its value you can manipulate accessibility of partitions In order to change a partition ID you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Call the Change Partition ID dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it Select in the Main Menu Partition gt Modify gt Change Partition ID On the Explorer Bar click on the current partition ID Call the popup menu for the selected partition right click of the mouse button on the Disk Map then select the menu item Change Partition ID 3 Set anew ID for the selected partition Are you sure you wami to change system ID of the partition F Curent system Di w07 NTFS Changing system ID might prevent some kt NTFS Please enter ID manualy e Predefined ID Select from the pull down list the required ID Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 124 e Enter ID manually With the spinner control set the required ID value It has to be a 1 2 digit hexadecimal number 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Change Serial Number of a Partition FAT16 FAT32 and NTFS file systems include the Serial Number p
46. Total size 55GB Sectors per track 63 Heads 255 Cylinders 1245 Create an image of the entire disk Back up al the data this hard disk contains All lhe parhhons on thet disk wall be added to the archive Restore an image of the entire disk Warning This operstion wil delete all the data on this hard disk All the partitions will be replaced wilh ones from the image pou have chosen ou may also be asked bo restart pour computer dunng the operasion Copy the entire hard disk Create a copy of the entire hard dk Al the pashtions on this disk will be copied on the epecihed target disk The model and serial number of the disk serve as the title of the browsed page The disk layout Is shown in form of a circular graph where the color of a sector corresponds to a file system of an appropriate partition On the right you may see a table which contains the following information Type of hard disk basic or dynamic Total size in GB Information on geometry of the disk amount of sectors per track heads and cylinders Below there is a list of available wizards If you click a corresponding record the appropriate wizard will be started All default values for the operation parameters will correspond to the disk s settings The list of wizards contains a detailed description of tasks that can be performed by the wizard This nullifies the possibility of selecting the wrong wizard Logical Disk G Yolume letter G Senal number
47. Transfer Wizard Boot Corrector Network Coniigurator Log Saver Eject CD DVD Siar the command line 3 In the main window select your non bootable Windows partition on the Disk Map N Volume Type File System Size Used Free Volume label 9 g Basic Disk 0 VMware Virtual IDE Hard Drive 250 Gb Basic Disk 0 Size 250 Gb o Primary NTFS 200 Gb L7 Gb 199 Gb VISIA 1 D Primary FAT 32 49 7 Gb 24 9 Mb 496Gb No label 4 Unhide the partition by calling the context menu for it right click of the mouse button and then selecting Unhide Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved Create an image of partition Burn an image of panition to CD DVD yp Resiore partition from image AltR Free Volume label rine Co aition Alt min PYP 199Gb Vista mim 496Gb No label L fe Abe Alt Format i a sej active Wipe partition Clear free space Convert label Resize Move on as Urwa urt Change cluster size Modify Change root size Change boot size Retest surface 5 Only for the Windows XP Windows Vista scenario you need to make the system partition active as well by calling the context menu for it right click of the mouse button and then selecting Set Active I NTFS Mo label Create an image of partition AN B J 7 Bum an image of partition to CD DVD d lard Drive Size 40 0 Gb vo Restore partition fro
48. Used to store the temporary hot backup data by default C e Attempts to start VSS Here you can set how many attempts to start Microsoft VSS the program is to do before automatically rebooting the system and accomplishing the operation in a special boot up mode Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 63 e Timeout between attempts in seconds Here you can set a time period between different attempts to start Microsoft VSS e Switch between hot processing technologies Mark the checkbox to automatically switch between Paragon Hot Processing and Microsoft VSS if one of them is unavailable at the moment By clicking the link at the bottom of the window you can jump to the Run during Backup Options Run during Backup Options Q Edit settings p fia i F a tes ad tie 1S Run dunng backup options Ea StL Fan iny Gye Y m1m Paritiomung optiona Copy and backup options For backup operations in the Paragon Hot Processing mode you have a possbility t fun adama programs and commands at dierent stages of the backup process The ey point to ink such execution te i a shod parod of lime whan a smapshot is lamer Snapshot is a map of usad blocks the system is totally frozen for writing when is taken T Fm m pi oe oe Se Ree Plaga spec executed fies for each Mage F necessary Operation CASO Sy OCR de ootians Execute at the beginning of the backup process before taking a snapshot See
49. a Fr a Ej A Tl ip I Cases Or ny derpaa you Bre Mee lo eet ey of ost pomy perio Pease note inet t ome on the selected partition wil be deleted F you choose to format t later in this wizard Besides make sure no Opansiing amen has aready been installed on that partition 4 On the next page of the wizard define size of the new partition If the selected hard disk contains blocks of free space the wizard will automatically merge them all and allocate the resulted soace to create the partition If not it will take 50 of the unused space of an adjacent partition thus resizing It Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved You can aalect athe a block of unallocated space of the dek of an edana petition unused space of which v De served Io CEEE A ey Bern Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware YMwae Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev m Vista C gi O Unallocated DL 158 7 GB NTFS 241 2GB New voume current gaze is 341 2168 TP a aa z s z H Wel ce mn oT 5 fm Volume Sire 0 Bytes lex Volume Sine M1208 5 The next page enables to specify a file system and a number of additional parameters Since we are going fo install Windows XP the most preferable file systems are NTFS and FAT32 Click the Yes button to continue be of help However here we pay attention to the most relevant to fulfill our On this page you can specify a number of additional parameters that can also task 6 Enter a labe
50. a mounted network share You will be prompted to choose a joc ation you wanito save the archive to Burn data to CD DVD Choose this option if you want the Wit ard to burn the data to CO or DVD You will be prompted to choose a CD or DVD RW drive On the Select Destination Path page select a hard disk to copy the data to by pressing the standard browse button Select path Space available on destination 8 6Gb Total data size nja 10 On the Transfer Summary page check all parameters of the operation Click the Next button to accomplish the operation 11 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 211 Operations lisi Suboperation progress DETO 1 Transfer user data Operation progress on ERAL LLLILILLLITELELLLLLITELEL LL L ELELE LL Time elapsed 00 00 03 Time to finish 00 00 00 Copied so larr 17 20 Mb Overall progress Transfering jmintidiskfhdal Documents and Settings User E Mail Database to fmnpdisk hda2E Mail Data Transiering jmntidisk hdal Documents and Settings UserMy Documents to mntdisk inda2 My Document Alloperations have been finished 12 After the operation is completed close the wizard by pressing the appropriate button 13 Turn off the computer A N This operation can also be
51. all servers is available Adaptive Restore Windows family operating systems are notorious for their excessive sensibility to hardware especially when it turns to replacement of such a crucial device as HDD controller or motherboard actually Windows will most likely fail fo boot as a result of this operation With our technology available in the P2P Adjust OS Wizard you can make your Windows bootable on some other computer by allowing automatic injection of all required drivers and the other actions crucial for a migration of this kind Actually this operation for Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 and Windows Vista 7 Server 2008 differs a bit so does the wizard s work algorithm Adaptive Restore for Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 It actually implies three operations e Providing the ability to change the Windows kernel settings to the most suitable for your new configuration The program will automatically add all available Windows HAL and kernels to the boot menu the boot ini file to choose the required platform in case your system fails to boot Uniprocessor Multiprocessor or Old legacy PC without ACPI You can later remove them from the menu either under Windows or with Boot Corrector If you ve got a 64 bit operating system no options will be added to the boot menu e Automatic replacement of the boot critical drivers HDD controller PS 2 and USB mouse and keyboard to the default Windows drivers to provide the maximum level
52. an error System Virtualization With new powerful x86 Computers system virtualization has become extremely popular It s a software technology that enables to run several virtual machines on one physical machine providing resources of that single computer are shared across several environments As a result one and the same physical computer can have multiple OSs and applications operating simulfaneously thus opening up enormous opportunities for both business and home users exactly e Avoid underutilization of up to date powerful computers Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 39 Increase flexibility of a physical infrastructure Provide for increased availability of hardware and applications Cut expenses on hardware and energy Guarantee smooth and cost saving system migration Enjoy working with old applications you can t launch on your current PC Take advantage of having multiple operating systems on one Windows PC including Linux Mac OS X etc Forget about hunting for replacement of the failed hardware and many more Known Issues l You should install integration services e g VMware Tools on the virtual system yourself We only guarantee its smooth startup At the startup a virtual machine e g VMware Workstation might notify you that the used virtual disks are of old format and require update You can update your disks since this procedure involves change of a version
53. and follow external links from to get additional information COks iiaei inte es ga aii seers rides TITER Version information Paragon Hard Disk Manager version 2010 build 9307 29 12 09 Server Components versions Paragon Base Services Library version 1 1 build 3307 29 12 09 hdm di version 10 0 release 10 Build 10707 biont dil version 10 0 relaage 10 build 10707 biont sys version 10 0 relasse 10 build 10707 es Support links Company Home Page http www parage Sales E mail sales paragon soltware co Sales Phone 49 0 761 59 018 201 To easily navigate through browsed pages the program provides the following functionality BUTTON FUNCTIONALITY Return to the previously browsed page Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 54 Open the next browsed page 0 Stop loading the current page Refresh the contents of the current page Partition List The Partition List is another helpful tool that enables you to get a clear cut picture of the current state of the system hard disks partitions Partitions are sorted according to their starting position For every item of the list there is the possibility to call the context sensitive popup Menu with available operations Besides the program provides detailed information on all hard disks partitions found In the system including the following properties Name Volume label if
54. be a whole hard disk a single partition or a block of unsllocated space Tou can set io wipe af cata on ine partion or ony unoocucesd space an t see he nent step Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual SCSI Disk Dev Local Disk C i data Me 222 59GB NTFS 217GR NTFS Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev i W Local Disk 499 9 GB NTFS Basic GPT Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dew B w Unallocated 655 266 e Wipe mode This section enables to switch between two options Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 129 LP Pa yl E i yt J rE OL ie GAR Choose ihis opion amp YOU wart io desio cometary M iha daa on e seisce oneg Mias Li ah om i anii kt el ators a Sono Vie Frit g CORTON TE destroy the traces of date thal may have been lef after an ordinary delete Wipe out all data Select the option fo irreversibly destroy all on disk data of the selected object Clear wipe free space Select the option to destroy any remnants of deleted files directories left on disk without affecting the used data A The Clear Free Space operation is available only for Logical and Primary partitions of known file systems e Wipe method Here you can select a specific data erasure algorithm or create a customized method by marking the appropriate option T J F Soectic algorthm WS Cie th 577 TIN me oe ee ee
55. data to from a network computer e Recordable CD DVD drive to burn data to compact discs e External USB hard drive to store backup data Installation As we have already mentioned only Windows components of the product require installation So to install Paragon Hard Disk Manager 2010 under Windows please do the following 1 Run Setup Application Click on the MSI file This application will guide you through the process of the program installation The setup utility is compiled with the InstallShield SDK hence it contains the standard user interface and set of installation steps A In case there is some previous version of the program installed on the computer the program will offer the user to uninstall it first 2 Starting Setup The Welcome page informs that the application is being installed Click the Next button to continue 3 Confirm License Agreement The License Agreement page displays the Paragon License Agreement Read the agreement and then select the appropriate option to accept If you do not agree with any conditions stated there the installation process will be interrupted By clicking the Print button the License Agreement may also be printed out 4 Provide Registration Information On the Registration page you are to provide your product key and serial number 5 Provide Customer Information On the Customer Information page you are to provide the standard information i e a user name and an organization Besid
56. devices available in the system at the moment if several Povramable diras Dive __ Supported Formats Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 25 7 You will have to confirm the operation A WARNING As a result of this operation ALL DATA on the flash memory media will be ERASED i Chick OR if you agree or Cancel if you do not Booting from the Linux DOS Recovery Media The Linux DOS recovery environment can be used to boot your computer into Linux or PTS DOS to get access to your hard disk for maintenance or recovery purposes It also has the PTS DOS safe mode which may help in a number of non standard situations such as interfering hardware settings or serious problems on the hardware level In this case only basic files and drivers such as hard disk drivers a monitor driver and a keyboard driver will be loaded Startup To start working with the Linux DOS recovery environment please take the following steps 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Recovery Media Builder can help you prepare the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery environment either on a CD DVD disc or a thumb drive To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Launch a boot mode you need Normal Safe Low Graphics Safe in the Boot menu A By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle peri
57. dialog shift the right edge of the partition to the right end thus increasing its size Are you sure you want to move resize volume You are about to moveresze NTFS volume System Volume size 54 45MB Free space before Bytes 2MB 64 MB e Obytes 61 98 MB Obytes 61 52 MB Sectorto sector move to keep the partitions content after move acacihy as L was but wi require more time Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 262 8 Apply all introduced changes By default the program works in the virtual mode of execution so you have to confirm all operations to let the program accomplish them To do that just click the Apply button on the Virtual Operations Bar 9 When done either disconnect the virtual disk or close Our program Exchanging data between physical and virtual environments Let s assume you need to import a lot of data from one of your virtual disks The best way out Is to use our program as it can help you do that without starting up the virtual environment and the other actions typical for this task To import data from a virtual environment please do the following Launcher 1 Connect the required virtual disk to our program 2 Select in the Main Menu Tools gt File Transfer Wizard any of the ways described earlier can also be used here 3 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 4 Select a disk where the r
58. e Archive File Details disolay a short description ieee g Image Properties chapter e By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 169 Look in E Archives G me E i i Si olen f FEO 2 a ee i ji aede 9 2 2003 5 05 42 AM E arc_images S 2 2009 5 20 26 AM ja di arc_aysiem gA 2008 241 04 AM 1SGB S229 29732 AM Local Disk C My system backup No labe NTFS Total size 455 5 GB 5 GB Free space 4591 4G8 Gyare seem we system PBF 4 To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter 4 On the What folders and files to back up page you can see contents of the selected partition archive Mark a checkbox opposite a file or folder to build up contents of the future incremental image Chek the check box nesi to ny file or folder you want to back up Name Size Date E W j Dea 7 14 2009 12 14 23 AM a E d AppData 7 13 2009 73705 PM B E bo Application Data 7 13 2009 9 53 55 PM F Cookies 7 13 2009 9 53 55 PM pP 771372009 70 25 PM 7 13 2005 45355 PH 7 13 2009 70425 PM Ta 2009 7 04 25 PM Fa 20S 7504 25 PM 7 13 2009 9 53 55 PM 7 13 2009 7 04 25 PM 7 13 2009 9 53 55 PM 7A132009 9 5355 PM naaa 7025 PM 713 2009 9 53 55 PM L
59. e Smart Backup Wizard to secure system and data with the minimal efforts possible With a Unique intelligent work algorithm and a highly intuitive user interface you can easily back up exactly what you need the whole system e mail databases MS Outlook Express Windows Mail media files or office documents of the My Documents folder or any other files and folders e Sector backup to save not only all on disk information but also the system service structures It is ideal for making a backup image of an entire hard disk or system partitions to guarantee the operating system s working capability e Differential backup to a sector image to only archive changes since the last full sector based image thus considerably saving the backup storage space To restore this kind of backup you will require a full image and one of its differentials e File backup to save information you really need If you only care about safety of your e mail database or particular documents and are not willing to waste the backup storage space this very feature will suit you at most Besides an advanced system of filters will helo you automate the process of building up contents of the future backup image e Incremental backup to a file image to only archive changes since the last full or incremental file based image An incremental image is smaller and takes less time to create but you will require the initial full image and all of its incrementals to restore the late
60. e Starting the Express Create Partition Wizard to create an NTFS partition and make it ready for work lt j Create Partition Starting the Create Partition Wizard to create a partition of any file system amp amp Fonmat Partition Starting the Format Partition Wizard to format an existing partition to one of the file systems supported by the program Starting the Delete Partition Wizard to delete a partition of any file system az Sag Delete Partition Advanced Partitioning Tasks E Starting the Express Resize Partitions Wizard to redistribute free space between two adjacent partitions lt j Merge Partitions Starting the Merge Partitions Wizard to merge adjacent partitions of NTFS FAT FAT32 file systems a e T Starting the Redistribute Free Space Wizard to redistribute available ledistibute Free Space aa disk soace of existing partitions lt gt Pe Starting the Undelete Partitions Wizard to recover accidentally PF Undelete Partitions a deleted partitions Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 50 Starting the Wipe Wizard to help destroy all on disk information or ied Wipe Hard Disk or Partition only remnants of deleted files directories Copy Tasks Starting the One Button Copy Wizard to clone a hard disk with one Click Starting the Copy Hard Disk Wizard to copy a hard disk S Copy Palin Starting the Copy Partition Wizard to copy a partition Backu
61. ee Pile system conmersion option soy Backup excude options kup exciude options yan ae ahariaren Sache Fla Backup ncude cobens SCE DRET ang 6 Spe ee te Se ee Log fiss options Brows F PT popra oem ce ae Li Sat he ke a Execute afer finishing the backup oocess In this section you can specify external applications to execute at various phases of the backup process If can be particularly useful when imaging systems with high availability requirements MS SQL MS Exchange etc since it enables to create a consistent snapshot even as the data Is currently modified The point is to provide a coherent state of all open files and databases involved in a backup taking into account that applications may still keep writing to disks Actually the backup process consists of two phases the preparation phase snapshot and the data copying phase There are three points of the backup when external commands programs can be launched e Execute at the beginning of the backup process before taking a snapshot Here you can specify an executable file that will helo you to prepare running applications for taking a snapshot It may contain specific commands programs to delete unnecessary files susoend services flush transactions or caches etc Everything depends on the used applications Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 64 e Execute after taking a snapshot Here you can specify an executable file
62. for possible file system errors Integrity Manage the Tool Bar representation show hide standard and navigation buttons text labels and large icons Disk Map Location Select whether the Disk Map will be located on the top of the main window or at the bottom Open the Help system you can also do it by pressing F1 Open the dialog with information about the program A The Main Menu contents available at the moment may vary depending on the selected object Tool Bar The Toolbar provides fast access to the most frequently used operations Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 48 BUTTON FUNCTIONALITY CE Back up a hard disk or partition Back up files Restore a disk partition or files Create an NTFS partition and make it ready for work Increase free soace on one partition by up taking the Unused space of an adjacent partition rig Copy a hard disk alt ft Irreversibly destroy all on partition information Open the Help system Virtual Operations Bar The program supports previewing the resulting layout of hard disks before actually executing operations so called virtual mode of execution In fact when the virtual mode is enabled the program does not accomplish operations immediately but places them on the List of Pending Operations for later execution The Virtual Operations Bar enables to manage pending operations BUTTON FUNCTIONALITY lacy Cancel the last v
63. handle multi session burning e Network Configuration Wizard to establish a network connection under Linux or WinPE either to save a backup of a partition hard disk or just several files on a network computer or retrieve a previously made backup from a network computer for recovery purposes e Boot Corrector fo fix most of the system boot problems that can be a result of a human factor program error or a boot virus activity Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 16 Boot Corrector is only available for the WinPE 2 1 or Linux DOS bootable recovery environment Supported Technologies Along with using innovative technologies from outside Paragon has developed a number of its own original technologies that make its products unique and attractive for customers Paragon Hot Backup technology to back up locked partitions and hard disks under Windows NT family operating systems providing both high operating efficiency as well as low hardware requirements Paragon Adaptive Restore technology to successfully migrate a Win2K physical system to a different hardware platform P2P Paragon Power Shield technology to provide data consistency in case of a hardware malfunction power outages or an operating system failure Paragon UFSD technology to browse partitions of any file system including hidden and unmounted modify and copy files and folders etc Paragon Hot Resize technology to enlarge NT
64. handy Install New OS Wizard to easily carry out all the necessary operations to install a new operating system Startup There are several ways to start the Install New OS Wizard Express Launcher e Click the Boot Management button and then select Install New OS Launcher e Inthe Main menu select Wizards gt Install New OS e On the Common Tasks bar click the Install New OS item of the Wizards menu Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e Partition to install a new operating system The program offers two ways of installing a new OS i e to create a new primary partition for it or use an existing one Where would you like bo install an operating system Ge want lo create a new primary partition to install 05 Anew partion wall be created by using unallocated space of your hand desk or unused space of mashing parhhons It es the most preferable way as no spem of users data wall be alhected dunng the inctalahon pocer C ant to use an easing pimay partition to install 0S Incase cr abon of a new primary paitinn is mol possible hee are already four primary partitions on the disk o not desirable you are ires to select any of esasting pimay partitions Please note that all data on the seletad partion wall be deleted F you choose bo formal t lated in this warard Besides make sure no operating piem has already been installed on that partion IAN Only primary partitions can be used to install a
65. image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also disolay a short description of the selected image Lookin E Local Disk d FK Mama Se Chale 2 F Local Disk C E di are MEW 9 2008 27607 AM SEKE 3 2 2003 2 21 28 AM orc new PRF a Ji anchive_db 9 2 2009 5 39 22 PM E ji PeefLogs W AYV2009 737 05PM Files of type Archive files Switch to Archive List View Archive Fis Details Hame Basic Hard Disk 1 Unknown Model Comment My hdd2 Type intemal Hard Disk Drive Total sze 10GB Fe C arc_new anc_new PBF Moreover on this page you ve got the possibility to create new folders delete existing files folders or map network drives by clicking the appropriate buttons A To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter File Backup Restore Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 88 Data to restore You ve got the option to restore not only the entire archive but separate items of it the so called selective restore functionality by marking checkboxes next to the data items you need Chk the check box mext to any file or folder you wan
66. in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Look in Archives G Dx g e Ta W j arc_disk 2 G27 2009 5 25 00 AM jy aedo 9 2 2009 5 05 42 AM 3 Ji arc_images 9 3 2009 3 57 21 AM ji di 030909105713295 S320039 3 57 22 AM 1 2 ATU So Pee M e 689KB S122005 3 57 22 AM la dfi 2030909105713295 pim _14Ke 9 3 2009 35722AM_ Comment No comment Volume label Ho label Fle system NTFS Total size 24GB Used space 36 3 MB Free space 73GB Fie erc_images dif _O30905 105713295 ce _030909105713255 PBF A 4 To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter 4 On the Synthesis Settings page you can additionally modify any property of the selected backup image if necessary To accomplish our task we have no need to change anything at all Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved Backup image options Password protection CD DVD recording options Control archive integrity Choose this option to allow writing of specific dats that wil later be used during restore to check the archive integaty ft can slow down the backup operation J Set image file names automatically Choose this option to automatically name files in complex archive Compression level Good compression Provides average speed wih the reasonable iy Enable i
67. it into half 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Making Logical Primary The program allows you to include a primary partition in the extended partition or exclude a logical partition from the extended partition without partition duplication Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 12 In order to change a partition type you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a primary or logical partition on the Disk Map 2 Call the Make Partition Logical Primary dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it e Select in the Main menu Partition gt Modify gt Make Partition Logical Primary e On the Explorer bar click on the current partition type asx af Are you sure you want to make the partition logical You are shout to make the parttion C No label NTFS logice Yas Mo The Make Primary gt Logical option is only available when the selected partition is adjacent to the extended partition and vice versa The Make Primary gt Logical option of the system partition will result in inability to boot the operating system The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Changing Partition Attributes This chapter explains how you can change partition attributes Active flag Hidden flag Partition ID Volume Label etc Mark Partition Active Inactive The program enables to set an active inactive flag for prim
68. listed below an a Recovery Media Builder Restore the system even when the current operating system cannot boot anymore Undo the last virtual Cancel the last virtual operation on the List of Pending Operations operation Redo the last virtual Cancel the last undo virtual operation on the List of Pending operation Operations View Changes Display the List of Pending Operations Apply Changes Launch the real execution of virtual operations Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 44 Discard All Changes Cancel all virtual operations on the List of Pending Operations Reload Disk Info Refresh the current information about disks Wizards Express Create Partition Create an NTFS partition and make it ready for work Create Partition Create a partition of any file system Wipe Hard Disk or Destroy all on disk information or only remnants of deleted Partition files directories Express Resize Partitions Increase free space on one partition by up taking the Unused space of an adjacent partition Undelete Partitions Recover an accidentally deleted partition ge Partitions Merge adjacent partitions of NTFS FAT or FAT32 file systems Redistribute Free Space Redistribute available disk soace of existed partitions Macaw Make your system ready to install a new operating system Install New OS Smart Backup Back up exactly what you need the whole system e mail d
69. ny file or folder you want to back up Name Sze Date a amp E j Defaut 7 14 2009 12 14 28 AM a E di AppData 7 13 2009 7 37 05 PM a E di Application Data 7 13 2009 9 53 55 FM E E hy Cookies 7 13 2009 9 53 55 PM a j Desktop 7 13 2009 7 04 25 PM E E Ji Documents 7 13 2009 9 53 55 PM E E i Downloads 122009 704 25 PM a F jy Favertes V120 7 04 25 PM e E d Links TT 2009 7404 25 PM a d Local Settings 7 13 2009 9 53 55 PM Fl ge Music 7 13 2009 7 04 25 PM DEEE Ny Documents 7 13 2009 9 53 55 PM F di NetHood 7 13 2009 9 53 55 PM E E pp Pictures 7 13 2008 704 25 PM E dh PrintHood 7 13 2008 9 53 55 PM a E yp Recent 7 13 2009 9 53 55 PM H E d Saved Games O OMADIM To continue cick Mert 4 On the Backup Destination page select a local mounted unmounted without drive letter assigned disk as a backup destination Lookin F Archives G d PE Name Date E Local Disk C E Local Disk SEE E i 9 22009 5 25 00 AM a ji arc_doc 9 2 2009 50542 AM a ji ac mages 627009 5 20 26 AM arc_system 9 2 2009 2 41 04 AM 5 Edit the archive name if necessary Archive name arc_QG0S09084 734578 6 Specify include masks The program includes a lot of ready made filters to effectively control contents of your backup images Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 164 Include masks manage files and folders that wi be added to the archive F imchade mask is speciied
70. of compatibility Once your Windows starts up it will initiate reconfiguration of all Plug n Play devices so we do recommend you to provide the latest drivers for your motherboard and processor at this step as If can considerably improve the overall performance of your system e The option to inject 3rd party drivers to guarantee your system will start up on the new hardware Actually you ve got two options either provide a path to your own driver repository collection of all drivers to your hardware devices located in one folder for the program Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 34 automatically pick and install only those drivers required for your OS recommended or manually specify drivers critical for the guaranteed startup of your system on the new hardware Adaptive Restore for Windows Vista 7 Server 2008 It is based on the fact that these operating systems do not delete their distributive driver repositories after the setup but simply make them Inactive in the Windows Registry So thanks to our technology these driver repositories can be made available during the restore procedure to let Windows Vista 7 or 2008 Server automatically find and install any lacking driver with no action from your side required what is very convenient Anyway not all drivers can be found in the built in driver repositories especially when you ve got to do with specific SCSI or Serial ATA controllers For situations
71. of ready made exclude filters to effectively control contents of your file based backup images Please note by selecting certain filters you specify what data will be ignored during file based backup operations thus you specify the data you d like not to be added to the resulfed archives Anyway you ve got the option to create your own filfer by clicking the Add category button qy You can use widcards and as fie name mask Wildcards in paih are not alowed In the opened dialog the program allows the user to define the following parameters Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 7 e Name Give to the filter any name you like but try fo use an informative one e Filter Press the Browse button to select files or folders you would like to be excluded or specify a filter mask by using or wildcards e Description Add a short description to the filter not to miss it Up later Click the OK button and you will get a new item on the list of filters By marking Unmarking a checkbox opposite its name you can choose whether to use it or not File Backup Include Options Edit settings General options zE Include into file backup archive Backup image ootars Paritionng options Copy and backup options Specty masks for files and folders that must be added to archives CD DVD recording options Hyt procesaing options Readable files 12 ffens Run during backup options Emal optan Ope
72. only nothing else This is done on purpose not to lose compatibility with the older versions of VMware After transferring Microsoft Vista and later versions to a virtual disk you will need to re activate license of the system It s normal behavior as these systems keep tracking any change of hardware Re activation is legally justified in this case as you transfer your system to another PC If you prefer to create a SCSI HDD when converting to a virtual disk of VMware Workstation or VMware ESX Server we pick a driver for the HDD controller just the way VMware does i e according to the found OS e Windows 2000 Windows XP Buslogic e Windows 2003 all editions including WinXP x64 and later versions LSI Logic Thus if you will then connect the created virtual disk to a virtual machine with another type of the adapter the system won t start up Please use our P2P Adjust Wizard to install the required driver If you convert a partition hard disk with Windows XP to a SCSI virtual disk of VMware Workstation or VMware ESX it s required to add the VMware SCSI driver from outside since Windows XP doesn t have it To do that we try to find an installed version of VMware Workstation on your computer to extract the necessary driver If failed to find we will ask you to provide a path to the VMware Tools ISO image We can smoothly convert a hard disk with several operating systems But according to Issue 4 when convertin
73. partitioning scheme developed fo lift restrictions of the old MBR Being a part of the Extensible Firmware Interface EFI standard proposed by Intel to replace the outdated PC BIOS it offers a number of crucial benefits e Upto 128 primary partitions for the Windows implementation only 4 in MBR e The maximum allowed partition size is 18 exabytes only 2 terabytes in MBR e More reliable thanks to replication and cyclic redundancy check CRC protection of the partition table e A well defined and fully self identifying partition format data critical to the platform operation is located in partitions but not in un partitioned or hidden sectors as this is the case with MBR Apple Boot Camp Boot Camp is a special utility to help you set up a dual boot system Mac OS X and 32 bit Windows XP Vista on Intel based Macs It enables to securely re partition your hard disk resize an existing HFS partition to create a separate partition for Windows and then launch the installation process With Boot Camp all the necessary drivers will be at your disposal Moreover after Windows has been installed it will serve as a boot manager to choose what operating system to start up It is strongly recommended not to modify the hard disk configuration with Windows Disk Manager Otherwise it may lead to unexpected consequences right up to BSOD and inability to boot in Windows XP Vista Please use our program fo correctly update both MBR and GPT 6
74. pioni 8 On the Image Properties page make sure that you select the correct image by viewing the provided information about the archive Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved Disk preview Primary FAT 16 15 0 Mb Primary Apple HFS 14 2 Gb Primary NTFS 10 5 Gb Archive details Type Image of the hard disk Archive mame 9 0528 dd fleo_vistafeo_vista pbi Created 2008 May 29 Thd 21 16 51 To cominus resiore process click Next 9 On the next page specify a hard disk to restore the image to TC i Basic Disk 0 VMware Virtual IDE Hard Driye 112 G Basic Disk 1 24 27936b OOO NTFS ntfs4backup NTFS 4bp Bask Disko v Model VMware Virtual IDE Hard Drive Size 112 Gb N vo ume Type File System Site Volume label Active Hidden Basic Disk 0 Size 112 Gb Primary Free A All contents on disk selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation 10 On the Restore Summary page you can see your hard disk layout before and after the operation Click the Next button to initiate the restore process View changes on Basic Disk O Your partitions before operations Your partitions aher operations NTFS No label Apple HFS leopard 11 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software
75. retry the operation m The persion canmi be completed without mewt because some fies are in use and a Gi ee Haale Sere paoa o TO VE In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out at the moment Suboperation progress Hove partition L Work time doOo 01 53 Time to finishoo 07 49 Done 0 2 MB Read 99 MB 1 0 MB s All Oo MB Write 0 0 MB O 0 MB s Overall progress Getting partitions info Flushing sustes buffers please walt eceeeuneen Heiner anes cera eee oe syste buffers please wait Checking files and directories sii To avoid data loss please do not reset or turn off the computer Operation in progress press ESC or Ctrl C to interrupt operation After completing the operation your computer will be automatically restarted back to Windows where you can see the newly created NTFS partition Now you ve got a place to keep your stuff apart from Windows Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 225 Increasing size of a system partition by taking unused space of an adjacent partition Let s assume you ve got several partitions on your hard disk After installing a number of resource consuming applications and system updates your system partition has started to suffer from the lack of free space But an adjacent partition has a plenty of redundant space That s just enough to make your system partition suffer no more
76. selected partition right click of the mouse button then select the menu item Format Partition Wizard Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e Partition to format Select a hard disk if the Computer has several hard disks and then the required partition to format Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved Ea il Lan TPs paga FOU Can Choose a VOUS yOu Wound me io format Hose Had Lask U VMware VMware Virtual S Siol Lask Uer if td data 2 EE 217GB NTFS Basic Hard Taek 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev i ti Local Disk 499 9 GB NTFS Banc GPT Hard Disk 2 Viware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev wa Lina oct ect T A N As a result of this operation contents of the selected partition will be lost e Partition properties On the next page of the wizard you can set the following partition parameters Your hard disk after the changes Basic Had Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev i a data Z Partition type From the pull down list select the desired file system type In fact the program displays only those file systems that can correctly be placed to the selected partition taking its capacity info account Volume label Enter a label for the selected partition in this textual field It is an irrelevant parameter usually used for drive identification Drive letter assignment The pull down list contains
77. some consistent values for all parameters In most cases you can just oress the Format button to confirm the operation Are you sure you wani to format volume F You are about to format volume F Mo label NTFS Your computer may no longer boot or work comeciiy Pease select new fle system Pease enter new volume label New Volume y Mone ootions e File system From the pull down list select the desired file system type In fact the program displays only those file systems that can correctly be placed to the selected partition taking Its capacity info account e Volume label Enter a label for the selected partition in this textual field It is an irrelevant parameter usually used for drive identification In addition there Is the possibility fo make further detailed settings although the default values will do in most cases To activate the advance mode you need to click the More options button at the foot of the dialog page Depending on the chosen file system the following options become available J Use O S built in foemat routine Plasse select number of sectors per duser 128 Please select number of sectors per boot Please select number of rool enines Restore defauts e Use OS built in routine Mark the checkbox fo restrict the available values according to the used OS Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 107 e Whether the surface test will be performed Define
78. standard bootstrap code or the initial code of boot managers disk overlay software or boot viruses Generally the Oth sector is used for similar purposes in all existing partitioning schemes The MBR capacity is not sufficient to contain sophisticated boot programs That s why the on boot software is allowed to use the entire Oth track of the disk For example boot managing utilities such as LILO GRUB and Paragon Boot Manager are located in the Oth track Partition ID or File system ID is a file system identifier that is placed in the partition It is used to quickly detect partitions of supported types A number of operating systems completely rely on it to distinguish supported partitions Partition ID is saved in appropriate entries of the Partition Table and takes only 1 byte of space Partition Label or Volume Label is a small textual field Up to 11 characters that is located in the partition s boot sector This value is used for notification purposes only It is detectable by any partitioning tool including the DOS FDISK utility Modern operating systems save it within a file system e g as a special hidden file Thus it is able to contain a relatively large amount of text in multiple languages Partitioning Scheme is a set of rules constraints and format of the on disk structures to keep information on partitions located on a hard disk There are known several partitioning schemes The most popular of them is the so
79. startup message will be displayed Hidden mode Time to dagie the Boct Manager statup mesage Loose a hot key for sartup Boci Manager e Deactivating Configuring the Boot Manager These two options will only be available once the wizard has been completed and launched again Select the Deactivate option to remove the Boot Manager from the MBR Master Boot Record or Configure to modify the previously set parameters of the startup process Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 98 Configure Choose this option to enter Settings page You will be abe to configure Boot Manager appearances and Boot hien oot aTi Deactivate Choose this option to deactrvate Boot Manager This wi remove Bosthanager and restore boot process io As previous state Result After the Boot Manager Setup Wizard is completed the program updates the original record in the MBR to get control of the booting process and to be able to display the boot menu Available operation scenarios e Creating Dual Boot Systems Partition Management In this chapter you will find all the information necessary to carry out partitioning operations supported by the program Basic Partitioning Operations Here you can learn how to accomplish basic partitioning operations create format delete Creating Partitions The program provides the ability to create a new partition by using the DOS partitioning scheme This operation can be accomplished either
80. that will run just after taking a snapshot It may contain specific commands programs e g fo resume the previously suspended services etc Everything depends on the used applications e Execute after finishing the backup process Here you can specify an executable file that will run after the backup process has been accomplished If may include commands programs that will move the backup image to a particular location etc By clicking the link at the bottom of the window you can jump to the Hot AN Processing Options By clicking the Browse button you can get into the browser like window to choose an executable file Q Select a file to run e E ni Lookin E Local Desk C d Egg Mame Size Dae F Local Disk C a ji achve_ 9 2 2009 5 39 22 PM H do Peflogs 7 13 2005 7 37 05 PM a i Program Files 9 2 2009 5 38 26 PM Hj Users 6 11 2009 12 18 49 PM A ji Utis 8 11 2009 1 32 53 AM B j Windows 92 2009 5 38 40 PM Oh auioerer bat 24 Bytes 6 10 2005 24220 PM EA somecmd cmd O Bytes 9 2 2009 5 54 00 PM 4 2 BD ROM Drive De OFFICE12 Fle nams somecmd cmd Fies of type Executable Files a a The program provides the ability to work with three types of executable files exe bat cmd It is up to the user to write batch files to safely prepare applications for backup There are some certain general requirements for that e All programs and commands must execute sequentially and finish before the ba
81. the field of data and system protection hard disk partitioning and cloning etc e Linux DOS based recovery environment is a multi platform bootable media that enables to run utilities under Linux or PTS DOS and that way to get access to your hard disk for maintenance or recovery purposes Both platforms have their strong sides for instance Linux can boast support of FireWire i e IEEE1394 or USB devices It enables to burn CD DVD disks However there can be some difficulties with detecting new hardware DOS in its turn has no problems of that kind but is limited in features The Linux DOS recovery environment requires no installation and can be of great help when the system fails to boot Besides it offers a Windows XP like environment e WinPE based recovery environment Especially for keen followers of Windows our product also offers a WinPE 2 1 based bootable media Unlike the Linux DOS recovery environment it can boast an excellent hardware support and the same interface as the Windows version can However its system requirements are much tougher Features Overview This chapter dwells upon key benefits and technical highlights of the product Key Features Let us list some of the key features User Friendly Fault Minimizing Interface e Graphical representation of the data to gain a better understanding A handy Launcher to easily find and run the required tasks e Comprehensive wizards to simplify even the most complex operations
82. the partition J Adjust S to virtual hardware Te continue chek Heri For a hard disk e Size of the virtual disk By default the program offers to create a virtual disk exactly the size of the selected object which you can resize however e Resize partitions proportionally If you upsize the resulted virtual disk you can make the program proportionally change the size of partitions keeping their relative order intact Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 250 Adjust OS to virtual hardware to make sure the operating system will be bootable after the operation Phases preview the resulting layou of the virtual disk before you proceed u ae Basic Disk 4 VMware virtual image Virtual image g Local Di 24GB NTFS Avaliable options Curent szem 10 251 ME ace 950 GE Resize partitions proportionally J Aduet S to virtual hardware To continue cick Nexd A _ The maximum limit you can downsize the virtual disk is the capacity of its first partition 6 On the next page of the wizard set a file name for the resulted virtual disk and Its location Besides you can also provide a path to the integration package of your virtualization software Fie name for the vitual dsk C welsk vmdk B The wrug dsk wil take sbout 11 3 GE on Local Disk C There wi be ail 477 3 GE of free space on the volume after creating the file Help me to find an appropiate place for the disk Speci
83. the program Restore Facilities e Restore an entire disk separate partitions or only files you need from the previously created backup image e Restore with Shrink to restore a backup image to a free block of smaller size taking into account only the amount of actual data of the image e Adaptive Restore to successfully migrate a Win2K physical system to a different hardware platform P2P by allowing automatic injection of all required drivers and the other actions crucial for a migration of this kind Virtualization Facilities e Connect VD to connect a virtual disk as if it s an ordinary physical disk thus opening up all functionality available for physical disks to virtual e P2V Copy to migrate a Win2K physical system to a virtual environment in the online mode e P2V Restore to migrate a Win2K physical system backed up with a Paragon disaster recovery tool to a virtual environment e P2V Adjust to recover the startup ability after unsuccessful virtualization with a 3rd party tool A Virtualization is the latest trend in the system migration protection and evaluation Copy Facilities e One Button Copy Wizard to carry out such a technically complicated operation as cloning of hard disks just by pressing one button e Partition hard disk copy to successfully transfer all on disk information including standard bootstrap code and other system service structures thus maintaining the operating system s working capabili
84. the system memory Paragon Hot Processing technology offers copy backup of locked partitions and hard disks under Windows NT family operating systems providing both high operating efficiency as well as low hardware requirements Exchange or Oracle databases since the backup image contents may be a Itis not recommended to use Paragon Hot Processing with active SQLServer _ corrupted Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved o Volume Shadow Copy Service Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy Service VSS is designed to provide the copy backup infrastructure for the Microsoft Windows XP Vista Server 2003 2008 operating systems It offers a reliable mechanism to create consistent point in time copies of data known as shadow copies Developed by Microsoft in close cooperation with the leading copy backup solution vendors on the market it is based on a snapshot technology concept Initiated by a VSS aware copy backup utility VSS creates snapshots for the selected volumes and represents them as virtual read only devices called volume shadow copies Once the shadow copies are created the copy backup utility starts processing the data while applications keep writing to original volumes Unlike Paragon Hot Processing the VSS technology provides a unique possibility to make a synchronous snapshot of multiple volumes This very feature can be particularly beneficial when backing up active SQL Server 2003 Exchange 2003 or O
85. then select the menu item Unmount the Selected Archive 3 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 144 Test Surface The program enables to test surface of existing partitions and blocks of free space for bad or unstable sectors If found any it automatically marks them unusable in the file system metadata thus minimizing the risk of data loss In order to start the surface test you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a partition or a block of free soace on the Disk Map 2 Call the Test Surface dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it Select in the Main Menu Partition gt Test Surface Call the popup menu for the selected partition right click of the Mouse button on the Disk Map then select the menu item Test Surface 3 From the pull down list choose the level of the surface check Ea Test surface of volume C Testing volume suface shows to find bad blocks and other problems Piease select a surface test level Ce 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Check File System Integrity The program allows you to check integrity of a file system If can be used to detect possible file system errors before performing any operation on a partition To start the system integrity check you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a partiti
86. volume No label E Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev W Local Disk E a 9 Unallocated M 268 3GB NTFS _ 231668 Volume size 274 790 5149 MB sfe 101 MB 511 953 MB Free apace before 0 97 MB s e O bytes 511 851 433 MB Free space after 237 201 92 MB afa O bytes 511 883 61 MB Sectorte sector move Select the coten to move partion erees that doni conten any dats This slows you to keep ihe pattsns content after move ecacthy ast wes but wi require mare time The Move Resize dialog offers a number of additional parameters that can also be of help However here we pay attention to the most relevant to fulfill our task 4 Now you have a block of free space sufficient in size to hold a new partition Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev peo Co 150 7G8 NTFS 12GB 5 Create a new partition to install Windows XP To do thoat please call the context menu for a newly created block of free space right click of the mouse button and launch the Create Partition dialog Tock Changes Wirards Hard Disk Partiien Archies View Help Are you sure you wani to create a new partition on disk 07 You are about to create a mew partition in Unallocated 341 2 GB aes Fiesse select size postion aod fle system of ihe new partition
87. will be copied bo the destination you wil choose on the next page Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev a Q Local Disk C Corres TOG D ene i riot Sti et PS Dev il i 34 GE FAT22 AGE r 7GE 6 On the Select Target Hard Disk page select a destination disk a hard disk to copy contents of the source disk Select a target hard disk All data from the source hand disk will be copied there During copy operation tan Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dew I Local Disk C 499 9GE NTFS Basic Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dew f g Archives G Backup Capsule 38 GE aT Ps kT Le 47 SGE NTFS I g Unallod Basic Hard Disk 3 VMware VMware Virtual SCSI Disk Dev A N During the operation all contents of the destination disk will be deleted Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 24 7 7 On the next page of the wizard define the copy options In our case we d rather copy data with a proportional resize to occupy the entire disk Besides we recommend you to enable the surface test to make sure your new hard disk is flawless Copy options HOD raw copy Partiions raw copy Perform incremental copy Resize options Remove free blocks between partitions ee ee ee E E a E Ji Copy data and resize partitions proportionally relative order intact Tip This can be very convenient when migrating l
88. 0 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 8 you need to protect and the way this information should be processed the program offers a number of handy backup wizards and dialogs Wizard Work Algorithm To make your job with the program as easy and convenient as possible all backup wizards share similar work algorithm So let us just take as an example the Sector Backup Wizard to describe it in detail By going through steps of the wizard you configure all the necessary settings to launch the backup operation To minimize the possibility of making any mistake the wizard provides auxiliary information on every single option Moreover you can get an in depth description to any setting control or field of the wizard just by clicking the hint button and then the object you need Startup There are several ways to start the Sector Backup Wizard Express Launcher e Click the Backup and Recovery button and then select Backup Launcher e Inthe Main Menu select Wizards gt Back up a Disk or Partition e On the Common Tasks Bar click the Back up a Disk or Partition item of the Wizards menu e Inthe Toolbar click the Back up a Disk or Partition button Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the backup operation e The object to back up You can back up either an entire disk or separate partitions of the disk orimary extended or logical In case of backing Up an entire disk you ve got the possibility to includ
89. 009 2 21 28 AM foo Hee ee ee oe z Name Basic Hard Diak 1 Unknown Model Comment My hdd2 Type intemal Hard Disk Deve Tota are 10G8 Fle Cverc_new are_new PEF The section below i e Archive File Details disolays a short description of the selected image including e Information on a type of the archive contents whether it is sector based or file based e Whether the archive is compressed or not e Whether the archive is password protected or not e The date when the archive was created Moreover on this page you ve got the possibility to create new folders delete existing files folders or map network drives by clicking the appropriate buttons The next page i e What to restore displays detailed information about the contents of the archive Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 79 Whal to restore Plaase select an archrve tem to restore Piease select one of the objectis to restore S E Basic Hard Disk 1 Unknown Model intemal Hard Disk Dive GE Local Disk 7 Linux Swap 509 2 MB 4KB UnxE3 14GB 58 1MB H E Hew Volume F NTFS 24GB 3561 MB E E NEW VOLUME E pma FAT32 34GB 4 KB Name Local Disk 7 Fle system Linux E43 Total size 1 468 Used space 58 1 MB Free space 13GB To select where to restore the selected objects click Mead Daia size to restore 1 4 GB
90. 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 168 After the operation is completed you receive a differential backup of the selected partition It is placed into the specified destination a local or network disk the Backup Capsule or a CD DVD disc its features defined by the wizard A This operation can also be accomplished with the WinPE recovery environment Creating an increment to a full partition backup To update only files you need since the last full partition backup please do the following Launcher 1 Click the Create File Complement item of the Wizards menu 2 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 On the Browse for Archive page specify the required full oase partition archive e By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of Images contained in the Archive Database if any Type Creshon Date 7 Source Object Size Hags Co Mounted a A EE ATE EE B E ea mG Tri a cs 6 2 2005 52025 AM New Volume F 2 4 GB ar 5 7 233 00 AM Local Disk is 6 2 2009 2 21 15 AM Local Disk 7 509 8 MB l M 6 2 2009 2 21 10 AM Local Disk 14GB H gt i Archive File Detak Name Local Disk C Comment My system backup Volume label No label Fie system NTFS Total size 495 9G8 Used maca 8568 Free maca 4514 GB Fie G arc_sysien arc_sysiem PBF To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i
91. 2 9 GB The wied can expand this volume up to 485 3 GB ot ihe eqpence of other volumes u el th ar i mmi th s yah HEE e Partition to donate Choose any partition s not only adjacent to donate free space Select volumes to take space from Free space from that volume wil be used to enlarge the volume you have selected on ihe previous page 14 668 202 3 GB File system Tye Capacity FS 217 GB Primacy Jl There is no unallocated space on the hard disk you have selected The wizard can orh eoquand the volume C at the expence of some other volumes Please chock the check box ned to any volume to take Pree spaca trom it e Partition size By default the program leaves 50 of the Unused space on a partition and removes another 50 to add it to the target partition However the size to take can be customized by moving the slider or by manually entering the exact value Your diss after the changes Base Hard Disk 0 var VMware Vita 5 SCS Disk Dev EA 115 eee LO alagi new gira 3593 371 86 Moe 289 776 MB 496 975 28 MB ch Corert volume size 3 1 GB The volume size hat been increased on 101 1 GB Result After the operation is completed free space of the specified partition will be increased by up taking the on disk Unallocated soace and the unused space of other partitions Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Sof
92. 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 97 e Secure adding removing of the Boot Manager startup record to from the MBR e Auto Boot option to automatically start up the previously chosen OS after a certain time period e Hiding of any primary partition except selected at the moment Startup Express Launcher e Click the Boot Management button and then select Boot Manager Launcher e Inthe Main menu select Tools gt Setup Boot Manager e On the Common Tasks Bar click the Boot Manager Wizard item of the Wizards menu Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e Hiding other primary partitions By marking this checkbox the program will automatically assign the hidden flag fo all primary partitions of the hard disk s except the one selected to boot This will help to avoid any problems when dealing with different operating systems or different versions of one and the same OS as they will be Unaware of each other e Boot menu options In this section you can switch between the following modes Normal mode Choose this mode to display the boot menu every time the computer starts Up and define a timeout on the expiry of which the program will automatically select the previously chosen item of the menu Hidden mode Choose this mode not to display the boot menu until pressing a hot key For this mode you should define a hot key used to enable the Boot Manager and a time period in seconds the
93. 2500 AM H arc_doc a2 2009 5 08 42 AM ac images 9 3 2009 3 57 21 AM E J d dR 030909105713235 9 3 2009 3 57 22 AM BB ot_030509105713295 PBF 689KB 9 3 2009 3 57 22 AM a o ac imagas PBF 45M8 VAAN S226 AM Name Local Disk Volume label No label Fie sytem NTFS Total size 2466 Used space 36 3 ME Fee space 23GB File G arc_images dif_030909105713 295 cif_030909105713295 P BF A To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter 4 On the How to Restore page specify the way your archive will be restored In our case we d rather restore contents of the backup to its original location with replacing existing files as well Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 5 Complete the wizard and then apply the pending changes Apply pending changes 7 6 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Hai Easting file C Uieers user Desktop images extralunctionalty edi_sectors png has beer DD Bedsting file C Users user Desktop Amages extralunctionalty_Hetransher_destination pr GD Existing fle C Users user Desktop images extrafunctionalty_filetransfer_objects png he IGE Evsting fie C Users user Desictop images exrafunctionalty Hetransfer_revision png he W Existing file C lhen use Desktop images edralunctionalty _fieiransier_source png ha Ha Boasting fie C User user Desktoo images
94. 3 You will be notified on the successful accomplishment of the operation Click Yes to load another driver or No to close the dialog Driver z adj A Our WinPE 2 1 recovery environment is 32 based thus you need to use 32 bit drivers for injection Configuring network If your local network has a DHCP server a network connection will be automatically configured once our WinPE recovery environment has been started up Otherwise you will need to do it manually with a handy dialog by providing an IP address a network mask default gateway etc Besides with its help you can easily map network shares To manually set up a network connection and map a network share please do the following 1 Once you accept the agreement you will see the Universal Application Launcher Click Configure Network 2 Inthe opened dialog provide an IP address a network mask default gateway etc for your network device Obtain an IP address automaticaly Use the folowing IP address IP Address 200 0 1 208 Subnet Mask Defaut Gateway 200 0 Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 2 2 4 Click Map Network Drive and provide all the necessary information to map a network share in the opened dialog Remate location mapping Anatwork shae aay Map to dive letter Y Connect as use __ em e Click the standard browse button to browse for the required
95. 4 bit Support The bulk of software today is written for a 32 bit processor It can meet the requirements of almost any end user However that is not the case when dealing with servers processing large amounts of data with complex calculations of very large numbers That is where 64 bit architecture comes into play Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 39 It can boast improved scalability for business applications that enables to support more customer databases and more simulfaneous users on each server Besides a 64 bit kernel can access more system resources such as memory allocation per user A 64 bit processor can handle over 4 billion times more memory addresses than a 32 bit processor With these resources even a very large database can be cached in memory Although many business applications run without problems on 32 bit systems others have grown so complex that they use up the 4 GB memory limitation of a 32 bit address space With this large amount of data fewer memory resources are available to meet memory needs On a 64 bit server most queries are able to perform in the buffers available to the database Some 32 bit applications make the transition to the 64 bit environment seamlessly others do not For instance system level utilities and programs that provide direct hardware access are likely to fail Our program offers a full fledged support of the 64 bit architecture providing fault tolerant work f
96. 74S3E 45F Volume labek FAT3IZ LIMNUH Partition ID 0x08 FAT 32 Type Primary Total size 68GB File system FATJ2 Used tpace 5 7 GB Sector per boot 36 Free space 1G8 Sectors per cluster 3 Activity Inactive Hidden tlate Not hidden Create an image of the peal disk Back up all the dala the logical dek contain estore the logical disk from an mage Waning The opeaton val delete all the data on the logical disk and replace them from the image you have chosen ou may also be asked bo restart your compuber dunng this operation Create a copy of the parbhon A new parthon wil be created and all the date val be coped there TOU Can create an exact copy or copy only the area thal is occupied by data Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 75 When you select a small sized bar i e corresoonding to a logical disk the Explorer Bar will display information on it as well The page title will contain a drive letter which is assigned to the disk The disk layout graph will be colored in accordance with the volume ratio of the used space to the free space the light colored sector The table on the right will contain the following information e Volume label if available e Type of the logical disk e File system represented by the color of the graph and the selected bar e Total size used soace and free space in GB or MB Below there is a list of wizards which may be called for this disk All defa
97. By marking Uunmarking a checkbox opposite its name you can choose whether to use it or not Log Files Options General options L Backup mage options Pariiiomung optons Copy and backup options Choose a storage life span for the stubact jog file Please note once the defined pee CD DVD recording options has bran apred the fia wil be emptied Pit poceni options Run during backup options Emal opbons Operation dependency options Virtual mode options Rie system convemion options Cop Esckup exciude options Ale Backup exclude options le Backup include optons g Log files options Wipe options In this section you can specify a storage life soan for the stubact log file e Infinite not to empty the file ever Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 73 e Minimal fo have the file emptied all the time e Custom to set a certain storage life soan for the file Please note once the defined period has been expired the file will be emptied having problems with the program our Support Team won t be able to study We strongly recommend you not to choose the Minimal option as in case of operation logs thus help you out Wipe Options G Edit settings Genera options i z Ba SL Peo Sees rd Wipe options PLES IRS ge e Dary Poe WA iiioning optiona L m F Er aka s f i Looy and backup options DS Eat vipa mein r r J r m gein pas jme ny i a k 2 le 1 ie kar ka i Gat E at
98. Call the Task Editor dialog There are several ways to do it Click the Properties button on the Scheduled Tasks list Call the popup menu for the selected task right click of the mouse button then select the menu item Properties A Task Properties Backup of MBR of hard disk 0 General Schedule Program C Program Hes Fmagpon Software Orive Backup 10 Semer Edianprogam cripts ew r E Sep n Fles Paragon Software Drive Backup 10 Server Editionseripteser_ 020809124 744490 pal Eat L Bowe Comments Backup has been scheduled 9 2 2009 5 47 44 AM 7 Enabled Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 134 3 Inthe opened dialog window you can see two tabs General and Schedule Click the General tab to modify e Full path to the macro command program interporeter which describes the scheduled task e Command line for starting the interpreter i e the task described in macro language e Comments referring to the task e The option of enabling disabling the task By clicking the Schedule tab you can modify the task timetable In order to apply the changes you need to click the Apply button at the foot of the dialog Creating a Scheduled Task You can set a timetable for execution of any operation For backup and copy operations the program offers handy wizards while all the others can be scheduled with the Save to Scheduler dialog To create a scheduled task you should take t
99. Choose this option if you want the Wizard to burn the data t CO or OVD You will be prompted to choose a CD or OVD RW drive 8 On the Choose a Recorder page select a recorder from the list of available devices and then set a volume label by entering it in the appropriate field Select a recorder to burn data to Vendor Product T ype Optiarc Volume label My Data 9 On the Transfer Summary page check all parameters of the operation Click the Next button to accomplish the operation 10 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Operations list Suboperation progress Lb Transfer user data Operation progress Time elapsed 00 00 07 Time to finish 00 00 16 Copied so far 5 0 Mb To copy 12 0 Mb Overall progress Creating compilation image Used burner OVO RWAD 71704 Vendor Optiarc Session opening Data burning 11 After the operation is completed close the wizard by pressing the appropriate button 12 Turn off the computer Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 214 This operation can also be accomplished with the WinPE recovery AN environment Copying of data from a backup to the corrupted system partition The system fails to boot since some files are damaged If you have a backup of the system partition you can recopy these files to make the system be operable again 1 Start up
100. Contacts switch io Full Seale Launcher ight chching on a partition you would like to resize and select More Fesz Partition 2 Merge Partitions Merge two adacent partitions with the sama fie system and the same type primary to primary or iogical to logical Log Saver Prepare operation log files to send lo Paragon s support teen To start up the traditional Launcher please click on Switch to Full Scale Launcher To know more on how to handle the product s interface and accomplish typical operations please consult the Windows Components chapter Building Recovery Media Recovery Media Builder can help you accomplish the following operations e Prepare the Linux DOS recovery environment included in the installation package on external media CD DVD or flash memory to boot and run utilities under Linux or PTS DOS and that way to get access to your hard disk for maintenance or recovery purposes strongly recommended e Prepare a custom Linux DOS recovery environment by adding any data you like to the standard image e Prepare a bootable recovery environment from any ISO image including our WinPE 2 1 image strongly recommended Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 24 e Create from the master CD the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery environment on a CD DVD disc or flash memory Below you can find how fo build our WinPE 2 1 based recovery environment on a thumb drive 1 Plug in a thum
101. Disk Viewer dialog by clicking the appropriate tab and see it for yourself Puegeart Ch om Visure Sector Def 262144 On0000 00 OO OO 00 OO OO OO OD OO OO OO OD a Ox0010 00 00 00 00 00 00 O00 00 00 00 O00 00 00 00 Ox0020 00 00 00 00 00 00 OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO Oxn0030 00 00 00 00 OO OO OO 00 OO 00 OO OO Ox0040 O00 00 00 00 00 00 O 00 00 O 00 00 00 OO 00 OO Ox0050 00 00 00 00 OO OO OO 00 OO OO OO OO OO OO OO Ox0060 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OO Ox0070 00 00 OO 00 OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OD On0080 00 00 00 00 00 00 OO 00 00 OO OO OO OO OO OO OOD O0x0090 00 00 00 00 00 O00 O 00 00 00 00 00 O00 OO Ox0040 00 00 00 00 00 00 OO CO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OOD Ox0080 00 O00 00 00 OO OO 00 OO OO OO OO OO OO OO O0x00C0 00 00 00 00 00 00 OO 00 00 00 Q O00 O00 OO Q OO On00D0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OO OO OO 00 OO OO OO OD Ox00E0 00 OO OO 00 0 OO 00 Q 00 OO Q 00 00 OO OD Ox00F0 00 00 00 00 O00 O00 00 00 OO O OO O OO O OO OOD 020100 00 00 60 00 00 OO OO OO Ox0110 00 OO OO 00 O00 OO O 00 00 00 OO OO 00 OD OO OO Ox0120 00 00 00 00 OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OD Ox0130 00 00 OO 00 OO 00 OO OO OO OO OO OO OO es oe 4a t p Loe ii Please select secor number H qa Fre ee re ley hed A N The Summary page will be available only
102. FS 444Gb 61Gb 36 2 Gb 1 o amp Primary NTFS 756Gb 45 Mb 756Gb 5 Choose your system partition and then call the context menu for it right click of the mouse button to launch the Move Resize dialog Data Create an image of partition Alt B Burn an image of partition io CODD Restore partition from image AIR Basit Disk 0 Size 1 o C Prima l D Prima Copy panition Alte Crea Alt A Formal Alt F Delete AltD Wipe partition Alt A Clear free space Regiel eave Unmounit Modify 6 In the opened dialog set a new size for the partition by moving the slider or by entering the exact value in the appropriate field While doing this free space from the partition will be released displayed in aqua green Click OK to continue Paritiion preview New size 8373 45434 Mb Free space before 0 37111 Mb Free space afer 0 37111 Mb 7 Now you ve got a block of free space to add to your data partition Basic Disk 0 VMware Virtual 120 Gb ees n BL ATES Data Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 2393 8 Choose the data partition and then call the context menu for it right click of the mouse button to launch the Move Resize dialog 9 Move the slider to the right to increase size of the partition Click OK to continue Panition preview JD NTFS Data New site 8 102101 Mb
103. FS partitions system locked without rebooting Windows and interrupting its work Paragon Restore with Shrink technology to restore a backup image to a free block of smaller size taking into account only the amount of actual data of the image Paragon Smart Partition technology to securely perform hard disk partitioning operations of any complexity Paragon BTE technology to set tasks for execution in the Windows blue screen mode thus saving from the need to use a bootable media when modifying system partitions Paragon VIM Virtual Image Management technology that enables Paragon products work with virtual disks as though they are physical hard disks Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy Service VSS to provide the copy backup infrastructure for the Microsoft Windows XP Vista 7 Server 2003 2008 operating systems It offers a reliable mechanism to create consistent point in time copies of data known as shadow copies Developed by Microsoft in close cooperation with the leading copy backup solution vendors on the market it is based on a snapshot technology concept Microsoft Dynamic Disk simple soanned striped mirrored RAID 5 to offer more management flexibility without the partition limitation of basic disks Dynamic storage can be particularly beneficial for large scale businesses when dealing with many physical hard disks involving complex setup GUID Partition Table GPT It is the next generation of a hard disk partitionin
104. GB o oe Primacy NTFS iG 41568 4 P2 Backup Capsule 38GB a E 4 VMware VMware Vetual S SCSI Disk Devi GPT Disk E GA Virtual Drives 2 Browse for the required archive and then open it by double click of the left mouse button Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved E 3 VMware VMware Vetual 5 SCSI Disk Devi 80GB G1 Primary NTFS G 419GB a arc dsk 9 2 2003 4 25 00 AM D ac dw 6 2 2009 4 05 42 AM a SS ae mapes 9 4 2003 6 45 37 AM E arc_system 6 2 2005 1 41 04 AM arc_sysiem 001 L8GB 9 2 2005 1 41 04 AM ESSE 190 9 2 2009197224 i 1 Pasttion 189968 erc_system pem 156 Bytes 9 2 2009 1 41 03 AM arc_system p m 66 3KB 9 2 2009 1 41 04 AM a E System Volume information 9 2 2005 4 42 59 AM H G2 Backup Capsule 38GB E E 4 VMware VMware Vitual SCSI Diak Devi GPT Disk 3 Call the popup menu right click of the mouse button for a file folder you need and then select the Export item Look iri EE Local Disk C io F ji Progam Fies 9 2 20 E fi Users B11 jp Utils g1 a i Windows 9 2 20 5 Click the OK button to accomplish the operation A The current version of the program does not enable to access file archives with Volume Explorer Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 223 Resize Scenarios Creating a new partition to detach operating system from the rest
105. GB File syam NTFS Led space 36 3MB Free space 23GB Start sector 7261380 End sector 12321854 3 Inthe opened dialog you can see the current enumeration of the primary partitions of the selected hard disk in the Partition Table To help you distinguish partitions from one another the program provides the following parameters for every partition Slot Volume Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 128 Partition type File system Partition size Volume label There are two buttons on the right to move the selected partition up and down within the primary part of the Partition Table 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Wipe Tasks In this chapter you will find all the information necessary to wipe a hard disk partition of any file system or only destroy any remnants of deleted files directories left on disk without affecting the used data thus providing high level of security The operation can be accomplished with the Wipe Wizard or corresponding dialogs Wizard Startup Express Launcher e Click the Security and Optimization button and then select Wipe Launcher e Inthe Main Menu select Wizards gt Wipe Hard Disk or Partition Wizard Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e The hard disk partition to wipe Select a hard disk partition the data of which you want to destroy Piess choose an object for wioieg t can
106. GBs or not available for VMware only e Pre allocate all disk space You can choose whether to pre allocate all soace of the future virtual disk or do it dynamically Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 249 Select your virtualization software go VWhhware Vrorcstation 511 555 MB al IDE A Create spit disk Pre allocate all disk space Viiware ESX Server Microsoft Hyper V Not all vendors may be available to choose If the capacity of the selected A N object exceeds the maximum capacity for a certain virtual disk its vendor will be shadowed 5 Depending on your choice the next page of the wizard enables to set the following parameters For a separate partition e Size of the virtual disk By default the program offers to create a virtual disk exactly the size of the selected object which you can upsize however Please note you can only increase size of the resulted virtual disk e Take all space for the partition If you Upsize the resulted virtual disk you can choose whether to occupy the whole disk soace by that partition or not e Adjust OS to virtual hardware to make sure the operating system will be bootable after the operation Please prewew the resulting layout of the virtual disk before you proceed Basic Hard Disk 4 Viware virtual image Virtual image a g Local Disk WB 495 96 NTFS Avadable options Curent sra is 511 993 ME 49GB 950 GE Take al space for
107. GE Min Volume Size Bytes Max Volume Size 156 5 GB In case the second option has been marked the wizard enables to choose an existing primary partition to install a new operating system Un thit page pou can choose an eining piman parhbon where pou would ike lo inclall a new operating system Basic Hard Disk O Maxtor 7r 250P 0 a cin Basic Hard Disk 1 ST 316081545 o g o e D E 18 634 GB NTFS 66 GB NTFS 0 163 3GB NTFS _ A N Your computer may fail if any other OS has already been installed on the 4 selected partition e Partition properties e Yes want to fonmat the partition Partition ype GP NTFS w Assign tha lolong drive latter ELE Sufscelestlevel None 3 Partition type From the pull down list select the desired file system type In fact the program displays only file systems that can be correctly placed to the selected partition taking Its capacity info account Drive letter assignment The pull down list contains vacant drive letters that can be associated with the newly formatted partition Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 117 Surface test level Define the level of the surface check to make the program find bad and unstable sectors and mark them unusable in the file system metadata e OS Label Enter a label for the selected partition in the textual field It will later be Used for the drive identification 0S
108. Group All rights reserved 202 Operations list Suboperalion progress 1 Restore partition or disk i Operation progress Time elapsed 00 00 16 Time to finish 00 76 24 Copied so far 192 0 Mb Read so far 192 0 Mb 24 0 Mbizi To copy 14 0 Gb Write so far 192 0 Mb 38 4 Mb s Overall progress Convening disk 0 ta GPT Opening archive ko_vista_ 0000p 000 Restore Primary pariton O disk 0 from file 9 0528 hdd eo_vistaeo_vista_0000p 000 Data writing Opening archive ko_vista_01p 000 Restor Primary partion 1 disk 0 from file 49 0528 hdd feo_vistafeo_victa_0001 1p 000 Data writing 12 Affer completing the operation close the wizard and then reboot the computer Restoring a file increment Let s assume that you re busy with developing some project and you make file increments of it on a day to day basis not to lose valuable information So you ve got a file backup chain One day you understand that the job of the last three days is a complete and utter failure Don t give up recover your project to the state when everything s ok To restore a file Increment please do the following Launcher 1 Click the Restore item of the Wizards menu any of the ways described earlier can also be used here 2 On the Restore Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 On the Browse for Archive page specify the required file increment e By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of Image
109. In this case only the minimal set of drivers will be included like hard disk monitor and keyboard drivers This mode has simple graphics and a simple menu SLI Cs the PC booting amp Safe Hode will be proceeded in amp Low Graphics Safe Mode 86 seconds amp Floppy disk amp Hard disk A HER amp Find OSes on your hard disks A By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period 3 In the Linux launch menu select Hard Disk Manager You can find it in PTS DOS as well A You can create delete and format hard disk partitions using Paragon Hard Disk Manager which will stan now Upon the san please select the drive and one of its Partitions or its ree space Then activate the Partition pull down menu and select one of the partitioning operations Simple Restor Wizard One Button Copy Wirard Wipe Wirard Express Resme Wizard File Transfer Wizard Boot Corrector F Network Configurator Log Saver Eject CD DVD omy lar the command line 4 Inthe main window select the required hard disk if several on the Disk Map Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 232 Hard Disk Partition Operations Wizards Help Bask Disk O VMware Viral 120Gb _ fs NTFS Vista 4 IO NTFS Lata Disk from k Basic Disk 0 Model VMware Virtual Size 120 Gb N Volume Type Fie System Free Basic Disk 0 Size 120 Gb 0 Cc Primary NT
110. Miachme status bAerncry Primary disk El Old Windows XP Fiereaonenal alemim SELO C Windows AP Old vhd Open me Settings h Troubleshooter Here you can find answers to the most frequently asked questions that might arise while using the program 1 Itry to run an operation but the program claims my partition is in use and suggests restarting the computer There are a number of operations that cannot be performed while your partition is in use or locked in other words Please agree to reboot your machine to make the program accomplish the operation in a special boot up mode 2 Irun an operation and restart the machine as required but it just boots back into Windows without accomplishing the operation Please run chkdsk f for the partition in question 3 I cannot create a new partition on the disk There can be a number of reasons for that Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 283 e The program cannot create a new partition on a dynamic disk but only on a hard disk that uses the DOS partitioning scheme e According to the rules of the DOS partitioning scheme the following combinations of partitions cannot be created Two Extended Partitions on one hard disk Five or more Primary partitions on one hard disk If there is an Extended Partition on the disk only three Primary partitions are allowed e The program allows creating new partitions only within blocks of un partitioned space
111. NCE rer ene reese eI Ae ee EON 15 SUDDOMMER TECNNOLOGICS osc scee sec civcerssdevces en E T N Gossow sorterseeeseaieenss 16 SUDDOTIER VITO MACHINES sees diceesce cheeses iscsi a ices ceadicadccedivesdcesacesesedaacaunssegesboniestansneess dente 17 SUDDOMEG FIG SVSTCINS casecciecesacieves se covsctecsseedccsisedicnsiorsiesaet sie ees oa 17 STOO Sa NS CI ines ie surnssussaa nan se avin seston weet alesin EN A E 17 Genn SIGIAG d oes aiseuicncasesnncanssswisiesssvaceassavseedaewes O E 17 DisSMDUNO Meene EEEE EEEE EE EEA 18 BETO C Darrers an a E trent T eer renner tren etree rrr Terr tree 18 DRASD OU e alenecnes perme nomen a or tes ona Senet ote tern rye teem mnrer ee en Trea tr fram Mmrrene cea e 18 Fe CITI lee sactatece ccc A T E etinceaeusaaiaces TR 18 FLOW TO DOWMIOde UDOGISS VO OIAG SS cies saciid N concede 19 Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved Contacting Paragon Technology GMbDH cccssccssccsssccesccsscccssccesccnsccesccesccesccescecesccesceesceees 19 System RE GUI CIISINNS serisini a E a a aa a Eaa EO S AEE E AEE 20 Wd N TO CSS CG SST OF INI Soraia R 20 Linux DOS based recovery envVironMent ssssessssseeessssssesessssceressssseressssctessssceressssceressssceessssceressssseseeeesseeeeee 20 WIMP E DOSE G FE COV Cy environne esna A dusiane esse alGseineilanteduenaniias 20 PO GNC GUENESI vanik ato E EENEN OEEO E 21 MSTA O sere cc enter E 21 PUPS SUCHE ccsinsstssoitnais tan sus cases N E
112. NTFS version e Call the popup menu for the selected partition right click of the mouse button on the Disk Map or on the Partition List Then select the menu item Downgrade NTFS Version 3 Decrease version of the selected NTFS partition by selecting the one you need from the pull down list Plt l Are you sure you wani to downgrade NTFS version for volume C Curent NTFS version is 3 01 Windows XP Select new NTFS version RUSE rsa Yes 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Mount Archive The program provides the ability to assign a drive letter to a partition backup image As a result of the operation you will get a new read only partition in the system to easily browse through its contents and copy the required information even with the standard Windows tools Assign Drive Letter In order to mount an archive you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a backup image in the Archive Database 2 Call the Mount Archive dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it Select in the Main Menu Archives gt Mount the Selected Archive Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 143 On the Explorer bar select the Mount Archive item Call the popup menu for the selected image right click of the mouse button then select the menu item Mount the Selected Archive 3 Specify a drive letter for the selected backup image
113. O T ENA 22 BUNGCING Recovery Medid ocsi a E E O OO I T 23 Booting from the Linux DOS Recovery Medid cccssccsssccesccescccsscesccesccesscescccesccesceescceesces 25 ILE GET E AEE EE AA T EE AA E OEE EES EATE A ARE NN EEIEIEE ES AA EE BEVE T A T 25 BOOT Qc 1 A E A AEE E AE E N Tere eee 25 Booting from the WinPE Recovery Medid ssesseesesosscsecsesessoseosecsecoscoseoseceseseceecossoseesecoseoseoseee 28 SILDI AEE o AE PE E EEE E I EA A pace EE T E T T EE T A E A E E EN T E AE AE T N E E 28 BASIC C ONG SONS aore a E T E E E E T A 29 System nd D ta PROTECTION arean a a 30 Fie sBOG KU VOU SCCI BOCK Orien a A E E E E A E 30 BACKUP E ar E EE AOE A OENE iss es EA A E A E O 3 BOG KUO STOA GC ona n ERE E A E ee ee 32 7 G Oi forge O TO aa A A A 33 SYSTEM VITO GIIZONION soriana seit ea a aia aa A 34 Paragon Hot Processing amp Volume Shadow Copy Service sscccsssscccsssccesssccessccesssceeeeees 36 OMNE Verus OMe DAA FP FOCSSSING ieri aE EA EE E IRENEO T EE OTA 36 Pardgoon HOr PROCS sina LEC MMOlO OY aaraa T EN E E AE RE NE 36 VOIUMS SOO OW G OPV SEINIO Orainean na EET REEE IENE EE EEE A EAE 37 DV IVGINIG DISKS orena A 37 SPT VEISUS MBR aciri r E mnaraiouarateau TE beri ate aes 38 Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved Apple BOOT CGD sisi scissors eossc eee ees T S 38 6A DIT SUD DOM cecsstccscctatecsecnstuescuvatecuaneaasctosdsucasedeegeesesacasecendacasetaccwelecaeuldcsedecudie
114. P2V Adjust OS item of the Wizards menu any of the ways described earlier can also be used here 2 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Browse for the required virtual disk Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 256 Sze Date 9 2 2008 7 10 24 AM 222009 2760 AM 22009 603 29 AM 9 2 2008 5 2 PM A220 F305 PM 9 4 2009 1 33 48 AM 87 11 2009 12 18 45 PM 87117 20093 1 32 53 AM JAZ 5 40 PM 32GB 36 2009 AIk AM Pies of tye Al virtual disk images Disk info VMware virtual hard disk DE Capacty 500 GB 536 271 960 576 Bytes 4 Provide a path to the integration package of your virtualization software Specty a path for additional divers C Progrem Fles Vivhware VMware WWorkstation windows iso Browse Pease provide a path to VM ToolsAddtions ISO image e g windowsJse for VMware Tools to use when a virtual device driver is required F you transfer Viindews XP to a VMware SCSI disk t should be done anyway if you transfer Windows XP to a VMware SCSI disk otherwise your system won t It s strongly recommended to provide a path to VM Tools Additions ISO image boot after the operation 5 The wizard will provide a detailed report on successful accomplishment of the operation You can save it by clicking the appropriate button Operations details 500 GB disk O has been successfully transfered io a VMware Wortctation virtua
115. PARAGON Technologie GmbH Systemprogrammierung xfraracon ParaGon Roan Eee Heinrich von Stephan Str 5c 79100 Freiburg Germany Tel 49 0 761 59018201 Fax 49 0 761 59018130 Internet www paragon software com Email sales paragon software com Hard Disk Manager 2010 Professional User Manual Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved Contents FTE OGIO CIO N sseni E EEEE T EEEO ETE 9 Whats New in Hard Disk Manager 2010 sseesseeseeosecssecsseoseccssessecsseosecosecseccseeosecosecseeoseeoseceseee 9 Producere OMPOMC IIS iassa E a EE 11 Features OVEIVICW ssrcioniiiissoi aiinsir aia aa aaas aaa ia 11 KEV FEIW GS ann a E E eee Re 11 User Friendly FAUIFMNIMIZIOO MIESTA Eoas a EE E TREE A OEE EE E 1 ENS UNROOT E AE E E EE E E 1 Nese oy a6 il ctr mere eee n tere AA EEN E Teen A errr een aren ern Maer sree eee nn ern or te rere T 13 VAI CUIZ TIO Wr CMG Soeria a a E E T EEE E R EE O 13 E oe NS US E E I T A EE dics E E E T E AEE O E E IAE EEE E E E 13 BOOT MONGOOSE OG NIN CS sec ssecadec bares accayascicecyesmasuradatiieseensaysacadaciaves OEE OIE EEEE E OOO OEEO 14 Partition Hard Disk Management POCIIMES lt n cehscws eaciuectensetassacs decor velatenotsecnte veka aE aa A 14 SSY Enr OD IIRAIZOTION FACIE S ireira E sense aadenedeas sta T AAT 14 OSR O a EAE E EREE EE E E E SE 15 ADONAN FOCIE aaa T nan aree ete Mareen er eee 15 ADSI T a O E oe en rene ee eee me fe eae een nn OR NE ae POs RSF
116. S Disk Dev 14 The program will require the system restart to accomplish the operation in a special boot up mode Click the appropriate button to agree Shrinking a system partition to increase size of a data partition Let s assume you ve got two partitions on your hard disk the first one takes about 40 of all the disk space and Is exclusively used for Vista 64 bit while the second servers as a data storage One day you realize that your system partition doesn t need so much disk space that s what your data partition really requires at the moment You can easily tackle this problem with Paragon Linux DOS Recovery CD To increase size of a data partition by taking Unused space from a system partition please do the following Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media A Recovery Media Builder can help you prepare the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery environment either on a CD DVD disc or a thumb drive Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 231 To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Inthe boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment more preferable or Safe Mode to use the PTS DOS recovery environment in case you ve got problems with Linux Moreover you ve got the option to boot into the Low Graphics Safe Mode PTS DOS safe mode to cope with a serious hardware incompatibility
117. S DOS recovery environment in case you ve got problems with Linux A _ By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period 3 In the Linux launch menu select the Simple Restore Wizard You can find the same wizard in PTS DOS as well l You can create delete and format hard disk Paragon Hard Disk Manager partitions using Paragon Hard Disk Manager which will stan now Upon the yan please select the drive and one of ins partitions or its free space Then activate the Partition pull down menu and select one of One Button Copy Wirard the partitioning operations is a Simple Restor Wizard Wipe Wirard Express Res e Wizard File Transfer Wizard Boot Corector Network Configurator Log Saver Eject CD DVD SOLO LONTEH stat the command line 4 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 5 On the What to Restore page you can see a list of available images if several Most likely the required archive will be there too If not click the standard browse button to find it When you find your image double click on it to proceed Select Image 6 On the Image Properties page make sure that you select the correct image by viewing the provided information about the archive Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved Volume Type File System Basic Disk Size 40 0 Gb Primary NTFS 30Gb 18Gb WinXP Primary NTFS 98Gb
118. SI Intemal Hard Disk Dris E First Hard Disk Track Fret Track Ge Master Boot Recond MBA SF Local Disk E Primary Local Disk 7 Primary GP Local Disk 7 Primary F Basic Hard Disk 2 Witware Withware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev intemal Hard Desk Driv 7 The size of obiecdis lo back up 499 9 GB Estimated archive size 7 2 GB You ve got the option to modify the default backup settings by marking the appropriate checkbox on this page By default the program will take into account exclude filters set in the Settings dialog 4 On the Backup Destination page select the Save data to local network drives option There are several ways the Wizard can store your data Please select how would you like to save the archive Save data to the Backup Capsule Save data to local network dives Save data to physical partitions Save data to FTP locations Bum the data to CD or DVD 5 Map a network disk fo place your backup image to Call the Map Network Drive dialog by clicking the appropriate button Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 157 Select a folder where archive should be placed and specify archive name Archive name wil be used os a sub4older where backup data fies wil be soned Archive location C arc_030905071551273 a x g Name G Map Network Drive Fiemote location mapping A netveork share Map to dive letter y Connect as user Click the standard browse bu
119. Simple Restor Wizard Wipe Wirard Express Rese Wizard File Transfer Wizard Boot Corrector Network Configurator Log Saver Eject CD DVD Stat the command line 5 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 6 Select a disk where the files you need are stored from the pull down list in the right pane of the page Source Rootdin My Computer My computer Wi mn Mounted resources W imnydisk Local disks Wi media Removable disks 44 IDE CD DVD NEC VMiWa VMware IDE CORI ot NTFS Oor Disk 0i Winker amp DA NTFS lon Bisk 0 Application e Ej BackupCapsule 7 on Disk 0 UFSD di Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 210 7 Select files you want to copy and place them to Clipboard by pressing the left arrow button 9 Clipboard F imnyjdiskyhdal Documents and Setin 0 meydisk hda Documents and Sentin 9 E Mail Database G Favorites Local Settings G My Documents Total data size nja Rename FE Delete F Click the Calc button to estimate the resulted data size On the Select Destination Type choose the way the data will be stored Select the Save data to any local drive or a network share item Please select how would you like to save the data Save data to any local drives or a network share Choose this option if you want io save your data boca mounted or physic al partition to USB or FireWare external drives and to
120. There are several ways to do it Select in the Main Menu Partition gt Hide Unhide Partition Call the popup menu for the selected partition right click of the mouse button on the Disk Map then select the menu item Hide Unhide Partition 3 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation A It is strongly recommended not to hide the system partition Otherwise your operating system will fail to boot Set Label of a Partition The Partition Label is a small textual field Up to 11 characters that is located in the partition s boot sector It is detectable by any partitioning tool and is used for notification purposes only In order to change a partition label you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Call the Change Volume Label dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it Select in the Main Menu Partition gt Modify gt Change Volume Label Onthe Explorer Bar click on the current volume label Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 123 Call the popup menu for the selected partition right click of the mouse button on the Disk Map then select the menu item Change Volume Label 3 Enter a label for the selected partition Are you sure you want to change label on volume F Please specify a volume label for eager recognition of your volume Please enter mew volume isabel New Volume ral 4
121. USB first 2 Connect an external USB drive to the computer 3 Restart the computer It will oe automatically started up into the Linux recovery environment Normal Mode since it s the only mode that provides support for Mac computers 4 In the Linux launch menu select Hard Disk Manager A You can create delete and format hard disk Paragon Hard Disk Manager partitions using Paragon Hard Disk Manager which will stan now Upon the sian please select the drive and one of its Partitions or its ree space Then activate the Partition pull down menu and select one of One Button Copy Wirard the partitioning operations Simple Restor Wizard Wipe Wirard Express Rese Wizard File Transfer Wirard y5 Boot Corrector a Network Conigurator Log Saver Eject CO DVD stat the command line 5 Launch the Backup Wizard by selecting in the Main Menu of the program Wizards gt Backup Wizard Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 161 Ope rations Copy Hard Disk One Button Copy Wizard Backun Wir ard Simp Reston Wizard NTFS No label Undelete Partitions FFS dbp File Transfer Wizard Boot Corrector GPT Disk Oo Nive Size 112 Gb ime Type Network Configurator ed Free Volume label ed GPT Disk 0 Size 112 Gb Primary FAT32 200 Mb 15 0 Mb 185 Mb EFI Primary Apple HFS 549Gb 142Gb 40 7Gb kopar Primary Free 128 Mb Pr
122. Unmarking a checkbox opposite its name you can choose whether to use it or not _ By setting an include mask you automatically ignore files that do not match to AN it thus they won t be added to the backup image 6 Specify exclude masks The program includes a lot of ready made filters to effectively control contents of your backup images Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 17 Exclude masks manage files and folders that wil be eochuded from archive Spey exclude masks Frecutahte A installations E fiters Addfiter Rename category Delete category N Delete fiter EXE tete fier ocx let dite wed Deste iter cab Delete fiter ma Delete fiber imap Ueta fiker Aacciliary files 18 ites Addfiker Rename category Delete category 7 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Pease enter a short comment to descibe the archrre i RY He comment 8 Choose whether to accomplish the operation immediately set a time table for it or generate a script 9 On the Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process After the operation is completed you receive an incremental backup of the selected partition archive containing information specified in the wizard It is placed into the same destination as the base image A This operation can also be accomplished with the WinPE recovery environm
123. accomplished with the WinPE recovery environment Burning of data from the corrupted system disk to CD DVD To retrieve valuable information from your hard disk and burn it to CD DVD when the system fails to boot please do the following 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Recovery Media Builder can help you prepare the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery environment either on a CD DVD disc or a thumb drive To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 In the boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment since It s the only mode that enables to burn CD DVD discs o Normal Mode d Safe Hode d Low Graphics Safe Mode Floppy disk amp Hard disk A HBR Find OSes on your hard disks A By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period 3 In the Linux launch menu select the File Transfer Wizard You can find the same wizard in PTS DOS as well Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 212 A You can create delete and format hard disk Paragon Hard Disk Manager partitions using Paragon Hard Disk Manager which will stain now Upon ihe zi i sian please select the drive and one of its Simple Restore Wizard partitions or its ree space Then activate the Partition pull down menu and select one of One Button Copy Wizard the partiti
124. ack Up Partition Setup Initially the program suggests some consistent values for all parameters In most cases you can just press the Backup button to confirm the operation B lhl Are you sure you wani to backup volume F New Volume NTFS You are about to backup F Mew Volume NTFS This slows you to create the backup mage of your data Archive name ac 020509115757759 Archive comment Hamal compressor Estenaied achive mzee 30 59 MB Archive desinaiion Leu Space available on backup destination 491 3 GB Password protection e Archive Name The program automatically offers an easy to understand name containing the date and the time of the archive creation which can anyway be modified e Archive Description You can add some additional description to the archive that will later help to distinguish it from the others e Compression Level From the pull down list you can select the desired compression level for the backup image including the No compression variant e Archive Destination Here you can manually enter a path where to place the future backup image to or press the Browse button to find the required location e Password Protection By setting a password you can protect contents of the archive against Unauthorized access Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 85 In addition there Is the possibility fo make further detailed settings although the default values will do
125. act place to copy the data to Fiesse select he destination path where to save the data from cipboand Lookin E Veta C os Address Name Date a cE l E ji archive_db 12 30 2009 12 47 51 AM E jb BM2005 12 20 2009 1 35 47 AM E pi PefLogs 7 13 2009 7 20 08 PM E di Progam Aes jeti 2008 4 18 04 AM Total data size 391 7 KB Space avaiable on destination 147 3 GB 8 Finish the wizard to accomplish the operation Copying data from a parent virtual disk to one of its snapshots Let s assume you ve got a virtual machine with several snapshots You need to copy some data from a parent image to one of its snapshots You can t just roll back to the parent image as you don t want to lose the latest data of the snapshot so the best way out is fo copy the required data from the parent image to the snapshot To copy data from a parent image to one of its snapshots please do the following Launcher 1 Connect the required snapshot disk to our program 2 Connect its parent disk to our program It ll be connected for reading only Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 264 3 Copy the required data trom the parent disk to the snapshot 4 Disconnect the virtual disks or close the program Migrating from one virtual environment to another V2V Let s assume you re willing to shift to another virtual machine e g from a Microsoft Virtual PC to VMware Workstation The only thing that ho
126. aise Sug RS 98 BOSIG PONTONO OPSIG IONS oreren ia AER EA A EEE E OEE 98 AGVONC CAROM ONNGT ODSLINONS re Tar a N a 109 FTN ie OND IOO S aas anae ana ENNAN OI TENEO I E OEO O OOE NOAE 121 Hard Disk Mandgemeh asenaan E E S Aes 124 Upa MBR ornscusienan n a E T EEE NEEE 124 GOnverind Dyrniaini MBR TO BSC sinnena inn T E A T 125 CAO lI OC GIG Bl eeaeee r aE S E E E ace a 126 plo are tail PUNG SO eea re nN enero ne oe eR ee eRe ae ee eee 126 WIDE Ce lt We ee ee eee N eee eee ee eee net Hennes eet a een neon ane see anne ere 128 TASK SC al e 101 9 eeen a rer E ne ee ne Se ee mor TE cere et eer ene eee 131 Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved SFNA TME T ARIS aisi A E T E TS 131 METTA a E E A E E A A 132 Cie GING d chedulod TASK orsina E E E sea isaaeaaoauis eshaueaaaeoseauaeaunaseeauaene 134 SS OTN O eran e sac se E E OEE O CO AEO E AE TE 135 EXA FUNG TOMA NY arses ssa saci a T E EE E EN E EET E TEE E O es 137 Vew Farino Ole IDISK PFOMECINES saccsinouticsuwisanadlacinwedernasabdaadecadaunssncsatc E NEE E 137 VOUM 4 O paneer eee E E E E EE T eer ee 138 Fenn Us WZ ee a a E E T E A AN 138 MOUNT FONTO I iceansetitnes tar crwalstteaSenentevelastucos E E E weet ces eaeeaeeionencieeees 140 Bowngrdde NIERS NORIO a mer ene ree are ger er mn ee enn a REPO RNTT ME A PEST RN aT Tee Ten 142 MOONT A NVE ar a E cua stasna R sume sane ceasseudetsoaden E waadeutas E E 142 TETSU E reese a N a a 2eaancaensa asscercoauar
127. an SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol server All outgoing messages are first sent to the SMTP server which in its turn delivers them to the required recipients The address may be represented as a traditional Internet host name e g mail com or as an IP numeric address g XXX XXX XXX XX User e mail address Specify an e mail address that has been assigned by the Internet Service Provider or organization s e mail administrator My outgoing server requires authentication Activate the option to allow the program to make authentication on the server before sending messages User name Enter the name that will be used to log in to the e mail account Password Enter the password that will be Used to access the mail server Send e mail notification on apply Specify an e mail to send notifications on the carried out operations Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 66 Send mail in HTML format Activate the option to create messages in the HTML format instead of plain text Send complete report after applying operations Activate the option to create an in depth report on the carried out operations and send It after performing the last operation Send graphical view of the disk sub system before and after apply Activate the option to allow the program to attach two pictures of the disk layout made before and after the operation is completed By clicking the link at the bottom of the win
128. an advanced system of filters partition or a fast deployment to a bunch of identical computers It allows archiving data of the same volume with different backup policies It is easy and efficient when creating backup chains Demerits Resulted backup images may contain a It depends on a file system structure so lot of redundant data you won t be able to process unknown file svstems Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 3 file systems It is ineffective when trying to maintain a It cannot be used to back up a system backup chain especially when little partition amount of data is being changed It is much slower when processing large amount of data Backup Types At the present moment the market is offering various types of backup imaging to meet the needs of any user Besides supporting them all our program offers a unique backup type called File Increment to a Sector Backup Full and Differential Sector Backups A full sector based backup image includes all contents of a partition or a hard disk at the moment of its creation If you roll back your system to the initial state on a regular basis that s exactly what you re looking for But If you want to have multiple backup archives of the same partition reflecting certain time stamps unchanged data will inevitable be duplicated in all archives and take additional soace on backup media To tackle this issue there has been developed a su
129. apace 4914 GE File G arc_system arc_system_PBF 4 On the next page specify exactly what you need fo virtualize only the system partition or the entire hard disk in case you have to do with a hard disk backup image Archive Content Name Type Filesystem Sre Used loa Dik C Primary NTFS 499 9GB 85GB Archive Detads Name Local Disk C Volume label No label Fie system NTFS Total size 499 9G8 Lined space 85GB Free apace 451 4 GB When having to do with a hard disk backup image it s pretty enough to select A the system partition only to make your Windows start up in a virtual environment However that doesn t guarantee all your applications will work as they can be installed on the other partitions of the disk 5 Choose your virtualization software vendor and a number of additional parameters including e Type of the virtual disk You can either create an IDE or a SCSI virtual disk relevant for VMware only e Create a split disk You can choose whether to automatically cut the resulted virtual image fo files of 2 GBs or not available for VMware only e Pre allocate all disk space You can choose whether to pre allocate all soace of the future virtual disk or do it dynamically Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 253 Select your virtualization software Velware Vroccsiation 511 555 MB DE A Create a spi disk Preallocate af disk space Viiware ESX Server
130. arameter A partition s serial number Is saved in the boot sector Its value is generated while formatting The program enables to modify the serial number parameter for FAT16 FAT32 or NTFS partitions without re formatting In order to change a serial number you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Call the Change Partition Serial Number dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it Select in the Main Menu Partition gt Modify gt Change Serial Number On the Explorer Bar click on the current serial number 3 Enter a new serial number for the selected partition If should contain 8 hexadecimal figures 0 9 or A F The operation cannot proceed until you enter all 8 symbols 1 Are you sure you wani to change serial number of volume F Your computer may no longer boot of woe comedi Please enter new senal number in hexadecimal format 2E08 7D16 087C DD91 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Hard Disk Management In this chapter you will find all the information necessary to carry hard disk operations supported by the program Update MBR Convert to Basic Change Primary Slot Updating MBR The program enables to overwrite the current bootable code in the MBR Master Boot Record by the standard bootstrap code This can help to repair a corrupted bootable code of a hard disk resulted from a boot virus attack or a malf
131. ary partitions of a hard disk By default an operating system will boot only if its partition is active or bootable In order to mark a partition active inactive you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a primary partition on the Disk Map 2 Call the Mark Partition Active Inactive Dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it Select in the Main Menu Partition gt Mark Partition as Active Inactive Call the popup menu for the selected partition right click of the mouse button on the Disk Map then select the menu item Mark Partition as Active Inactive Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 122 Eam Are you sure you wami lo set the volume as active You ane about to set the volume F No label NTFS as active f you already have active volumes this action might render your system unbootabie 3 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation There can only be one active partition on a hard disk otherwise your operating system will fail to boot Hide Unhide Partition The program allows you to hide unhide primary and logical partitions By default an operating system does not mount hidden partitions thus preventing access to their contents In order to hide unhide a partition you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Call the Hide Unhide Partition Dialog to set up the operation
132. atabases MS Outlook Express Windows Mail media files or office documents of the My Documents folder or any other files and folders Back up Disk or Partition Create a sector based archive of an entire hard disk or separate partitions Create an increment to a file backup Restore Restore an entire hard disk separate partitions or files from the backup image Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 45 P2P Adjust OS Make your system bootable on different hardware Synthetic Backup Change any property merge a given differential image with its full image split un split compress de compress etc of an existing backup image without carrying out a physical backup operation Manage Backup Capsule Create and manage the backup capsule Check Archive Integrity Perform integrity check for the required backup image Cyclic Backup Automate a partition backup P2V Copy Migrate a Win2K physical system to a virtual environment in the online mode P2V Restore Migrate a Win2K physical system backed up with a Paragon disaster recovery tool to a virtual environment P2V Adjust Recover the startup ability after unsuccessful virtualization with a 3rd party tool Burn Hard Disk to CD or Back up the selected hard disk and burn the resulted image to DVD CD DVD Restore Hard Disk Restore the selected hard disk from a backup image Convert to Basic Convert a dy
133. ate checkbox a BESS eNi a ii a t a a G paa j L reate a vimu rr aici a SE SSeS eee m ot i Specify memory and networking options Memory RAM Hel me You can specty an amount from 4 MB through 1 526 MB Specify the memory as per the requirements of the operating system you plan to install on the virtual machine Networking w Use computer network connections You tan wie this option t connect the virtual machine to an external network Clear this checkbox to keep the virtual machine disconnected from the network AN To know more on the subject please click the links on this page 5 Select Use an existing virtual hard disk then browse for the previously created virtual disk or manually type in a full path to it Click Create to complete the operation Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 282 G Ei Create a virtual machine Add a virtual hard disk Create a dynamically expanding virtual hard disk Flame Ghd Windows Location O Use an enisting virtual hard disk Location Cwindows XP Old vhid Create a virtual hard disk using advanced options Enable Unde Disks Mor about using Unde Disks Cancel 6 Right click on the newly created virtual machine then select Open to start up your Windows in a virtual environment t Virtual Machines l Search Vert v Share with Burn Settings Create virtual machine New folder a Name
134. b drive of at least 250 MBs in size Please note all data on that drive will be deleted 2 Launch the Recovery Media Builder There are several ways to do it e Inthe Main Menu select Tools gt Recovery Media Builder e On the Common Tasks Bar click the Recovery Media Builder item of the Wizards menu 3 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 4 Select the Flash Memory option Aash Memory Select th option to create the recovery environment on a flash memory mada Thus you wall get all recovery fastures evaelable in the program on a compact relable and fest device fecommended Select the oplan to create the recovery emvaronment on a CD DVD Thus you will aso get a bootable CO or OVD with al recovery features avaiable in the program indispensable in case your computer does not suppor booting from LSB drives 5 Select the User specified CD DVD image iso file option then browse for an ISO image of our WinPE 2 1 recovery environment or manually type in a full path to it By selecting the Typical option you can build our Linux DOS recovery environment which we highly recommend you to do as well Typical Lise the standard Flecovery Media image supplied wih the program User specified CD DVD image iso file E Downloads Paragon winpe20_BR10_Sute earam iso Browse Copy from a CD DVD Choose a source CD DVD dive A a a nee company s web service 6 Select the required thumb drive from the list of flash memory
135. back on track again Besides if provides access to Paragon backups as regular folders to browse through their contents or copy required files Startup There are several ways fo start the File Transfer Wizard Express Launcher e Click the Backup and Recovery button and then select Transfer Files Launcher e Select in the Main Menu Tools gt File Transfer Wizard e Select the Transfer Files item of the Wizards menu on the Common Tasks Bar Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the transfer operation e Place to look for files directories Select a source disk from the pull down list in the left pane of the page The program enables to process both mounted and unmounted without drive letter assigned partitions Besides it is possible to map a network drive Source E Local Disk C3 l l me mi j DYD AW Detwe D Local Disk E S Local Disk F Archives 3 Hew Volume H E Prrysical partitions 2 NEW VOLUME Disk 1 CI Network places CI Network e Object s of operation Choose files directories you want to copy and place them to Clipboard by pressing the Add button To delete a file directory from the Clipboard select it in the Clipboard pane and press the Remove button You can also create a new folder rename or irreversibly delete existing files directories of the left pane by pressing the appropriate buttons Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved
136. by following the appropriate link in the left lower corner of the page The Shutdown System on Complete option enables to automatically switch off the computer on the successful accomplishment of the operation Managing Tasks All scheduled tasks are placed in a separate list which can be retrieved by clicking the Scheduled Tasks tab in the Explorer Bar Disk View Scheduled Tasks Archives Help Scheduled Tasks f hk Hame Sonpt Vien to Run J Backup of MBH of hard disk O scr 020908124 e690 pe At 1200 00 AM ever Mon of every week starting 2 2009 On every task you can get in depth information including e The task name e The full path to the generated script of the task e Scheduled time of launch Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 133 e Statistics on the last launch e Scheduled time of the next launch e Used account information e Comments to the task To easily manage tasks the program enables to arrange them according to a certain characteristic just by clicking on the required property This feature can be particularly beneficial when the Scheduled Tasks list A N contains too many items You can also enable disable rename delete refresh or modify properties of the selected task Task Editor With the Task Editor you can easily modify properties of scheduled tasks To do that you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a task on the Scheduled Tasks list 2
137. called DOS partitioning scheme It was introduced by IBM and Microsoft to use multiple partitions in the disk subsystems on IBM PC compatible computers Another popular partitioning scheme Is the so called Logical Disks Model LDM that originates from the UNIX mainframe systems Veritas Executive accommodates a simplified version of LDM to the Windows 2000 operating system Windows 2000 and XP support two quite different partitioning schemes the old DOS partitioning scheme and the new Dynamic Disk Management DDM The problem is that earlier versions of Windows do not support DDM In addition most hard disk utilities do not support it as well Recovery Media is a CD DVD disc a USB flash card or even a floppy disk from which you can boot for maintenance or recovery purposes Root Directory is the top level directory of a formatted logical drive to include other files and directories In modern file systems Ext2 Ext3 NTFS and even FAT32 it does not differ from other directories This is not the case for old FAT12 and FAT16 file systems Serial Number In the DOS partitioning scheme every hard disk and every partition has a 32 bit serial number represented by an 8 figure hexadecimal value It is stored in the MBR and its value Is assigned when the MBR sector is initialized by Microsoft standard disk managing tools such as Windows Disk Administrator and the FDISK utility In fact a hard disk s serial number is not important for most operat
138. changes yet On this page you can efher poep or reconsider the Piesse note f you scoept the changes the Vizard wil physically perform al operstions so you wont be able bo interrupt this process or undo the changes may take some time to apply the changes You may also be asked to restart your computer duning tha PrcHcess Would you like to apply your changes 7 G Yes apply the changes physically No bet m reconsider After the operation is completed your system will be bootable on the new hardware Migrating from a virtual environment to physical V2P Let s assume your desktop PC was damaged a couple of months ago Luckily you had had its system virtualized just before the tragedy Having a laptop at the disposal you kept working with the desktop system in a virtual environment for a while while scanning the market for a replace To cut it short you ve got a brand new desktop PC just delivered to your door it s time for a little V2P operation Our program can help you do that But before you start please make sure the following conditions are met e You ve got drivers for the new hardware ready to use not zipped or in exe files e You ve got access to the virtual disk from your desktop PC You can have it locally on external storage or a network share To migrate from a virtual environment to physical please do the following 1 Start up the computer from our WinPE media 2 Once it has been loaded read the agr
139. ck Recovery Discs e On the Common Tasks Bar click the Check Recovery Discs item of the Wizards menu Startup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e CD DVD drive Select from the pull down list of available CD DVD devices the required drive to use during the operation Drive Optiarc DVD RW AD 71 DA Rect the disc ster check e Set whether to eject the disk after the operation is completed or not Result After the operation is completed you can see results of the check Edit View Sectors With the built in Edit View Sectors tool the program enables to view edit sectors on existing partitions hard disks providing the possibility to directly access and modify sectors save and restore sectors from specified files navigate through the system metadata etc In order to edit view sectors of a hard disk partition you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a hard disk partition on the Disk Map 2 Call the Edit View Sectors dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it Click the Disk View tab and then choose Disk Editor Select in the Main Menu Partition Hard Disk gt Edit View Sectors Call the popup menu for the selected partition hard disk right click of the mouse button on the Disk Map then select the menu item Edit View Sectors Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 148 Edi sectors on Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtua
140. ct serial number in the Serial Number field You can find it in the product box or obtain from your reseller Click Next On the next page you will be asked to provide some additional data Also you will need to decide whether you want to get confirmation on registering the product by E mail or not Click Next and then click Finish That is all The product is now registered How to Download Updates Upgrades Downloading of updates upgrades can be fulfilled in the following way l 2 iE Run an Internet browser and visit the page www paragon software com my account In the Email field of the Authorization section enter an E mail used for registration In the Password field enter a password received after registration Click Sign in If the user name and password are valid you will get to your account Select My Downloads of the Products section to see what updates are available for you Select the desired update and click Download Contacting Paragon Technology GmbH If you have any questions about the company products please do not hesitate to contact Paragon Technology GmbH Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 20 Service Contact www paragon software com Visit Paragon GmbH web site Registration amp updates web www paragon service software com support Knowledge Base amp Technical kb paragon software com Support sales paragon Pre sale information software c
141. ct the required guest OS Please make sure it s the same as on your virtual disk otherwise you may face hardware incompatibility problems 6 The wizard will offer you to create a virtual disk As you cannot skip it click Next to complete the operation fg Pocket ACE size caloulator Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 278 7 Edit settings of the newly created machine Windows Vista TEST State Powered off Fe Power on this virtual machine fa Eri wart acr na tings GB Enable ACE features What is ACE 9 Click Add to connect your virtual disk to the machine Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 279 10 In the opened dialog select Hard Disk as the required hardware type to add What type of hardware do you want to install Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 280 13 Click Finish to complete the operation Most likely you will be asked to convert your virtual disk to a new format You can update your disks since this procedure involves change of a version only nothing else To know more on the subject please consult the Known Issues Chapter 2 Convert existing virtual disk to newer format The chosen virtual disk can be converted to the newest format supported by this Workstation 6 5 virtual machine However after conversion the virtual desk wil be unusable with older virt
142. d with the newly formatted partition In addition there Is the possibility to make further detailed settings although the default values will do in most cases To activate the advance mode you need to click the More options button at the Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 103 foot of the dialog page Depending on the chosen file system the following options become available J Use 05 ball in tomal routine Fiease select number of sectors per clusier 8 Please select number of sectors per boot Please select number of root aries Restore defauts e Use OS built in routine Mark the option to restrict the available values according to the used OS e Whether the surface test will be performed Define the level of the surface check to make the program find bad and unstable sectors and mark them unusable in the file system metadata e The amount of sectors per boot This parameter is available exclusively for FATI 6 and FAT32 file systems Set the number of sectors to be reserved for the boot area on the partition with this spinner control e The amount of root entries This parameter is available exclusively for FAT16 file system Set the maximum amount of files directories to be placed in the Root Directory on the FATI 6 partition e The amount of sectors per cluster Define the Cluster Size for the formatted partition with this spinner control Number of available options depends on the
143. d backup operations e HDD raw processing Mark the checkbox to copy back up a hard disk in the sector by sector mode thus ignoring its information structure e g unallocated space or unused sectors of existing partitions will be processed as well This can help to avoid problems with hidden data created by certain applications or the system administrator However it will take more time to accomplish the operation e Partition raw processing Mark the checkbox to copy a partition in the sector by sector mode to successfully process unknown file systems However it is not recommended to enable this option when working with supported file systems as it takes more time to accomplish the operation e Perform incremental copy Mark the checkbox to only copy changes on the hard disk from the moment of the last copy operation The program will perform Comparison between a previous copy of the hard disk and Its current state Only sectors that are different will be updated thus considerably decreasing the amount of data to write e Skip OS auxiliary files Mark the checkbox to skip OS auxiliary files like pagefile sys hiberfil sys etc thus reducing the operation time and the resulted size of the backup image e Skip archive files stored in archive library Mark the checkbox to skip backup images registered in the archive database thus reducing the operation time and the resulted size of the backup image Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Softwar
144. d dosed E EEE EEA 38 CODY ODEVONONS rsisi EEE ei EAE EAE AE ENI ATARE 39 Dive P GUTMOMING iscecenteteccconstocscorstscccosatecacactcasecasecccatacteccedacteccateccanecedasacatewsucuseasvacusaeesueucaes setecconmsteenes 39 Bool oBN ol pliir4e tela rmereerer ter eere rer creer rere perry ammeter E 40 Seq al e U1 a Oeser enr E rtrterr tre rinrre te nite ries tet E er Ten on Ne nate near E 41 Windows COMDBOMECINS secisi2occnces scaizcavaensosbinaceoatvasssascacsaanseceissnwaensacuseesdeasaesesebarncwiwesdes 41 MENACE OVEIVIEW corii EATE he te eeea ER ee teean etait ei nivois cori E 41 Sener al LOYO UT areen a a E abs eeendaedee 4 MA MENU rennen A N salen heentindannesul eyaendeaae 43 TOOL BOEn E E A E E N T EE TONOS 47 VUO OSE GIIOMS BOS mee a T E ceased a ttaceateneaae 48 COMAE BOF e EE TA 49 OEG rea E A EE sen Gaetan ends uaesotass 5 DIEE E E AA AS P ES AERE TE E A E AA E SERTE AO SO A SE EREE TEN AANA EE 52 PONIMONES benina a a r a aris becuse shad aslncth alae sassicaamtuneeanentayetou 54 PODES Bana a a T A a T tua tand ines 55 Legena DON eaan aN E E O O T 56 OB a A E EE T E A EAE T E E A 56 SETTINGS OVVIE W coercicion aa a ea Selene Geen see eae ateetedecaceecdesesindedesteinewenae te 56 COEF OO Eee Rn RNa enn Troe PTE Ite NTRP MAUL UNT At T MERE MN TET RMN CITT O Oe RAUNT NP NRT RE A TO 57 BOCK Ose OP IONS uer T E EERE 58 POTOAN OO Olas e aa a EA AAEE A AA EEEE AA O NO 59 Generdl Copy Gnd BACKUO OPHION siniek Gish e A 60 CD IDV
145. d here In the opened dialog browse for the required virtual disk then click Connect to accomplish the operation You ve also got the option to have this disk be connected automatically at every program startup by marking the appropriate checkbox Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 258 Would you like to connect a virtual hard disk image Please select virtual hard disk image file Look in New Volume F imp x F Name E Vista C S 8 BD ROM Drive Ds E Local Disk E S F New Volume F _ Server 2003 64 ba vdi TMB 3 24 2005 8 32 17 AM Tea VM Disk2 vmdk 73M8 5 18 2003 1 57 30 AM _ Visa Mba vd BO SKB S 28 2005 74526 AM _ XP Saba vhd 4428 3 16 2005 5 56 26 AM E E ser 4 200 0 1 164 a Y Files of type Al virtual dsk images A Disk info VMware vitual hard disk IDE 100 ME 104 857 600 Bytes Click the Show recently used disks link to select and connect one of the A disks you ve already worked with 3 That s all The selected virtual disk will be available on the disk map as if it s an ordinary physical disk Disk View Scheduled Tasks Archives Help gt Local Disk Local Disk Unallocated k e PEM 2 569 8 GB 93 8 ME NTFS Basic Hard Disk 3 VMware virtual image Virtual image Limitations Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 259 e A virtual disk open
146. d on the bootable device assigned in the BIOS 6 Start the operation by clicking the Next button or return to correct the settings After the operation is completed you can place backup archives into the created backup capsule A This operation can also be accomplished with the WinPE recovery environment Backing up a hard disk or partition to the Backup Capsule To back up an entire hard disk or a separate partition and then place the resulted image into the backup capsule please do the following Launcher 1 Create the backup capsule with the Manage Backup Capsule Wizard 2 Click the Back up a Disk or Partition item of the Wizards menu any of the ways described earlier can also be used here 3 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 4 On the What to back up page mark the appropriate option opposite a hard disk s name or a partition s name depending on the chosen task Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 153 Dick the check box next to any had disk dive or partition you want to back up Name Type A My Computer My Computer E F Basc Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev intemal Hard Desk Orr First Hard Disk Track First Track Ge Master Bont Record MER Wied prr Disk C Pnmary 7 3 F F Base Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI intemal Hand Cesk Dris E Firat Hard Disk Track Fest Track Ge Master Boot Record MER Loca Disk EJ
147. dow you can jump to the Operation A N Dependency Options Operation Dependency Options amp Edit settings General options a l egia a P Operation dependency options Pattonng options Copy and backup options Please select a task to be canted out when one or more of the LADD H ka hile system convemon options Copy Backup exciude option le Backup exclude optens le Backup include ootions Chack file system ompect SMFT Cornet Darrin Desk to Basic as ee LF at imee f ea a ff vf f Ti Jf ff i ff a Jf LAMP Dao d Select al Cearal Restore defauts This section contains a set of options that will be taken into account when the Send e mail notification on apply function is enabled By marking Unmarking a checkbox opposite the required operation you can choose whether to receive an e mail notification on its completion or not You won t be notified if an operation requires the system restart Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 67 Virtual Mode Options G Edit settings General options Virtual mode options Backup immage cotiors Parilioning optiona Copy and backu options Operations mods a0 cata aL aem co om lee nie ro i ae Fat ae n Bioy YTA moga ne aa p mn e ior NEET a i i a z a ll i bn ihe dpi hein gop j Set this option on to cary out al the operations virtually You wil be able to mm PUG DBS Opes comma the changes or nflback al of t
148. dware devices Migration to a new hardware platform seems the best way out if not for one thing you still need access to your software but you do know for sure that the bulk of it won t work on the new platform Luckily you ve got a backup image of your old system made with Paragon software that s just enough for its virtualization But before you start please make sure the following conditions are met e You ve got a backup image of your Windows e Your hard disk has enough free space to store a virtual image of your Windows depends on the system e You ve got one of the supported virtualization software To make a virtual disk out of your old system backed up with a Paragon disaster recovery tool please do the following Launcher 1 Click the P2V Restore item of the Wizards menu any of the ways described earlier can also be used here 2 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 252 3 Browse for the required backup image of your old system The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Hame Sze Cate 3 Ji ae system 9 2 2009 2 41 04 AM arc_sysem 001 ILEGGE 3 2 2005 2 41 AM 1SGB 92 2009 29732 AM Archive Ale Details Hame Local Disk C Comment My system backup Volume label No label Hie system NIFS Tatal sze 499 9 GEB F Used space 8 56GB ree
149. e Group All rights reserved 61 By clicking the link at the bottom of the window you can jump to the Copy Backup Exclude Options CD DVD Recording Options G Edit settings CD DVD recording options Bum every CD DVD dak to ihe end Choose this option alow the dsk to be copied by third party tools Racording speed Selec spaad automatcaly On cepindency OFDONS Auto recoding seed Choose this option to allow the recorder to choose the best eat age y m 6 Aene e pj jeppa Dop tee p exclude options Pie Backup exclude options 5 am a a aj ail LL or DVO along wih backup data File Backup include options a a ci i E Ee f ari uA sn Fiaa poiana a Bwa 3 in CPRELMS er ips options a Sooty how you would ike to boot from CD ar OVE Boot from any CD or DVD 4a fo da Fr fai a 5 i my pm m ay Please select d folderto place 50 images to when CD or DVD 150 maker is used This section contains a set of options that will be taken into account during CD DVD burn operations e Burn every CD DVD to the end By default the program does not create ISO 9660 compliant burning sessions as it processes data on the fly and can only estimate the resulted session size That s why no third party tool will get access to the recorded data To tackle the issue mark the checkbox to make the program create a standard Disk at Once session It may slow down the burning process as every CD DVD will be record
150. e Resize partitions directly on the Disk Map with the drag and drop technique e A context sensitive hint system for all functions of the program e Previewing the resulting layout of hard disks before actually executing operations so called virtual operations Backup Facilities e Archive Database to help the user easily manage backup images get properties add delete mount etc This feature is only available for the Windows installation of the program e Support of all present day techniques to store backup images Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 12 Backup to local mounted unmounted without drive letter assigned partitions Backup to an external mounted storage to provide for a higher level of data protection and system independence Backup to a special secured place on the hard disk called the Backup Capsule that has an independent system layout e g a separate partition and will stay operable should the active file system be damaged To avoid an accidental removing or unauthorized access of the backup data this partition is hidden and thus cannot be mounted in the operating system Backup to external media CD DVD to guarantee a high level of data protection as long as the backup media Is kept secure Backup to a network drive to stand a better chance of success in case of a hard disk failure Backup to an FIP server to provide a new level of system and data protection
151. e enter a short comment to deecnbe the archive Ry No comment I Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 154 8 Choose whether to accomplish the operation immediately set a time table for it or generate a script 9 On the Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process This operation can also be accomplished with the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery environments Backing up a hard disk or partition to external media CD DVD To back up an entire hard disk or a separate partition and then burn the resulted image to CD DVD please do the following Launcher 1 Click the Back up a Disk or Partition item of the Wizards menu any of the ways described earlier can also be used here 2 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 On the What to back up page mark the appropriate option opposite a hard disk s name or a partition s name depending on the chosen task Gick the check box next to any hard disk dive or partition you want to back up Name Type a A My Computer My Computer E F Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev intemal Hand Desk Ort EN First Hard Disk Track First Track G Master Boot Record MBR iv Loca Cask i hi Basc Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual SSCS Disk Dev intemal Hard Desk Dris First Hard Disk Track First Track EF Master Boo
152. e file Please check whether you ve got a permission to write to the selected destination or not 13 When trying to restore a backup archive get the following error Can t restore to current selection or Archive does not fit Most likely you re trying to restore a backup of the whole hard disk to a partition or vice versa 14 I set up a timetable for a task but it fails to execute There can be a number of reasons for that Windows Task Scheduler does not work properly Check whether it is so or not by scheduling a simple task call Notepad through scheduling You don t have permission to write to the selected backup destination Glossary Active Partition is a partition from which an x86 based computer starts up The active partition must be a primary partition on a basic disk If you use Windows exclusively the active partition can be the same as the system volume In the DOS partitioning scheme only primary partitions can be active due fo limitations of the standard bootstrap The term backup originates from the time when the best way to protect valuable information was to store it in form of archives on external media It s become now a general notion fo mean making duplications of data for protection purposes Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 285 Bootable Archive is created by adding a special bootable section when backing up the data to CD DVDs Thus you will be able to r
153. e fly e More flexibility for online data processing techniques to provide for easier configuration for both Paragon Hot Processing and Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy Service VSS e Better support for 64 bit platforms to reboot your computer to one of the three special modes Windows native Linux or DOS to automatically complete operations which cannot be accomplished under 64 bit Windows e Automatic data exclusion with an advanced system of filters will helo you automate the process of building up contents of the future backup image by excluding irrelevant data such as movies Music etc e Better support for GUID Partition Table GPT fo back up and restore not only single GPT volumes but entire disks including the option of resize during the restore operation e Better support for the Apple Boot Camp Configuration with the option not only to back up and restore this kind of configurations but to copy single volumes or entire disks with resize e Better support for Linux ExtFS starting from Ext2FS up to the brand new Ext4 FS e More usability when managing backup tasks with the new Task List and Archive View Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved Product Components In order to cope with different tasks the product contains several components e Windows based set of utilities is the crucial part of the product With the help of an easy to use launcher you may find and run tasks of any complexity in
154. e into the image such disk elements as the Master Boot Record MBR and the first track of the hard disk This can be very helpful for serious disk recovery procedures Name Type Fi Ll My Computer My Computer E F Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Vetual 5 SCSI Disk Dev intemal Hard Disk Dive i Fest Hard Disk Track First Track IEI eee J MER 1 Local Desk Primary j Base Hard Disk 1 Vhia Viiware Virtual S SCSI Dsk Dev intemal Hard Disk Drive EAN First Hard Disk Track First Track gt Master Boot Record MER e Backup destination The wizard allows saving backup archives to local or network drives to physical partitions without drive letters assigned to FIP Severs the Backup Capsule or burning them to CD DVDs You need to select a destination taking the estimated archive size and available soace on the backup destination into account Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 82 There are several ways the Viirard can sore your data Please select how would you like to save the archive Save data to the Backup Capsule Save data to local network dives Save data lo physical partitions Seve data io FTP locations Burn the date to CD or DVD e Name and location of the resulted image Provide a file name for the new image and its exact location The program automatically offers an easy to understand name containing the date and the time of the archive creation which can anyway b
155. e made during the operation val be crealed as a complete base image Differential type Every first image wil be made as a complete base image al the others wil be differentiated from R A d erential backup only contains changes in the patton s contents wih respect io 5 complete image e Base type Every image created during the operation will be made as a full archive e Differential type Every first image will be made as a full base archive and all the others will be differentiated from it This operation requires much less soace thus considerably saving your system resources By setting the Maximum disk space to store images and the Maximum number of images to store parameters you may define when the operation will be cycled That means that on exceeding these two parameters the oldest archives will be automatically overwritten if choosing the Differential type only differential images will be overwritten Magnum dsk spece lo store images 10000 MB Madmum numiser of images to store 2 9 On the Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process The operation will run according to the set timetable The resulted backup images will be placed into the specified destination a local or a network disk its features defined by the wizard Merging a full partition backup with one of its differentials To merge a full partition backup with one of it
156. e modified Select a folder where archive should be placed and specty archive name Archive name val be used as 3 subdomer where backup data hes wil be stoned Archive location G arc_test 4 P hama ome Gl My Computer H E Local Desk C H E Local Cesk E H E Archives G P E images 20 0 1 1640 Z H OI Network Archive name aie hes Estimated archive size 2 MB Space available on backup destination 38GB A The program automatically calculates size of the future archive and informs the user about space available on the selected destination e Archive Comment You can add some additional description to the archive that will later help to distinguish it from the others Pease enter a shot commet to desoibe the archre i Ry He comment In addition there Is the possibility fo make further detailed settings although the default values will do in most cases To activate the advance mode you need to mark the appropriate option on the second page of the wizard When it is marked the next page enables to define e Whether the archive integrity will be controlled Checking archive integrity enables to guarantee that all backup images created with the program are 100 percent flawless Nevertheless if you decided not to control the archive integrity the backup operation would take about 3 5 less time e Whether image file names will be set automatically in complex archives Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon S
157. e name mask Vildcands In the opened dialog the program allows the user to define the following parameters e Name Give to the filter any name you like but try fo use an Informative one e Filter Press the Browse button to select files or folders you would like to be excluded or specify a filter mask by using or wildcards e Description Add a short description to the filter not to miss it Up later Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 70 Click the OK button and you will get a new item on the list of filters By marking Unmarking a checkbox opposite its name you can choose whether to use it or not A By clicking the link at the bottom of the window you can jump to the General t Copy and Backup Options File Backup Exclude Options Senni open z Exclude from file backup archives Backup image ootens Paritionng optiona Copy and backup options specty masks for fies and folders that must be excluded from archives CD DVD recording options Hot processing options Executable amp Installations 2 iens Fun during backup options Emal goban eddfiter Rengme catesor aaie oateoery Operation dependency optic viua mode oponi Fle syam conven ppusra Copy Backup exciude options He Backup exciide options Fie Backup include optons Log fies options Vie opis dw else titar Auocliary files 18 ters d F ter Fanara 7 old In this section you can find a lot
158. e of the dialog By selecting a section from the list you can open a set of options A N To get a detailed description to any setting control or field of the program just click the hint button and then the object you need Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 5 General Options Edit setting OI z P E oS General options Backup image opters D ai ee BOON Gp Loopy and backup options V Ename dala Ors poieci Jup r Ma 1 ee B i igi fi pn L r Ea k k P g i k mm whi D TO Garang Opang Chagse his option 10 enaut Peat no data wil be baai E semn unexpectedly gog ang options Gown Decsuse of power shortage ec r re ey rri man L a s p i z Ea Diet i e P at gp Backup exciude option Hie Backup exclude optiona Fia Backup include cobons op fies options Be ape OF This section contains a set of general options that will be taken into account during any operation carried out with the program e Enable data loss protection Mark the checkbox to make the program work in the fail safe mode also referred to as the data loss protection mode which ensures reliability for operations by maintaining a special journal In case of a hardware malfunction power outage or an OS failure happened in the middle of a data sensitive operation resize move merge redistribute change cluster size etc the program will ask to insert the bootable recovery media and automatically complete t
159. e program functionality If this is the case please wait a bit and everything will be OK Mode When the Normal mode is selected the Linux launch menu appears Network Contgurator Log Saver Eject CD DVD Rg Start the command line You can create delete and format hard disk partitions using Paragon Hard Disk Manager which will stan mow Upon the sian please select the drive and one of its partitions or its ree space Then activate the Partition pull down menu and select one of the partitioning operations Hard Disk Manager enables to copy and back up separate partitions or entire hard disks carry out partitioning operations etc Simple Restore Wizard allows restoring hard disks and partitions One Button Copy Wizard helps to carry out such a technically complicated operation as cloning of hard disks just by pressing one button Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 2 e Wipe Wizard enables to destroy all on disk information or only remnants of deleted files directories e Express Resize Wizard enables to increase free soace on one partition by up taking the Unused space of an adjacent partition e File Transfer Wizard allows coping files folders to another disk or a partition as well as recording them to CD DVD e Boot Corrector helps fo correct the Windows System Registry without Windows being loaded e Network Configurator enables to establish a netw
160. ed for writing with a 3 party tool e g being used by a virtual machine won t be connected as asynchronous parallel writing to the disk file will most likely result in data corruption e A virtual disk opened for reading with a 3 party tool e g it s a parent VMware disk which snapshot is being used by a virtual machine will be opened for reading only with the corresponding notification e A double disk connection is prohibited Repartitioning a virtual disk Let s assume you ve got several partitions on a virtual disk After installing a number of resource consuming applications and system updates the system partition has started to suffer from the lack of free space But an adjacent partition has a plenty of redundant space That s just enough to make the system partition suffer no more To increase size of a system partition by taking Unused space from an adjacent partition please do the following Launcher 1 Connect the required virtual disk to our program 2 Select it on the disk map Riasize or Move partition Basic GPT Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dew Local Disk Unallocated 128 MB Not formatted OEM se 569 8 GB Basic Hard Disk 3 VMware rirtual image Virtual image Basic Hard Disk 3 VAhware virtual image Virtual Image 65 4 MB NTFS M NTFS E FAT FATIS E Ee Unai Urmu Edd ReiserFS E F 3 Right click on the soace don
161. ed up to the end no matter how much actual information to contain e Recording speed The user may define how fast a CD DVD will be recorded minimum normal and maximum Besides there is an automatic mode when the program will set the most appropriate soeed for every CD DVD e Bootable ISO image That s the image to be placed together with the backup data By default the program offers its own bootable ISO image which contains a Linux DOS recovery environment However the user is free to use any bootable ISO image e CD DVD boot capability The program enables to choose whether any recorded CD DVD will be bootable or only the first one for a session or without that function at alll Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 62 e Folder where the ISO image is to be placed When the user decides not to physically burn a CD DVD but create an ISO image file this very folder will be Used to contain these images Hot Processing Options G Edit settings ee ESE d ph hae r Ter Ea Shae T A Hot processing options Ser L ThS ge Taim Pariiiorng optiona Copy and backup options J Enaiie hot processing m mm omn pee mm n ee T a p a nun GUm DECALID opens T pug m b ae Poe mimi iri benm ma ate Opes Paragon Hot Processing technology provides fast backup copy of locked Pir ae ee 7 z j z ip KITE i 7 ALE Jperaion dependency opbons partitions and hard disks under any Windows NT fami
162. ee space whichis data e Copy parameters The wizard enables to specify the following options Your hard disk after changes Basic Hard Disk 3 VWiware VMware Virtual S SCS isk Dev re T R i kj Unallocated Whee to place a copy Please specify the size of the new patton 3624 gt 39 MB 20473 MB Please specify size of free space before the partition O gt OMB 20 434 MB Please specty size of free space aier the pation 16859 gt 0 MB 20 426 MB Partition size Define the size in Mb of the copied partition Free space before Define the position in Mb of the copied partition relative to the beginning of the available range of disk space Free space after Define the amount of trailing free soace in Mb at the end of the available range of disk space A Partition size and position may also be defined by using the drag and drop technique To do that just carry out the required operation on the Disk Map Result After the operation is completed you receive a fully functional duplicate of the existing partition To make a Win2K operating system bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Boot Management Our program enables to easily manage several operating systems on one computer with the help of the Boot Manager Setup Wizard Among the key features of the wizard the following should be mentioned e Upto 16 operating systems on one PC Copyright 1994
163. eee g OGLE a Is DoD SAA eat 4 hyi proceseng options a ET p On ee Ge wml Bg m I a Jam s 7 pam Bee ee eee Len LAETATES a ess CCB i in a CONAC ES one Te ee 2 amdo E i ome i e e sm _ u f PLP Zi 7 Li 1 Ema wH aria Im La Pe oie tm ane eT Ooeration depandency cotions Vitus mace cotons File piem convermen prions Domn Backup ecidae options la Backup exclude optens b grt i Fla Backup iciuda cotions J pi Si ee eS GP F Here you can set a specific data erasure algorithm that will be used by default during wipe operations The current version of the program provides support of one military standard i e US DoD 5220 22 M Getting Information on Disks and Backup Images The program provides some helpful tools to get information on the properties of disks and peculiarities of existing backup images Viewing Disk Properties The main tool to view in depth information on the properties of hard disks is the Disk Map It represents the actual state of the computer s hard disks Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 74 Generally the hard disks are represented on the map by rectangular bars which also contain small sized bars The small sized bars represent logical disks partitions When you select a large sized bar the Explorer Bar displays information about the disk in a bright graphical form Basic Hard Disk 1 FUJITSU MPFSTO2ZAT Type Basic Hard Disk Drive
164. eement and then mark the appropriate checkbox to accept A If you do not agree with any conditions stated there you won t be able to use the program Once you accept the agreement you will see the Universal Application Launcher Click Full Scale Launcher 3 Connect the required virtual disk to our program 4 Copy the connected virtual disk fo your physical disk just the way it s done with physical disks Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 267 5 Right click on the virtual disk then select Disconnect Virtual Disk 6 Complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Migrating a Windows 7 vhd Let s assume you need to make your Windows 7 contained in a vhd file start up on another computer You ve copied the virtual disk added info on it fo the BCD boot menu then tried to start up the OS but to no avail your Windows goes BSOD with the Ox000007B error code We can help you out with this naughty problem To make a vhd image of Windows 7 start up on different hardware please do the following 1 Start up the computer from our WinPE media 2 Once it has been loaded read the agreement and then mark the appropriate checkbox to accept If you do not agree with any conditions stated there you won t be able to use A N the program Once you accept the agreement you will see the Universal Application Launcher Click Full Scale Launcher 3 Connect the required virtual disk to our program 4 Com
165. ent Creating an increment to a full file backup To update a file backup please do the following Launcher 1 Click the Incremental File Backup item of the Wizards menu 2 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 On the Browse for Archive page specify the required full base file archive e By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of Images contained in the Archive Database if any Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 172 Fe ik Type Creation Date Source Object Size Flags Com Mounted 0 2 2009 5 1141AM Aleevel Archive a f 6 2 2009 5 06 03 AM FAledevel Archive 4KB M awich to Hie Wew Archive File Details images Backup date 9 2 2009 5 11 41 AM Total size 113 1 KB 115 869 Bytes Archive size 101 2 KB 103 723 Bytes Fia C ae_images FLO00000000000000000 archive pli To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details disolay a short description A E A D AES g Image Properties chapter e By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Look in E Local Disk C Ex Y Name Sire Date Local Desk C ac mages 9 2 2009 5 11 18 AM i FLOQ0000000000000000 9 2 2009 5 11 18 AM 101 2
166. equired data is stored from the pull down list in the right pane of the window You can find it among physical partitions as a connected virtual disk cannot have an assigned drive letter either TE A To easily find the disk you need please use its volume label or sequence number as a check point 5 Select files you want to copy and place them to Clipboard by pressing the left arrow button Click Next to continue Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 263 Name Source Fats vy New Volume Disk 3 parttion 1 Prim gl 9 02 0png 020p png 03 png Haren O5 05pnq 05 05 eng E E hew Volume Disk 3 patton 1 Pamay NTFS 05 0205 png 05 02 05pn5 TE 02 Ot png 06 04png 06 0png BS 04 04 99 i Mong 07 M eng m R 0502 0590 0S 046png 0S 04png 05 05 ong O60 prg Tote date size 391 7 KB 6 Select the Save data to local network drives item Click Next to continue There me several ways the VWicard can store your data Fiese select how would you lke to save the data ec ec E E E N Save data to physical partitions Bumn the data to CO or DVD Select the option to save your data locally on a mounted partition fath drive letter assigned or on a network share To store your data on the network you wi need a mapped network dive or a mounted directory on the server You will be promoted to choose an exact location for your date later in the wizard 7 Specify the ex
167. er the operation Click the Next button to initiate the restore process Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 191 Your partitions before operations 11 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Operations list Subaperation progress 1 Restore partition or disk EELEE Operation progress TT Time elapsed 60 01 10 Time to finish 00 06 36 Copied solar 250 0 Mb Read so far 366 0 Mb 5 7 Mbs To copy L5Gb Write so far 366 0 Mb 52 3 Mb s Overall progress CT aa Restore Primary partion 0 disk 0 from file 7 BP280508 PRF Data writing 12 Affer completing the operation close the wizard and then reboot the computer This operation can also be accomplished with the WinPE recovery environment To make a Win2K operating system bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Restoring a system partition from a network drive Let s assume that your computer fails to boot because of a virus attack or corruption of some system critical files But you ve got a backup of your hard disk on a remote backup server That s just enough to easily get your system back on track again To restore your system partition from a backup image located on a network drive please do the following 1 Start up the computer from our WinPE recovery media Reco
168. erations is particularly effective when you have to repeat a seguence of actions on a regular basis For example developing a specific project on a day to day basis and having to make a backup every evening so as not to lose the valuable data you will really appreciate when this kind of routine operations will be carried out automatically without your participation Another aspect of any automation process is that it allows an optimization of your computer s work load This is especially important when operations require a considerable amount of computer resources processor time memory and more A number of tasks which can decrease the performance can be run during the night or whenever the computer has the least work load to perform The program has a special tool for scheduling You can set out a timetable for any operation and it will start at a specified time without interrupting your current activity Windows Components In the given section you can find all the information necessary to successfully work with the Windows version of the product Interface Overview This chapter introduces the graphical interface of the program The design of the interface precludes any mistake being made on the part of the user Most operations are performed through the system of wizards Buttons and menus are accompanied by easy understandable icons Nevertheless any problems that might occur while managing the program can be tackled by reading thi
169. es stored in the Archive Database will be processed during the backup operation Skipping backups of the Archive Database may considerably decrease the resulted image file and time to carry out the operation By default the program will take into account exclude filters set in the Settings dialog You ve got no option to change them directly from this dialog Result After the backup operation is completed you receive an image of the selected partition This image is placed into the specified destination its features defined by the dialog Available operation scenarios e Backing up a hard disk or partition to the Backup Capsule e Backing up a hard disk or partition to external media CD DVD Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 86 e Backing up a hard disk or partition to a network drive e Backing up a hard disk or partition to an FIP server e Backing up a dual boot Mac to an external USB drive e Backing up files to a local mounted unmounted without drive letter assigned partition e Creating a differential to a full partition backup e Creating an increment to a full partition backup e Creating an increment to a full file backup e Backing up with Smart Backup Wizard e Creating a cyclic partition backup e Merging a full partition backup with one of its differentials Restoring System and Data The program includes a convenient and reliable restore wizard With its help you can restore all ty
170. es you need to decide whether to make the program available for all users of this computer if several or only for the current one 6 Select an Installation Folder The Destination Folder page allows you to choose a folder where the program will be installed By default the installation folder will be created as C Program Files Paragon Software Paragon Hard Disk Manager 2010 To select another folder click the Change button After you have selected the required folder click the Next button to continue Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 22 sessions to install and run the program In both cases the program Do not install the program on network drives Do not use Terminal Server functionality will be limited 7 Confirm Installation On the Ready to Install the Program page click the Install button to start the installation or the Back button to return to any of the previous pages and modify the installation settings 8 Copying Files The Copying Files page shows the overall progress of the installation Click the Cancel button to abort the setup 9 Finishing the Installation The Final page reports the end of the setup process Click the Finish button to complete the wizard program uses a kernel mode hotcore driver thus the system reboot is required To accomplish online backup copy of locked partitions hard disks the to complete the installation procedure First Start To star
171. estore the data from these archives without having to run the program but by simply booting from these CD DVDs Cluster is the smallest amount of disk soace that can be allocated to hold a file All file systems Used by Windows organize hard disks based on clusters which consist of one or more Contiguous sectors The smaller the cluster size the more efficiently a disk stores information If no cluster size is soecified during formatting Windows picks defaults based on the size of the volume These defaults are selected to reduce the amount of space that is lost and the amount of fragmentation on the volume A cluster is also called an allocation unit Extended Partition is a partition type you create only on a basic MBR Master Boot Record disk Extended partition is used if you want to create more than four volumes on a disk since If may contain multiple logical drives File System Metadata The servicing structures of a file system which contain information about allocating files and directories security information etc are named the file system metadata It Is invisible for users and regular applications because its accidental modification usually makes a partition unusable Hard Disk Geometry Traditionally the usable soace of a hard disk is logically divided into cylinders cylinders are divided into tracks or heads and tracks are divided into sectors The triad of values Sectors per Track Tracks per Cylinder Amount of Cyl
172. ether with new hardware you get its drivers for different operating systems on removable media mostly CD or DVD By collecting all these drivers in one folder you can let the wizard automatically pick and install only those required for your OS recommended e Upload drivers manually If you know exactly what drivers your operating system Is lacking to successfully start up you can manually provide them for the wizard e Do not upload drivers And finally you can just refuse providing 3 party drivers E Upload drivers automatically from the provided driver repository Select this option you ve got a folder with mulige diver packages and want al required divers forthe new hama me to be installed sutomaticaly Please note only the necessary dives wil be neared to the selected OS Setect this option you know exactly what divers am egued to make the selected 05 bootable on ine new harder i De not upload drivers Select this opion you don T ward to insert Jd party divans to the selected 05 Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 266 We prefer the wizard to decide what drivers are to be installed 7 Browse for a folder with drivers for the new hardware or type in a full path to it manually Please choces a folder that contains INF files agon Sottwane programi Test_Onwers Browse 8 Apply the changes by confirming the operation The Wierd has mot appbed your
173. evertexcusive ac accessto the volume 9 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 208 Suboperation progress POETS ARE GROUP Restore partition or disk C K ParaGon Hork time 00 00 55 Tine to finishO00 00 26 Done S21 HB Read 532 MB 35 2 MB s All 8 71 GB Hrite 532 MB 53 2 MB s Overall progress ee O Loading Paragon Engine Gopyright Copyright 1388 2008 Paragon Technologie GabH All rights reserved Please walt Universal File Systes Driver initialization Getting partitions info Flushing sustes buffers please walt eee eee eee Restore Primary partition disk 0 from file G arc_sustes arc_sustena PEF Data writing To avoid data loss Please do not reset or turn off the computer Operation in progress press ESC or Ctrl C to interrupt operation After completing the operation the program will automatically reboot the computer A N This operation can also be accomplished with the WinPE recovery amp environment Copying of data from the corrupted system disk to another hard disk To retrieve valuable information from your hard disk and copy it to another hard disk when the system fails to boot please do the following 1 Connect the second hard disk to the computer 2 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Recovery Media Bui
174. exists Partition type Primary Extended Logical File system type Size Amount of used and unused free space Start End cylinder Start End head Start End sector Free size in sectors bytes Active Inactive attribute Hidden Unhidden attribute You may customize outlook of the Partition List by clicking on the arrow icon on the top right side of the panel Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 55 Q Please select properties to display Faase select geonerties you would lite to displsy in the Disks and Partitions view Pia Size pentog FS Sire kagon eed f ectors Start secton End sectors Sat CHS her End CHSjhex 7 S A SS Te Ede system L I i 1 Volume labe Parthian tre Se Lee I Pree sectors Free E Ss A ha E 736 i w E ie E F 4 i ias per Cuse i in TI wi i By marking a checkbox opposite the required item you can choose whether to display it or not Besides you can change its order by pressing the Move up or Move down buttons If you don t need the Disk Map please click the shown below icon to disable it 00h 235F 8 FRR 0 20 21 SD 61 1 ne el ata ata te e ae ak aed a Anir repr P 2a5FE800h JETFEFFPR 304D 61 15 FEFE 54 1E 600 JETFEFFRR O 20 21 FEF 1E Properties Bar The Properties Bar provides information on the selected at the moment partition hard disk For a hard disk e Model Ser
175. f a dynamic disk contains several simple volumes the program enables to choose the number of primary partitions The rest of them if any will automatically be converted to logical disks within the Extended partition TA Convert dynamic hand dise to basic ff the disc has mone than four smote volumes the ira three of them wi become pimay partitions and the rest wil be converted to the logical ones The hard disk she conver Fasic Had Msk 3 VMware VMware Virtual 5S SCSI Disk Dev y New Volume H 199 6GA NTF i Tl ball F The resuiing basic hard dak can have no more than 1 pemary partitions Please select how many pimay partitions the basic disk should have Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 126 AN without extension Converting GPT to Basic MBR The program allows you to convert a basic or a dynamic GPT disk containing simple volumes into a basic MBR disk while keeping its contents intact In order to convert a basic or a dynamic GPT disk into a basic MBR disk you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a basic or a dynamic GPT disk containing simple volumes on the Disk Map 2 Call the Convert to Basic MBR Hard Disk dialog selecting in the Main Menu Hard Disk gt Convert to Basic MBR Hard Disk 3 Set the required number of primary partitions if necessary According to the DOS partitioning scheme a hard disk can have up fo four Primary partitions If there is an Exte
176. fy a path for additional divers C Program Files VMware VMware Workstation windows isa Browse Please prowde a path io VM Tools Additions ISO image eg windows iso for VMware Tools to use when a virtual device diver ig required H you kansier Vilindews XP to a Vivhware SCSI chek E should be done anyway It s strongly recommended fo provide a path to VM Tools Additions ISO image if you transfer Windows XP to a VMware SCSI disk otherwise your system won t boot after the operation 7 The wizard will provide a detailed report on successful accomplishment of the operation You can save it by clicking the appropriate button Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 251 Operations details 500 GB disk 0 has been successiuly transfered io a VMware VWorctalion virtual disk fie 500 GB in sira and placed to Cowelek vmdk The folowing OSes have been successfully adusted to the required virtual hardware Microsoft Windows 7x86 on pimay partition 0 8 Now you can connect the resulted virtual disk to your virtual machine Your system has been virtualized You need to close the program to unlock the virtual disk Otherwise you won t AN be able to connect it to a virtual machine Virtualizing system from its backup image P2V Let s assume that your system has been corrupted as a result of a hardware failure You realize it s quite obsolete and it s next to impossible to replace the damaged har
177. g Language manual Extra Functionality This chapter describes the supplementary functionality available in the program View Partition Hard Disk Properties The program enables to obtain in depth information on the properties of hard disks and partitions Besides the general information such as capacity used space or file system type it provides the possibility to get info on hard disk geometry cluster size exact partition location etc There are several ways to get properties on a partition hard disk Launcher 1 Choose a partition hard disk on the Disk Map then select in the Main Menu Partition Hard Disk gt Properties 2 Call the popup menu for the selected partition hard disk right click of the mouse button on the Disk Map then select the menu item Properties General File System info Advanced d Local Disk C 536 868 914 548 Bytes 1 048 571 939 Sedos gt 53GB 1 10 016 497 664 Bytes 19 563 472 Sectors 690 6 GB 9 526 852 317 184 Bytes 1 029 008 432 Sectors In the opened dialog information will be grouped according to Its properties thus by clicking tabs you can get information you need Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 138 Volume Explorer Volume Explorer is a special tool to browse and export contents of the local mounted Unmounted volumes formatted to FAT16 FAT32 NTFS Ext2FS Ext3FS ReiserFS file systems Besides it enables to access Para
178. g by clicking the appropriate button Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 9 Hama l Site Date a He teork Cone fil Xj Remote location mapping network share mi Map to dive lster EE gt Make paman connection Connect as user Click the standard browse button to browse for the required network share or manually enter a path to it Define a letter from the pull down list of available drive letters Click the Connect as user button at the foot of the dialog page to specify a user name and password to access the selected network share if necessary A N You can also map a network disk with Network Configurator e Choose the required archive in the browser like window The Archive File Details section displays a short description of the selected image EZ Mara Sie Date a Ee LEJ App ars n yi k i FF mac CU Dra E3 PARMG JN a E Boot Net Backup Storage sersr wens eochange Z fe are AAN STS WALZ 23721 AM BF 21 6 KE 5 a 2008 a7 24 Al t IGE 5 28 2008 2 37 10 4M arc 2080810 2150968 0000p pim 17 1 KE 5 28 2008 2 37 07 AM Archive Fle Deteds Comment Backup of My Hard Diak Type Basic Hard Disk Driva Total size 40GB Fie demt 200500 103 150S62 arc_ 2605081031 5056s PBF 6 The What to Restore page displays detailed informati
179. g scheme developed fo lift restrictions of the old MBR GPT disks are now supported by Windows Vista 7 Server 2008 Mac OS X and Linux Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved Supported Virtual Machines Microsoft Virtual PC Microsoft Virtual Server Microsoft Hyper V VMware Workstation VMware Fusion VMware ESX Server For Connect VD only MS Windows Vista 7 backup XenServer vhd only Supported File Systems A Full read write access to FAT16 FAT32 partitions Full read write access to NTFS Basic and all five types of Dynamic Disks under Windows 95 98 ME Linux and PTS DOS Compressed NTFS files are also supported Full read write access to Ext2FS Ext3FS Ext4FS partitions under all versions of Windows DOS 5 0 and later Limited read write access to Apple HFS partitions Unfortunately support of non Roman characters for the HFS file system is unavailable at the moment The company is about to implement it in the nearest future Supported Media Support of both MBR and GPT hard disks up to 1 5 TB tested IDE SCSI and SATA hard disks CD R CD RW DVD R DVD R DVD RW DVD RW DVD R DVD R double layer and also Blu ray discs FireWire i e IEEEI394 USB 1 0 USB 2 0 hard disks PC card storage devices MBR and GPT flash memory etc Getting Started In this chapter you will find all the information necessary to get the product ready to use Copyright 1994 2010 Para
180. g to a SCSI virtual disk of VMware Workstation or VMware ESX Server for different versions of OS different controller drivers will be installed VMware however cannot emulate different hardware for each operating system of one virtual machine To tackle this Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 36 issue please Use our P2P Adjust Wizard to install the LSI Logic driver under Windows 2000 Windows XP then select the LSI SCSI controller for your virtual machine Paragon Hot Processing amp Volume Shadow Copy Service Offline versus Online Data Processing In the course of time there have been developed various methods of data processing Despite different work concept all of them can be divided into two principal groups offline cold and online hot data processing techniques As the name infers offline data processing can only be accomplished when the data is in consistent state the operating system and all the applications are completely shut down Actually it is the most preferable way of image creation or data cloning since software can obtain an exclusive right to process data that guaranties high level of operating efficiency However the offline data processing is absolutely out of question when dealing with 24 7 production environments In contrast online data processing enables to create a consistent snapshot even as the data is currently modified It is particularly useful for systems with high a
181. gon Software Group All rights reserved Distribution Paragon Hard Disk Manager 2010 is distributed in two ways e Boxed package from Paragon Technology GmbH and resellers e Downloadable package over the Internet at the company s web site Distributive CD The boxed package includes a distributive CD that is in fact a bootable Linux DOS recovery environment with auto run of the Windows installation thus it can be used as a ready made solution see Booting from the Linux DOS Recovery Media But if you re going to run the Windows components you need to install them first see Installation If you want to download an update upgrade of the product it will be in form of the downloadable installation package as described in Online Distribution web service You will get the required download link after the product has The WinPE recovery environment can only be obtained through the company s been purchased Online Distribution Hard Disk Manager 2010 purchased over the Internet will be in form of an MSI package After installing the product you can launch the Recovery Media Builder to build the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery media web service You will get the required download link after the product has The WinPE recovery environment can only be obtained through the company s been purchased Registration Paragon Technology GmbH provides a wide range of online services through its web portal www oaragon software com support
182. gon backups as regular folders to explorer their contents or to retrieve certain files Launcher To launch the Volume Explorer you should click Disk View tab in the Explorer Bar and then choose Volume Explorer Name Size Modified GICD OVD Drives ie GQ Hard Disks i E E 1 VMware VMware Vitual S SCSI Desk Dew 500 GB E 2 VMware Vidware Virtual 5 SCSI Desk Devi 10 GB 4 GF 1 Primary FAT32 E 34GB 2 Primary NTFS F 2 4 GB nes inf 9 2 0009 4 19 34 AM mation 9 2 2009 4 24 46 AM 7 14 G5 505 8 MB E E 3 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Desk Devi 30 GB 4 VMware Viware Virtual SCS Disk Devi GPT Disk Call the popup menu for the selected file folder right click of the mouse button to export it fo some other location local or network drive etc m i DVO RW Drive D E E Local Desk E Network Places H Local Desk F E E Archives G E E New Volume H Available operation scenarios e Restoring separate files and folders from a backup File Transfer Wizard File Transfer Wizard is designed to make such operations as copying of separate files directories or burning of them to CD DVD as easy and convenient as possible It may be of particular use in case Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 139 of a system malfunction caused either by a virus attack or files corruption in order to get the system
183. graphical flags to indicate crucial properties FLAG FUNCTIONALITY E Partition archive F File archive E MBR archive i System archive y Encrypted archive Compressed archive Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved Es Complex archive Filtered archive Differential archive Incremental archive ke File increment to a partition archive To easily manage images in the Archive Database the program provides the following functionality BUTTON FUNCTIONALITY S Refresh the contents of the database EE Show only existing archives Le Add the selected archive to the database g Delete the selected archive from the database Besides you may filter backup archives to decide whether to show only file partition or hard disk archives To do that please select the required filter in the left top corner of the page Browse for Archive Pleace select an achive bo rechore Source Obpect 6 09 10 Master Boot Reco BO0G35 Master Boot Reco J 20 05 2008 160643 Fileefevel Archive J 20 05 2006 160548 Filevel Archive ks 14 12 2007 200219 Master Boot Reco By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 78 Please select an archive to restore Lock in 2 Local Disk C d Fxg Nama Sine Date E Local Cisk C 92 2003 221 21 AM SERB 9 2 2
184. greement you will see the Universal Application Launcher Select the Restore Wizard 4 On the Restore Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 5 On the Browse for Archive page choose the required archive in the browser like window The Archive File Details section displays a short description of the selected image ET 7 Th TT 7 Dia aie L a mg0_310708_072009875 PBF 227KB 7 30 2008 3 20 10 PM E NT iebGd 16 4 0 Adew 2367 18 Seb FeSs2 20083 1070 7 30 2008 2 52 28 PM mg_0_310708_078228187 P BF 227KB 7 30 2008 3 52 28 PM _1_ 310 AR_07522819 7 PBF PGR 7 30 2008 3 5541 PM mg_2_310708_073228187 P BF 1268 7 30 2008 3 5746 PM Nama Local Disk Comani No comment is avaiable Vokrne label ViiruxXP Fle system NTFS Total sire 29GB Used spaca 1 968 Free sace 1020 7 MB Fila 1 Fach OfaSd2 20083 1007S 228187 eng_1_310708_O78229 187 PBF 6 On the next page specify what you need to extract from the backup by marking checkboxes next to the required data items At the right lower corner of the window you can see the resulted amount of the selected data Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved Chek the check bi next to any fie or folder you want to restore from mwe Oy Ste s as E loca Disk Parton 29Gb F EA and Settings f E A hers E Defout User 4 Gel LocalService amp Gel hwek Service sF ES User f E A
185. gs To activate the advance mode you need to mark the appropriate option at the foot of the page Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved Name Local Disk C Volume labeli No label Fie system NTFS Total ere 4999 GE Used space 85GB Free space 491 4 GE 5 On the Backup Destination page select where you want to place your backup image There are several ways the Wizard can store your data Fiese select how would you like to save the achive Save datato the Backup Capsule Save data to physical partitions Save data to FTP locations Bum the dats to CO or OVD 6 Edit the archive name if necessary Fiesse speciy the archive mame Archive name wil be used as a sub oider where backup data fies wil be stoned Archive mame arc 0305090 71001085 Estimated archive size 4468 Spent malabis on backup destination 33 GB Space available on backup destination if the archive size exceeds the Please take into account values of the parameters Estimated archive size and available space another drive needs to be selected 7 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Pease enter a short comment to descnbe the archive 8 Choose whether to accomplish the operation immediately set a time table for it or generate a script 9 On the Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process Copyright
186. h 1 2264 1 0x0000000130 eb 08 al b 07 eb 03 al b5 07 3 ei i T pla Oxtoooogo14o 0 ac 3c 00 74 09 bb OF 00 bd Oe cd wwaafeectins 1 Ox0000000150 10 F eb fd 26 c9 ed 64 eb 00 24 02 e 8 edoey Esde Ae oxgooooo0i n 6e 76 61 6c 69 64 20 70 61 72 74 69 KInvalid parti 0x0000000170 20 74 61 62 6c 65 00 45 72 72 6f 72 tion table Error Oxfoonogo1eo 20 c f 64 69 e 67 20 f 70 65 72 61 74 69 loading operati Ox 000000190 79 73 74 65 d 00 dd 69 73 73 69 be ng syster Hissin ox0000000140 amp 70 65 72 61 74 69 be 67 20 73 7973 74 g operating syst Ox00000001BO0 00 63 7b 9a bb c2 83 1d 00 00 80 20 en c nd Ox00000001CO fe 00 08 00 00 00 0 7E Je OO 1 Oxf ooooo01bo io 00 60 00 OO 00 0x00000001E0 00 00 00 00 OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO Ox00000OOIFO 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 55 sa Careless use of the Edit Sectors function may result in the irreversible data corruption Send Log Files The program enables to simplify the procedure of sending support requests to the Paragon Support Team In case of having difficulties with handling the program you with the help of this very function can address the company support engineers and provide them with all the information they need such as the disk layout performed operations etc in order to tackle the encountered problem Information of that kind
187. hard disk Select a hard disk if several where all data of the source disk will be copied fo Selec a target hard disk Al dats from the source hard disk will be copied there During copy operation target disk content wil be deleted Basic Hard Disk 0 ia Sei Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dew Basic Hard Disk VMware Viware Virtual SCSI Disk Dev Q Local Disk C SIGE NIFS e Copy parameters The wizard enables to specify the following options Choose copy options that sult best your task Copy options HDD raw copy Partin raw copy Perfo incremental copy Change masks for files to ecclude fram copy Remove fret blocks between partitions Copy data and resize partitions proportionally Mark the checkbox to copy the hand disk in the sectordyseectarmode thus ignoring its D information structure 2 9 unallocated space or unused sector of existing partions wil be processed as wed This can help to avoid problems with hedden data created by certain Sopkcations or the system administrator However E wil take more time to accomplish the Copy options HDD raw copy to copy the hard disk in the sector by sector mode thus ignoring its information structure e g unallocated space or unused sectors of existing partitions will be processed as well This can help to avoid problems with hidden data created by certain applications or the system administrator However it will fake more time to accomplish the operation Par
188. hat the bulk of if won t work anyway The best way out is to virtualize your old system But before you start please make sure the following conditions are met e Your hard disk has enough free space fo store a virtual image of your Windows depends on the system e You ve got one of the supported virtualization software To make a virtual disk out of your current system please do the following Launcher 1 Click the P2V Copy item of the Wizards menu any of the ways described earlier can also be used here 2 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Select either an entire hard disk or only the system partition you want to make a virtual disk of Selected object Local Disk C Basic Hard Disk t Local Disk C Bm IGB NTFS ooo Basic Hard Disk 1 a Local Disk E E g Local Di a a i g Unal 34GB FAT32 24 G8 NTFS TAG dric It s pretty enough to select the system partition only to make your Windows A start up in a virtual environment However that doesn t guarantee all your applications will work as they can be installed on the other partitions of the disk 4 Choose your virtualization software vendor and a number of additional parameters including e Type ofthe virtual disk You can either create an IDE or a SCSI virtual disk relevant for VMware only e Create a split disk You can choose whether to automatically cut the resulted virtual image to files of 2
189. he following steps Launcher 1 Make sure the virtual mode of execution is enabled 2 Carry out with the program all operations you need to schedule 3 Call the Save to Scheduler dialog in the Main Menu Tools gt Save to Scheduler Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 135 A E es Schedule virtual operations _ All vriuel operations you have made wi be saved to the scheduler No operations wall be ape Task name Scheduled Task Please apecty how and when would you like to perform ihe task Shutdown sysiem after canying out the tasks Run the lask on 6027005 at 1200 AM Every 1 davis Do mot nun the task alter Discard al operations on cose Na 4 Inthe opened dialog enter the required task name and specify the task timetable 5 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation A This command is unavailable if there are no operations on the List of Pending Operations Scripting The program actions can also be represented in form of a script The script describes the appropriate operation with macro language commands There is an interpreter utility SCRIPTS exe which is included in the program installation package This utility works in the unattended mode which enables to automate operations Startup You have no need to write a script since the program has a convenient interface for such a task In order to generate a script on the base of the en
190. he interrupted operation thus reviving the corrupted partition A N It is strongly recommended to enable this option Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 58 Backup Image Options O Edit settings i i ile a miee at a Backup image options mi ri I pm P Loy and baceoun optics LOM arcrve miey mafra m pi pe je y paji eee korkat Gar ee al St ee Choose this option to alow writing of speciic date that wil later be used during Pes 238 24 i i restore fo check the encnive iniegrty f can sow down ine backup opetan uring backup options 3 m Sat image fle names automabcaly thee pio Em fr giua ly ElI m E Operation desandency cobons Choose this option fo automabcalhy nama files in comple archive VWitual mode opbors x ree DRET CONG an ODDO Compression kia Dop Backup exclude options rie Backup exclude ootions Fle Backup include options Good compression Provides average speed with the reasonable image ere Log fies opbors ioe options homa corperson B Pe a syth arn E ii ao es toe rey uae Of ia on ia anaba atra fhe aCe to parea hes AA Madmum spit size 4000 MB This section contains a set of options that will be taken into account during backup restore operations e Control archive integrity Mark the checkbox to guarantee that all backup images created with the program are 100 percent flawless If you decided not to control the archive integrity
191. he same hard drive There are five types of dynamic volumes simple uses free soace from a single disk soanned created from free disk soace that is linked together from multiple disks striped a volume the data of which Is interleaved across two or more physical disks mirrored a fault tolerant volume the data of which is duplicated on two physical disks and RAID 5 volumes a fault tolerant volume the data of which is striped across an array of three or more disks With dynamic storage you can perform disk and volume management without the need to restart Windows Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 38 Limitations e Dynamic disks are not supported on portable computers e Dynamic disks are not supported on Windows XP Home Edition based computers e You cannot create mirrored volumes or RAID 5 volumes on Windows XP Home Edition Windows XP Professional or Windows XP 64 Bit Edition based computers Thus the dynamic disk is a new way of looking at hard disk configuration Dynamic disks offer you more management flexibility without the partition limitation of basic disks Dynamic disks can contain an unlimited number of volumes but they cannot contain partitions or logical drives Dynamic storage can be particularly beneficial for large scale businesses when dealing with many physical hard disks involving complex setup GPT versus MBR GUID Partition Table GPT is the next generation of a hard disk
192. hem or the last one F you sich the Emal otona option off ine operations wil ba camed out mmadatah i y Operation dependency options Mitua mode opbors Cose progress dialog automaticaly ma System Comvenon oping Set this option on to automaticaly close the progress dialog after commiting the Cop Backup exciude options changes Fie Backup exclude options Fie Backup include options Log fies opbons Whipe opioa In this section you may configure the virtual mode e Allow virtual mode Mark the checkbox to enable the virtual mode It is an effective way of protection from any troubles since no operation will be executed until confirmation thus giving you a second chance to weigh all pros and cons of this or that particular operation A N We strongly recommend you to enable this mode e Close progress dialog automatically Mark the checkbox to automatically close the progress dialog after accomplishing operations Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 68 File System Conversion Options il O Edit setting EF General options aw epee P l aciktp imagi opti oS File system conversion options on pan ag mc gm my an e are F as ee a is ami ie Ke Loopy and bachup optics JERN A UTE Pns Pa m oe oe E T l m I ur i m5 sla Ea r a D q BL me 5 4 Carada Tuana x Ep ee Ci i ay ro are oe a CEAT ERETI es Conh n Ha rhe Deg pz NTFS F PAL rA Jz et
193. hive name wil be used as a subolder where backup data fies wil be stored Archive location Gc 0309031113123547 ry 4 F Sze Date 5 Edit the archive name if necessary Fiesse speciy the archive name Archive name wil be used os a subdoider where backup data fies wil be stored Archive details Archive name ere 03050907 1001085 Estimated archive size jA GB Spent avedeble on backup destination 38 GB A Please take into account values of the parameters Estimated archive size and Space available on backup destination if the archive size exceeds the available space another drive needs to be selected 6 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Please enter a short comment to deecnbe the archive fy Ho comment 7 Seta timetable for the operation Please specify how and when would you lke to perom the task Generate unique names for scheduled backups Run the task on 1220S a 1200 4AM Ci 1 week on y Monday Friday F Wednesday Sunday Thursday De not run the task after Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 176 A N To know more on the subject please consult the Task Scheduling chapter 8 On the Cyclic backup type page choose the way of creating a cyclic backup There ane several tyoes of the cyclic backup the Vizard can perform Piem choose the ane you would lice io camry out Cyce Backup Type Base type Every imag
194. i GA H i Choose ihis option to maka the Progra io Sac to Cu cemure Mesa Sigs aai Fla Backup exclude options ume whan converting fie systems le Backup UG DOO LOJ Tas Opn nipe options T F OF E m This section contains a set of options that will be taken into account when converting FAT and NTFS file systems By default the program takes locale regional settings from the system Problems might occur however because of different standards for file names and file time stamps Created Modified and Last Access Time of NTFS and FATxx file systems To tackle problems of that kind you can manually set e Time zone to use during the convert operation NTFS keeps file timestamps in GMT Greenwich Mean Time while FAT uses a fixed local date and time The program takes proper account of these differences and enables to adjust timestamp values An incorrectly chosen time zone might lead to inability to launch certain software e Language for file names to use during the convert operation NTFS stores file names in Unicode while FAT FAT32 uses ANSI to save short file names also called the DOS aliases The codepage information is required for the correct conversion of non English file names from Unicode to ANSI and vice versa An incorrectly chosen codepage will certainly result in corruption of non English file names e Request confirmation of settings before NTFS lt gt FAT FAT32 conversion Mark the checkbox to automatically d
195. ial number e Type of hard disk basic or dynamic e Total size in GB e Information on geometry of the disk amount of sectors per track heads and cylinders For a partition e Drive letter assigned to the disk Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 56 e Volume label if available e Type of the logical disk e File system represented by the color of the graph and the selected bar e Total size used soace and free space in GB or MB Besides you can modify practically any partition property by clicking on the required value Legend Bar The Legend Bar explains the color scheme used for disk and partition presentation You can hide or show the bar with the appropriate Main Menu item View gt Disk Map Legend When it is activated It can be found at the bottom of the Explorer Bar The program distinguishes between the following types of known file systems FAT16 32 NTFS Linux Ext2 3 4 Linux ReiserFS Apple HFS Status Bar This is the bottom part of the main window The Status Bar displays menu hints for each item the cursor points to The user can hide or show the bar with the appropriate Main Menu item View gt Status Bar Settings Overview The Settings dialog is available from the Main Menu Tools gt Settings All the settings are grouped into several sections which functions are described in the following paragraphs The list of sections is placed on the left sid
196. ike window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Lookin f Archives G ax g Name Sze Date E Archives G H jo we_disk2 9 2 2009 5 25 00 AM E ai arc_doc 92 2008 S542 AM a arc_images 9 3 2009 3 57 21 AM 7 Sl i rc system OOOO 9 2 2009 2 41 04 AM LSGE S242009 237 32 AM l Local Disk C My system backup NTFS Total size 499 9689 568 Free space 491 4 G8 G aec_system arc_system PF Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 197 A To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter 4 On the Where to Restore page specify a hard disk then one of its partitions to restore the image to if several in your computer By default the program offers to restore the archive exactly where it belongs That s what we actually need Fiesse select a place you would ike to restore the archive to Note that F you select an edeting hard disk or partition Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev All contents on the partition selected for restoring purposes will be deleted A N during the operation 5 On the Restore Results page you can see the resulted disk layout Besides there s the possibility to change size of the partition and its location if necessary as well as assign a particular drive letter Your hard disk after the changes Basic
197. ill take info account exclude filfers set in the Settings dialog If you need to change them please mark the checkbox and specify additional filters on the next page of the wizard e Copy without free space blocks to arrange partitions one after another Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 79 e Resize proportionally to proportionally change the size of partitions keeping their relative order intact To do that press the Pause button to continue execution press Start To interrupt the operation press the Cancel button Result After the operation is completed you receive a fully functional duplicate of the existing hard disk To make a Win2K operating system bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Cloning Partitions You can duplicate partitions to protect oneself from downtime in case of a system malfunction or for cloning sample partitions The program enables to duplicate all partition data including files the exact structure of directories and file system metadata location of files security information access quotas etc The Copy Partition Wizard will helo you copy a partition of any file system To minimize the possibility of making any mistake the wizard provides auxiliary information on every single option Moreover you can get an in depth description to any setting control or field of the wizard just by clicking the hint button and the
198. imary NTFS 56 6 Gb 109 Gb 45 7 Gb No label 6 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 7 On the What to back up page select your Mac hard disk Model VMware Virtual IDE Hard Drive Size 112 Gb Size Used Volume label A j Primary Appl HFS 549Gb 14 27 Gb leopard No 3 8 Primary NTFS 56 6 Gb 10 9 Gb Mo Label Yes 8 On the Backup Destination page select the Save data to any local drive or a network share option Please select how would you like to save the archive Save data to any local drives or a network share Choose this option if you want to save your data to local mounted or physical partition to USB or FireWare external drives and io a mounted network share You will be prompted to choose a loc ation you want io save ihe archive to Burn data to CD DVD Choose this option if you want the Wizard to burn the archive to CO or DVD You will be prompted t choose a CD or DVD RW drive 9 Select an external USB drive as a backup destination Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 162 Specify image file to create eo ic TREC YCLE BIN ia Trashes RECYCLER O System Volume Information Rename FEl New fokber F 7 Delete FS Filetype 10 Edit the archive name If necessary Backup destination Arhive name Space available on destination 34 8Gb Approximate archive sie 17 5 Gb Please take into accoun
199. in most cases To activate the advance mode you need to click the More options button at the foot of the dialog page so you will be able to define image opins J Enable hot procesery Masrosoft Volume Shadow Copy Semice Spi image upto 2000 ME J Set image fle names sulomaticaly Partition raw processing Ji Skip OS pudia fies Skip archive iis stored in archive libracy Ne a Fewer options e Whether the operation will be performed without rebooting the system The program needs to reboot the system in order to have exclusive access to processing data In a Windows environment this is difficult to achieve because even when all the other applications are closed the system service programs are still running However there is a way to avoid rebooting The mode of processing the backup operation without rebooting is named Hot Processing You can also define specific parameters for the Hot Processing mode e Whether the archive will be split if yes you can set the maximum size for the archive files A Splitting images enables to tackle problems caused by a maximum file size limitation of some file systems e Whether image file names will be set automatically in complex archives e Whether the OS auxiliary files pagefile sys hyberfil sys will be included in the backup image e Whether the selected partition will be copied in the sector to sector mode including unused sectors as well e Whether backup imag
200. inders is usually named the Hard Disk Geometry or C H S geometry Tracks and cylinders are enumerated from 0 while sectors are enumerated from 1 These disk parameters play an essential role in the DOS Partitioning scheme Modern hardware uses an advanced scheme for the linear addressing of sectors which assumes that all on disk sectors are continuously enumerated from 0 To allow backward compatibility with older standards modern hard disks can additionally emulate the C H S geometry Hidden Partition The concept of a hidden partition was introduced in the IBM OS 2 Boot Manager By default an operating system does not mount a hidden partition thus preventing access to its contents A method of hiding a partition consists in changing the partition ID value saved in the Partition Table This is achieved by XOR ing the partition ID with a 0x10 hexadecimal value Master File Table MFT is a relational database that consists of rows of file records and columns of file attributes If contains at least one entry for every file on an NTFS volume including the MFT itself MFT is similar to a FAT table in a FAT file system MBR amp 1st track of the hard disk is the Oth sector of the disk MBR Master Boot Record contains important information about the disk layout The used partitioning scheme The starting records of the Partition Table Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 286 The
201. ine il Memory 1024 MB fp Edit virtual machine settings medHard Disk SCSI 1668 CD DVD IDE Auto detect E Enable ACE features What is ACE H Foppe Auto detect FelNetwork Adapter NAT QUSE Controler Present Tj Card Auto detect Eel Display Auto detect PrportEN g 1 2 Please make sure its guest OS is the same as on your virtual disk otherwise you may face hardware incompatibility problems Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 274 Windows Vista TEST Version Workstation 6 5 virtual machine Lk Lo acne settings fh Edit virtual machine setings G Enable ACE features whatis AC 4 In the opened dialog select Hard Disk as the required hardware type to add Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 275 What type of hardware do you want to instal 7 Click Finish to complete the operation Most likely you will be asked to convert your virtual disk to a new format You can update your disks since this procedure involves change of a version only nothing else To know more on the subject please consult the Known Issues chapter 8 That s all You can now launch the virtual machine Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 276 Windows Vista TEST State Powered off Version Workstation 6 5 virtual machine Commands b D Edit virtual madi settings E Enable ACE features Whatis ACE
202. ing systems and software It is known that Windows NT 2000 and XP store its value in the database of assigned drive letters Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 28 7 A partition s serial number is stored in its boot sector in FAT16 FAT32 and NFIS file systems Its value is assigned when the partition is formatted It does not play an important role for most operating systems and software as well Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved
203. into account exclude filters set in the Settings dialog There are several ways the Viirard can sore your data Please select how would you like to save the archive Save data to the Backup Capsule Save datato FTP locations Burn the data to CD or DVD 5 Set up parameters for the required FIP location Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved A 10 159 Selec a folder where archive should be placed and specify archive name Archive name wil be used as a subfolder where backup data files will be stored Archive location fip master peragon solhware com backup Ed EN Name Paragon FIP Login upisad Password rr J Remember password Pret 21 Use Active Hoda Archive location Type in a full path to the required FTP location Name Set a name for the FTP server optional Login Enter a login to access the FTP server Password Enter a password to access the FIP server Click Remember password to save it next time you back up to this location Port Specify the required port 21 by default and click Use Active Mode if necessary When ready click the arrow button opposite the archive location field to check out you ve got access to the FTP location You need to check out yourself Windows Firewall or programs of this kind let our program work with the required port 21 by default If yes you ll get a new item on the list named after the selected FTP location By clicking the icon y
204. ion 9 So if everything is OK you ve got to have by this moment Windows XP successfully installed Your Windows Vista however is still non bootable To fix this issue you need to launch the Boot Manager Setup wizard To do that please install our program once again but this time in Windows XP to activate Boot Manager A To avoid double installation please use our WinPE recovery environment to activate Boot Manager 10 Click Boot Management and then select Boot Manager in the Express Launcher 11 Set up the Boot Manager wizard The most relevant option here is the possibility to hide other primary partitions except the one selected to boot and it is by all means should be activated to make Windows Vista and Windows XP unaware of each other The rest of the parameters offered by default will do in our case so just complete the wizard and it will automatically find the two operating systems and update the MBR 7 Timeout for booting last used configuration 15 seconds IH Hidden mode Tina to display the Boot Manacer status massage 15 seconds Choose a hot key for startup BootManager FI 12 Now restart the computer to make sure you have got a dual boot system Traditional way This scenario implies that operating systems will be installed on different partitions to provide better security and system independence Express Launcher Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 239 Click Switch to
205. irtual operation on the List of Pending Operations Cancel the last undo virtual operation on the List of Pending Operations a Display the List of Pending Operations wy Launch the real execution of virtual operations Cancel all virtual operations on the List of Pending Operations Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 49 Virtual mode is an effective way of protection from any troubles since no operations will be executed until clicking the Apply button for confirmation thus giving a second chance to weigh all pros and cons of this or that particular operation The program politely reminds the user that there are i unsaved changes by showing the following window O There are unsaved changes Please ure the Y Apply command to come the changes and the x Discard command lo pemanently undo the charges fou can wew the changes heton via the View Changes command and lemporamy Undo on redo the operation by means of the Undo and Redo commands Common Tasks Bar The Common Tasks Bar is located on the left side of the main window It is intended for easy access to the program s wizards The bar contains several tabs named Basic Partitioning Tasks Advanced Partitioning Tasks Copy Tasks Backup Tasks Virtualization Tasks Tools and News and Documentation Each of these contains a separate button bar which can be folded by clicking it Basic Partitioning Tasks fe
206. is program which BE File Transfer Hizard will start now 2 Boot Corrector Upon the start please El the drive and one of W Start the command line its partitions or its free Reboot the computer space Then activate the Partition pull down menu and select one of the partitioning operations Booting from the WinPE Recovery Media The WinPE recovery environment can be a real alternative to the Linux DOS recovery environment Providing nearly the same level of functionality it offers an excellent hardware support and the same interface as the Windows version does Startup To start working with the WinPE recovery environment please take the following steps 1 Start up the computer from our WinPE recovery media Recovery Media Builder can help you prepare the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery environment either on a CD DVD disc or a thumb drive To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Once it has been loaded you will see the License Agreement Read the agreement and then mark the appropriate checkbox to accept If you do not agree with any conditions stated there you won t be able to use the program Press Page Up and Page Down to scroll the teat End User License agreement peta eer Imma Tm h mn jy m gmim FARAGON Technologie GmiH Euas araara e SUT eee woe oe a i CEIS z i PE ae Hire Ee f eg Heinichen Sephena 3
207. isk Wizard The Copy Hard Disk Wizard is a traditional like wizard By going through its steps you configure all the necessary settings to launch the copy operation To minimize the possibility of making any mistake the wizard provides auxiliary information on every single option Moreover you can get an in depth description to any setting control or field of the wizard just by clicking the hint button and then the object you need You need at least two hard disks to carry out this operation Startup There are several ways to start the Copy Hard Disk Wizard Express Launcher e Click the Copying and Migration button and then select Hard Disk Migration Launcher e Inthe Main Menu select Wizards gt Copy Hard Disk e On the Common Tasks Bar click the Copy Hard Disk item of the Wizards menu e Inthe Toolbar click the Copy Hard Disk button Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the copy hard disk operation e The hard disk to copy Select a hard disk you want to copy Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 92 On this page you can choose a hard disk you would like to copy All partitions from this hard disk wall be copied Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev g Local Disk C 499 9G8 NTFS Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware egies Wier pt g Local Disk E a LOC Basic Hard Disk 1 var VMware Virtual 5cS10 34 GB FATA 24 GB NTFS i FI e The target
208. isplay the local settings dialog to check and modify if necessary the default parameters before launching the convert file system operation Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 69 Copy Backup Exclude Options r Bek L General options ma Exclude from Copy Backup Backup image options Pariiiomung options Copy and backup options Spec masks for fies and folders that must be excluded from copy backup ope CO DVD recording options Hot pocesang options Executable amp installations 2 fhe Run duning backup options Emal options Operation dependency options Virtual mode options Fle system conversion options Cony Backup eide ontiorna File Backup exclude onions Fle Backup include scoters Log fies options Tipa options edre Delete fiar F Modiary files 18 ftor i de Filter Panam catecory E talaia galega bak Dame filer ald Dame fiber imp Deere fier hemn islets fer In this section the program enables to specify what data should be automatically ignored during copy and sector based backup operations You can filter certain files or folders either by the manual selection or by creating masks what is more preferable Thus you will be able to effectively manage contents of your backup images or partition hard disk copies By default there are no available filters To create a filter please click the Add Category button You can use wildcards and as fil
209. istributed according to your needs Available operation scenarios e Increasing size of a system partition by taking unused space of an adjacent partition e Resizing partitions of Apple Boot Camp Redistribute Free Space Wizard The Redistribute Free Space Wizard helps to increase free soace on one partition by up taking the on disk unallocated soace and the unused space of other partitions By default the wizard adds to the target partition all existing blocks of the free space Besides you can specify partitions to act as a space donor The wizard will automatically recalculate positions of the partitions and move their contents to new locations Startup There are several ways to start the Redistribute Free Space Wizard Launcher e Inthe Main menu select Wizards gt Redistribute Free Space e On the Common Tasks bar click the Redistribute Free Space item of the Wizards menu Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 112 e Partition to enlarge Select a partition the size of which will be increased at the expense of other partitions Blocks of the free space if any will be automatically added to the target partition Choos a volume to expand Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Ds Disk Dev E W data s Z A Gapesty of the volume C is 28
210. itioning a disk will result in complete destruction of its contents Actually that is not quite so Repartitioning the drive only alters references to partitions in the Partition Table leaving all file data intact In fact there are a number of programs available to successfully recover previously deleted partitions Formatting a drive also does not guarantee data destruction Formatting procedure implies modification of the Master File Table MFT that keeps track of where file contents are stored on the disk and verification of each sector for consistency Even a low level format does not actually erase the file contents for good since they can still be resurrected from their deleted state with minimal effort by using the popular today Magnetic Force Microscopy technology The only way to make sure that all the data has been erased from a hard drive is to overwrite all on disk sectors with random patterns of ones and zeros Although this sounds complex there is an easy way to do this The process of deliberately irreversibly removing or destroying the data stored on a memory device magnetic disks flash memory drives etc is generally known as Data Sanitization A device that has been sanitized has no usable residual data and even advanced forensic tools should not ever be able to recover if thus providing maximum level of security Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 4 Scheduling The automation of op
211. iual S SCSI Disk Dev intemal Hard Di IJ Uralocated Fee space i The summary ace of fragment s to anahe 15 9 GHE Search method By default the wizard selects the fastest search method for your operating system In most cases that will do to find any accidentally deleted partition However if you re under Windows XP for instance the Conventional Search option is selected but the deleted partition you re looking for has been created with the Disk Management utility under Vista the wizard won t be able to find this partition unless you manually select the appropriate option Quick Search for Partitions Created by Vista or Later OS Moreover if the wizard still fails to find the partition you need you can select the Thorough Search option to scan every single sector in the specified search area to get the most accurate results Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 114 Choose how to look forthe deleted partitions Conventional search Thorough search To know more on the available search methods please use the context sensitive hint system e File system filter By default the wizard will search for all known file systems However by clicking on the appropriate option on the second page of the wizard you can specify only those file systems you need amp Hide file systema search options AI known fle systems FAT and FAT S2 fle systems J NTFS fle system Lr Gd and Edd file system
212. k the Partitioning button and then select Delete Partition Launcher e Inthe Main menu select Wizards gt Delete Partition e On the Common Tasks bar click the Delete Partition item of the Wizards menu Dialog Startup In order to start the operation you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Call the Delete Partition Dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it e Select in the Main Menu Partition gt Delete Partition Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 108 e Call the popup menu for the selected partition right click of the mouse button then select the menu item Delete Partition Wizard Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e Partition to delete Select a hard disk if the Computer has several hard disks and then the required partition to delete On this page you can choose a volume you would like to delete Basic Hard ask 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS isk Dew ii t data Z 217 GB NTFS Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS isk Dev fil W Local Disk 433 3 GB NTFS Basic GPT Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev fi W Unallocated 559 8 GE A You ane ebout io destroy a bootable partition A N As a result of this operation contents of the selected partition will be lost e Merge free blocks As a result of the operation you ma
213. kes it possible to organize data so that it is easy to find and manage You can set aside for instance 40 GB of a 160 GB hard drive for the OS 70 GB for storing video and another 50 GB for your favorite music collections to provide transparent data storage It is also worth mentioning to that with a hard drive properly partitioned such routine operations as files de fragmentation or consistency check will not be that annoying and time consuming any more By detaching the OS from the rest of the data you can tackle one more crucial issue in case of a system malfunction you can get the system back on track in minutes by recovering it from a backup image located on the other partition of the hard drive But that is not all drive partitioning may be used for If you are willing to play games in Windows while browsing the Internet in Linux 100 percent sure that no virus will attack your PC drive partitioning is a necessity In order to run several OSs on a single hard drive you are to create a corresponding number of partitions to effectively delineate the boundaries of each OS Data Sanitization Data security is a two sided problem It is fo be made clear that providing confidentiality implies not only information to be stored properly but also be destroyed according to certain rules The first step to protecting yourself is to know exactly which security precautions work and which do not Many people believe the misconception that repart
214. l S SCS Disk Dew Current sectors Oof 1 048 575 999 Please select sector number afe T T TE T O a ity m 0x0000000000 33 1 d0 be 00 7c Be cO fe d3 be 00 7c bf OO Sh Ds A miji Oxdooo000010 fo 3 ad 50 68 lc 06 cb fb b9 04 00 i i6 Ph Bat O 0000000020 0 7e 00 00 7c Ob OF 85 Oe 01 83 cS 10 a l OxOQ000000030 e fi cd 18 88 56 0 55 c 46 11 05 c 46 10 OD ANT V UEF amp F ox00o0000040 55 cd 13 5d 72 Of 81 fb 55 aa 75 09 An Ut x au Oxooonognoso f 74 03 fe 46 10 66 60 80 7e 10 00 74 t pF M t Ox0000000060 amp 00 00 00 ff 76 O8 68 00 OO 68 OO kih Eyy hh h ox0000000070 68 10 00 b4 42 8a 56 00 Bb fd cd 13 jh h B V dt 0x0000000080 Je eb 14 b 01 02 bb 00 7c 8a 56 00 ee oe eee ee PA Oxfoooogoosn 76 de 02 a e 03 cd 13 66 61 73 ic fe vw H n t fas p O 00000000A0 Oc 7e Of G4 Ba be b 4 B u a Oxtoo00000B0 56 00 cd 13 Sd eb 9e 81 Je fe 7d 55 Uza V Je gt p U Oxtoooogo0co e 76 00 e8 8d 00 75 17 fa b dl eb 64 dunvy u Had O 00000000D0 d e 60 e 7c 00 b eb 64 o 75 Be yed u Ox00000000E0 fb b 00 bb cd ia 66 23 c0 75 3b 66 Bi fb 54 a ol ffhusf aT ox00000000F0 32 81 9 02 01 72 2e 66 68 07 bb 00 CPAu2 a r fh Ox0000000100 O 66 68 02 00 00 66 68 08 00 00 00 66 53 66 _fh fh S O QO000000L10 53 6 68 00 00 00 00 66 68 OO 7c OO 66 SEE Eh f Oxooooogo120 l 07 ed ia 5a 32 f ea 00 7c 00 00 cd a
215. l disk iti 500 GB in size and is placed to Co welesk vmdk The following OSes have bean successfully adiusted to the required virtual harcwane Microsof Windows 7x86 on pimay partition 0 Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 257 Now your virtualized system is 100 percent bootable You need to close the program to unlock the virtual disk Otherwise you won t be able to connect it to a virtual machine Connecting a virtual disk Connect VD You ve got the option to connect a virtual disk of one of the supported types directly to our program as if It s an ordinary physical disk so opening up enormous possibilities Exchange data between your physical environment and the virtual one through Volume Explorer data import only or File Transfer Wizard data import and export The way we offer is much easier and faster as you don t need a VM shared folder the network or the slow goer drag and drop Import data from a parent virtual disk to one of its snapshots Accomplish drive partitioning create format delete move resize etc Modify partition attributes Active flag Hidden flag Volume Label etc Clone a partition or an entire hard disk Edit View sectors and many more To connect a virtual disk snapshot to our program please do the following Launcher l Zz Click the Connect a Virtual Disk item of the Hard Disk menu any of the ways described earlier can also be use
216. l for the future partition in the textual field It will later be used for the drive identification OS labels will be displayed in the Boot Manager s startup menu to help you boot the required operating system OS label Windows XF 7 The program will carry out all the necessary operations and then automatically restart the computer fo Initiate the installation process If you ve changed your mind on installing a new operating system don t insert its distributive CD but press ESC when the following message appears In sert distributive CD DVD and press any key to continue or lt Esc gt to abort the action Please make sure your BIOS is set up to boot from CD DVD All the mentioned above operations can also be accomplished with the WinPE recovery environment 8 Install Windows XP on the newly created partition We won t go into details as for its installation as you can find all the necessary information in documentation that comes with the product However to avoid any problems we consider it necessary to draw your attention on the following issues Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 238 You need a bootable distributive CD of Windows XP to install it To automatically start your computer from this CD make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD first or press F12 during startup to select a bootable device Do not forget to select the newly created partition as destinat
217. labels wil be displayed in the Boot Managers slartup menu to help you boot the required operating system OS labet Windows 7 Result As the final step the wizard will offer you to insert a distributive CD DVD of the new operating system and restart the computer to launch the installation procedure The program will update your MBR so most likely you won t be able to start up A N any of the previously installed operating systems Please launch the Boot Manager Setup Wizard after the installation has been completed to fix this issue Available operation scenarios e Creating Dual Boot Systems Moving Resizing Partition The Move Resize Partition function allows you to resize or change location of any partition without destroying its data In order to move resize a partition you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Call the Move Resize Partition dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it e Select in the Main menu Partition gt Move Resize Partition e On the Explorer bar click on the current total size value e Call the popup menu for the selected partition right click of the mouse button on the Disk Map or on the Partition List then select the menu item Move Resize Partition 3 Define parameters of the operation Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 118 e e g Are you sure you wami to move resize system volu
218. lder can help you prepare the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery environment either on a CD DVD disc or a thumb drive To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 3 In the boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment more preferable or Safe Mode to use the PTS DOS recovery environment in case you ve got problems with Linux Moreover you ve got the option to boot into the Low Graphics Safe Mode PTS DOS safe mode to cope with a serious hardware incompatibility In this case only the minimal set of drivers will be included like hard disk monitor and keyboard drivers This mode has simple graphics and a simple menu Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 209 d Safe Hode d Lou Graphics Safe Mode Floppy disk Hard disk B MER Find OSes on your hard disks By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second A N idle period 4 In the Linux launch menu select the File Transfer Wizard You can find the same wizard in PTS DOS as well a A You can create delete and format hard disk Paragon Hard Disk Manager partitions using Paragon Hard Disk Manager which will stan now Upon the gan please select the drive and one of its partitions or its ree space Then activate the Partition pull down menu and select one of One Button Copy Wizard the partitioning operations
219. lds you back from it is a lot of virtual disks for MS Virtual PC which cannot be used with VMware Workstation Don t worry we can help you out Before you start please make sure you ve got enough free space to A N accomplish the operation To make a virtual disk of one vendor out of an existing virtual disk of another vendor please do the following Launcher 1 Connect the required virtual disk to our program 2 Complete the P2V Copy Wizard 3 As a result you ll get two virtual disks containing the same virtual environment but of different vendors You can now delete the original to release some free space Making system bootable on different hardware P2P Adjust OS Let s assume you had to migrate to a new hardware platform You just connected your system hard disk to the brand new PC and tried to start up the operating system you do know for sure now that this operation had been doomed to failure from the very beginning With our program you can easily tackle this naughty problem But before you start please make sure the following conditions are met e You ve got drivers for the new hardware ready to use not zipped or in exe files e Your OS is unrolled on the new computer not in a backup image To recover bootability after migrating your physical system to different hardware please do the following 1 Start up the computer from our WinPE media 2 Once it has been loaded read the agreement and then mark the appr
220. le operation scenarios e Copying of data from the corrupted system disk to another hard disk e Burning of data from the corrupted system disk to CD DVD e Copying of data from a backup to the corrupted system partition e Restoring separate files and folders from a backup Mount Partition The program enables to assign or remove drive letters of existing formatted partitions Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 14 Assign Drive Letter In order to mount a partition you should take the following steps Launcher l 2 4 Select a partition on the Disk Map Call the Add Drive Letter dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it Select in the Main Menu Partition gt Assign Drive Letter Call the popup menu for the selected partition right click of the mouse button on the Disk Map then select the menu item Assign Drive Letter Specify a drive letter for the selected partition Initially the program suggests some consistent value for this parameter So you may just press the Yes button to confirm the operation 7 Assign a drive better This allows access to the volume by using the drive letter assigned The asegnment is not mcommended fF the volume containa a fie system not supported by your operating system Asaga the fodowang dave letter However you can manually define the required letter by selecting it from the pull down list of available drive letter
221. le sectors and mark them unusable in the file system metadata 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Changing Cluster Size Cluster size is one of the crucial parameters of any file system Its value implicitly affects the performance of the files input output activity since it defines the size of the file system metadata Besides the so called waste space factor also depends on the cluster size In order to change the cluster size of a partition you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Call the Change Cluster Size dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it e Select in the Main menu Partition gt Modify gt Change Cluster Size e On the Explorer bar click on the current sectors per cluster value 3 Define the cluster size for the partition This parameter can have a profound effect on the overall performance In a nutshell larger clusters waste more space but generally provide for slightly better performance because of less fragmentation So be particularly careful with It oo Are you sure you wani to change cluster size for pastition C Curent cluser sire is 8 sectors 4 KB 4 096 Bytes Smaler cusiers may ami Pope PP Pr aa pi ls Proves More Celie UGG Oe Crs spors 5 Ey Please enter naw charter size in sectors aa a A N The Cluster Size value is expressed in Sectors Per Cluster To get the Cluster Size 4 in Kbytes divide
222. leted and replaced wth the one from the archive Basic Hand Disk 0 WMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dew i i Local Disk C 499 9 GB NTFS i Basic Hard isk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Msk Dev BS ene Oe F j ee mS 34GB FATI2 14G E E 22 G8_ A All contents on the partition selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation 6 On the Restore Results page you can see the resulted disk layout Besides there s the possibility to change size of the partition and its location if necessary as well as assign a particular drive letter Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 207 Your hard disk after ihe changes pee S LT E A S nat A ia FATIz i ber IFS LIL ERE Please specify the size of the restored partition 2470 36MB 2470 MB Please speciy size of free space before the partion 0 OMB 2434 MB Please specify size of free space afier the partition OMB 2434 MB 7 Complete the wizard and then apply the pending changes 8 The program will require the system restart to accomplish the operation in a special boot up mode Click the appropriate button to agree System restart is required to complete the operation What would you like to do continue in boottime mode Do net tum off the computer until the Please confiem restart of your computer The operation wil be continued after Sytem restart Retry pr
223. llation of the program e Scripting to make the program create a script of any set of operations you need Besides support of all operations available in the interactive mode the unattended mode provides some additional features such as conditional execution subroutines repeatable iterations disk partition properties analysis errors management etc Auxiliary Facilities e File Transfer Wizard to make such operations as transferring of files directories or burning of them to CD DVD as easy and convenient as possible Providing access to Paragon backups as regular folders it may also help to replace corrupted data from a previously created image in case of an operating system failure e Volume Explorer is a handy tool when you have different file systems on the disk whether they contain an operating system or just data Volume Explorer will let you explore a file system of any type and provide access to the necessary files and directories regardless of their security attributes e Recovery Media Builder to create a bootable recovery media based on Linux DOS or WinPE 2 1 on a CD DVD disc or flash memory which can later be used to boot and recover your computer in case of an operating system failure Moreover with its help you can save data from partitions of your hard disk directly to compact discs or burn ISO images The utility supports various formats of laser discs CD R RW DVD R RW DVD R RW DVD R DVD R double layer Blu ray and can
224. ly OS Windows Le a E m a pm a oS i m n a ak Atual mode options NT 2000VXP 2003 t does not rogue considerable hardware resources em COn era O E opy Backup exciude options Additional options a Backup exclude options Fle Backup include options a4 Sobers Use hot processing only when patton is locked Aways use hot processing fe e m i ee ice octiecs Hot processing temporary dive C f l t z BERSA pp m rr PRA oe Ar m i ne ao al Da eraka a i In this section you may configure the hot processing mode e Enable hot processing Mark the checkbox to enable the so called hot data processing mode that is specially designed to process data without restarting your operating system e Hot processing technology From the pull down list you can select the required hot processing technology e Always use hot processing Select the option to process partitions without making them locked Thus you will be able to keep working with them as usual e Use hot processing only when partition is locked Select the option to use the hot processing only when partitions are locked and cannot be processed without restarting the computer Please keep in mind that once you start any operation on a partition in this mode if will automatically be locked by the program thus you won t be able to keep working with it as Usual e Hot processing temporary drive Here you can select a disk drive that will be
225. m Registry 1 Disk 0 Partition S B WINDOWS For the highlighted Windows installation please point out the operation to perform O Correct drive leners in the System Registry Edit the Boot ini file O Correct the partition boot record AdjustOS to booton mew hardware To continue click Next 6 Examine the file maybe that s where the problem is If it contains a mistake correct it by using the appropriate buttons Edit the Boot ini file on Hard Disk 0 Partition 0 Timeout 10 hdefaul muli OMdisk Oirdisk Opartition WINDOWS operating systems multi idisk Mrdisk Olpanition WINDOWS Paragon VMWare Windows XP Partition 01 fasidetect i C e Cee CO 7 Ifthe Boot ini file does not contain any mistake please return to the Correct Windows Installations page to correct drive letters in the Windows System Registry Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 184 Correct Windows installations Program has searched for valid Windows installahons on your computer The results of the search you can see below Status refers io a sy SIEM panition you can edit the Boot ini file B a boot panition you can correct the System Registry 1 Disk 0 Partition 0 SB WINDOWS WinXP For the highlighted Windows installation please point out the operation to perfonm Correct drive leners in the Sy sem Regisiry Edit the Boot ini file Correct the partitio
226. m image AHR ch c Copy p ri AR T Create AH N Format a Unhide Delet Wipe panition Clear iee space Convert l Set label Resize Move Uimourt Change cluster size 6 You will be notified after the operations are completed Operations list Suboperation progress 1 Set partition flags OOO Operation progress BOCCE Time elapsed 00 00 26 Time tw finish Overall progress COTTA Rebuilding partitions info Alloperations have been finished 7 Restart the computer Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 246 System Migration and Virtualization Scenarios Migrating system to another hard disk Clone HDD Let s assume that you ve bought a new hard disk It s faster and of much higher capacity than your current system disk so It s quite natural you start thinking about system migration We can help you do that To migrate your system from one hard disk to another please do the following Launcher 1 Connect both source and destination disks to the computer 2 Turn on the computer 3 Click the Copy Disk item of the Wizards menu any of the ways described earlier can also be used here 4 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 5 On the Select Hard Disk to Copy page select a source disk a hard disk you want to copy On this page you can choose a hard disk you would like to copy All partitions from this hard disk
227. mage splitting Choose this option to enable splitting the archive to several files Magnum spit size 2000 MB 5 On the Synthetic Archive Destination page select where you want to place the resulfed backup image There are several ways the Vizard can sore your data Phease select how you would lite fo save the archive Save data to the Backup Capsule G Save dats to local network dives Save date to physical partitions save data to FTP locations Bum the data to CD or DVD 6 Edit the archive name if necessary Archive name arc_030905110023030 Estimated archive size 31 MB Space avaiable on backup destination 490 3 GB Please take into account values of the parameters Estimated archive size and A N Space available on backup destination if the archive size exceeds the available space another drive needs to be selected 7 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Pease enter a short commet to desoibe the ache Ry Ho comment 8 On the Synthesis Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 179 Please oveniew the backup options You can retum to the comesponding page and change the options by choking on the tile Hyperlinks Name Gac images aff 0309031057132354 030909105712255 PBF Location Gvarc_images at _US0909106 1 Sot 0309091051
228. mation on Windows family operating systems Log files do not contain any confidential information on the operating system settings or the user documents The Send Log Files function is only available when outgoing mail server SMTP and the user e mail address are properly set To learn more about it please consult the Settings Overview chapter Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 150 View Logs With a handy dialog you can study logs on any operation carried by the program To make this job as easy as possible all the information is structurally divided besides there is the possibility to see the disk layout before and after an operation what is very convenient In order to view logs on carried out operations call the View Logs dialog in the Main Menu Tools gt View Log Files Senor ooeralions Dated FVA at 12 40 45 AM Rished at 12 41 21 Started 5 2009 at 1247 171 AM Rrished at 1244 29 Started 5 2009 at 1245 AM Arighed at 1245 12 J Started 9 9 2009 at 1245 35 AM Areghed at 1 26 51 T Started 9 2 2009 at 9 17 40 AM Finished af 9 21 28 AM No operations hawe bean found forthe selected season Stated 5 2 2008 at 5 30 36 AM Finished at 541304 AM T Started 5 2 2005 at 59 41 05 AM E Started 9 2 2009 at 12 15 48 PM Finished at 12 2026 T Started 5 2 2009 at 1220 26 PM Hrished at 1224 46 E Stated 2 2005 at 1224 46 PM T Started 9 2 2009 at 12 06 15 PM Finished at 120747 Sta
229. me C J You ane about to move resize NTFS volume No label C Basie Hard Dek 0 ViMwore VMware Vitual S SCS Diek Dev g Local Disk C 23 8 i co oa F TES Ei E ume siza T76MB Sle 11 923 MB 289 781 ME ma space beloa 7 ME S ae Obytes 277 850 73 MB Free space after E a O bytes 277 850 76 ME Damarin pasis mee select ihis option to move partition areas thal dont corian any data Ihis allows WOU io keap the partitions content after move exactly aa ft waa bul wi require more time e Volume size Define size in Mb of the modified partition e Free space before Define the partition position in Mb relative to the beginning of the available range of disk space e Free space after Define the amount of trailing free space in Mb at the end of the available range of disk space e Sector to sector move Mark the checkbox to move the partition in the sector by sector mode to process its unused space as well This can help to avoid problems with hidden data created by certain applications or the system administrator However it will take more time to accomplish the operation Partition size and position may also be defined by using the drag and drop technique To do that just carry out the required operation on the Disk Map The virtual operations are to be available A N When resizing a FAT16 partition beyond the 2GB limit maximum file system size the partition will automatically be converted t
230. ment volume C Defragmentation may improve perfomance of your system For locked Vines Reever as Operon Wil Pare Me system pester Sor by sire xl mah f abil ajoa ij Ls mah tert Sot by modiication tras De not sort The Defragment Partition dialog offers a number of additional parameters that can also be of help However here we pay attention to the most relevant to fulfill our task 5 Start the operation by clicking the Yes button Hard Disk Utilization To irreversibly destroy all on disk information without any possibility to recover and that way providing the maximum level of security please do the following Launch the Wipe Wizard There are several ways to do it Express Launcher e Click the Security and Optimization button and then select Wipe Launcher e Inthe Main Menu select Wizards gt Wipe Hard Disk or Partition e On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 1 Select a hard disk the data of which you want to wipe out Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 269 Piesse choose an object for wong t can be a whole hard disk a single partition or a block of unslloceted space Tou can set io wipe al data on ihe patton or ony unoccupied space on it see he next step Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev i W Local Disk C p data Z WB 222 3 GE NTFS WB 217Ge NTFS Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS
231. mportant resources In DOS The last versions of MS DOS use a rather sophisticated algorithm for a drive letter assignment A drive letter which is assigned to a partition depends on the order of records in the Partition Table Thus changing enumeration of the primary partitions affects the drive letters assignment In early versions of MS DOS if could even lead to the unavailability of a partition The program provides the ability to change enumeration of the primary partitions This feature will allow you to fix problems concerning an inappropriate order of partitions In order to modify enumeration of the primary partitions you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a hard disk on the Disk Map 2 Call the Change Primary Slot dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it Select in the Main Menu Hard Disk gt Change Primary Slot Call the popup menu for the selected hard disk right click of the mouse button on the Disk Map then select the menu item Change Primary Slot a Are you sure you wami to change primary slots order You are about to change pamary slois order on Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev Your computer may no longer boot comecthy Slot No Object type Fie System Volume label 0 Primary FAT32 Mo label i p NTFS F Primary Linux Ext3 NEW VOLUME J Primary Linux Swap2 Mo lake Name Local Disk F Volume label No label Total size 24
232. mputers There is no need for a system administrator to install an operating system from scratch on every one of them It is enough just to configure one and then clone it to the others Drive Partitioning As you probably know a hard drive is to be split into one or more partitions since it cannot hold data until it is carved up and space is set aside for an operating system Until recently most PCs used to have just one partition which filled the entire hard disk and contained an OS The situation has changed however thanks to new cost effective high capacity hard drives thus opening up numerous possibilities for PC users such as editing video archiving music backing up CD images etc Huge increase in space is great but it poses a number of problems most important of which are effective data organization and speed Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 40 Large drives are always going to take longer to search than smaller volumes and an operating system is going to have its work cut out both finding and organizing files It is for this reason that many people decide to invest in multiple hard drives but there is an easy solution drive partitioning Partitioning lets you divide a single physical drive into a number of logical drives each of which servers as a container with its own drive letter and volume label thus enabling the operating system to process data more efficiently Besides partitioning ma
233. n also define specific parameters for the Hot Processing mode e The data to be automatically excluded from the resulted backup f By default the program will take into account exclude filters set in the Settings dialog Result After the backup operation is completed you receive an image of the selected disk or the selected partition This image is placed into the specified destination its features defined by the wizard Dialog Work Algorithm All backup dialogs share similar work algorithm as well Unlike wizards settings of a backup dialog concentrate on a single page That s why it cannot boast high level of the self descriptiveness Anyway with the context sensitive hint system you can get an in depth description to any setting control or field of the dialog just by clicking the hint button and then the object you need We recommend the program s dialogs for experienced users mostly So let us just take as an example the Partition Backup Dialog to describe its work algorithm Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 84 Startup In order to start the operation you should take the following steps 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Call the Partition Backup Dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it Select in the Main menu Partition gt Back Up Partition Call the popup menu for the selected partition right click of the mouse button then select the menu item B
234. n boot record Adjust Q S to boot on new hardware To continue click Next 8 On the next page choose a hard disk from the pull down list if several then the required partition If you re not sure which installation you need please use the Properties button to get more info on the selected item Partitions List Letters Map Below you can choose a hard disk drive and see all partitions on it Information about drive letters assigned io these panitions is taken from the System Registry of the Windows installation selected Basic Disk 0 f 40 0Gb VMware Virtual IDE Hard Drive N Type Active File System _ Volume label Size Drive letters Primary Yes NTFS WinkxP 3 0 Gb C Primary NTFS Applikation 9 8Gb E Primary BackupCapsul No Label 10 0Gb None gt Prim ary Free 17 2Gb lt None gt 9 Click the Edit Letters button to correct an existing drive letter or assign a new one in the Windows System Registry Partiians List Drive letters aig it Information about drive letters i ihe Windows installation selected ree ase Recommended to try Ci fused youcan release it in Letters Map Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 185 10 Once you ve assigned the appropriate drive letter close the dialog then click the Apply button 11 Confirm the operation j Apply the changes lt 12 After the operation is completed click the Re
235. n operating system In case the first option has been marked the wizard enables to specify A hard disk if several where a new partition will be created Thanks to an advanced program engine it is possible to use unallocated space of the disk if any and Unused space of existing partitions to create a new partition On thes page you can choose a hand dek if several where pou would like to create a new pimay partion Basic Hard Disk O Maxtor 7Y250P0 0 ti tsts lt lt i lt i s CS a0 een NTFS Poo Le a Po Batic Hard Disk 1 ST 3160815345 Be Be Bee i3 634 GE NTFS EE GB NTFS Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 116 A N To avoid any possible problems the new partition will in no way be created as amp the first partition of the disk which already contains at least one partition And its size If there are blocks of the free space on the disk the wizard will merge them all and allocate the resulted space for a new partition in the first place If not it will take 50 of the unused space of an adjacent partition However the size to take can be customized by moving the slider fou can select ether a block of unallocated space from the dik or an ering partion for whch the unused qpece wall be ured lo create 4 new pathbon Batic Hard Diek 0 Maxtor fy 2750P 0 i WC l a Ben ih 1821 GB NTFS rl 5 568 Hg B n volume curent size 51 6
236. n the object you need Startup There are several ways to start the Copy Partition Wizard Express Launcher e Click the Copying and Migration button and then select Copy Partition Launcher e Inthe Main Menu select Wizards gt Copy Partition e On the Common Tasks Bar click the Copy Partition item of the Wizards menu e Inthe Toolbar click the Copy Partition button Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the copy partition operation e The partition to copy Select a partition you want to copy On this page you can choose a volume to copy Hasic Hard Disk U VMware Vidwar Virtual S S425 Disk Dev w Local Disk C 499 9GB NTFS Hasic Hard Lisk VMware VMwarr Virtual S SUS isk Oey w Local Dis 2 ai F a Unallo 24GB NTFS Beacons 146 22 GH Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved W Local Disk E gt M 34GB FATH 96 e Destination disk Select a hard disk with enough unallocated space to perform the operation The wizard wil create a copy of Local Disk F from Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dew The copy wil be created on Basic Hard Disk 3 WMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Please select where to create a copy Basic Hard Disk 3 Vidware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev 13 3 GE smaller than the partition itself taking into account only actual amount of a The program enables to copy a partition to a block of fr
237. nager partitions using Paragon Hard Disk Manager which will stan now Upon the stan please select the drive and one of its Partitions or its ree space Then activate the Partition pull down menu and select one of One Button Copy Wirard the partitioning operations a Simple Restor Wizard Wipe Wirard Express Rese Wizard File Transfer Wizard Boot Corector Network Configurator Log Saver Eject CO DVD b 3 E 7 2 amp F Siart the command line 4 On the Wizard s Welcome page select the Search for Windows installations to correct option Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 183 Please choose the operation G Search for Windows installations to correct Correct the Master Boot Record MBR Correct the partition boot record O Modify partition parameters Correct boot parameters boot ini BCD To begin click Next 5 On the next page choose the required Windows installation from the list of found installations if several then select the Edit the Boot ini file option If you re not sure which installation you need please use the Properties button to get more info on the selected item Correct Windows installations Program has searched for valid Windows installations on your computer The results of the search you can see below Status 5 refers fo A System partition you can edit the Boot ini file B a boot partion you can correct the Sysie
238. namic MBR disk containing simple volume s into a basic MBR disk Convert to Basic MBR Convert a basic or a dynamic GPT disk containing simple volume s into a basic MBR disk Update MBR Uodate MBR Master Boot Record of the selected hard disk Change Primary Slots Modify the primary partitions enumeration for the selected hard disk Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 46 Connect a virtual disk to work with it as If it s a physical disk Disconnect a Virtual Disk Disconnect a virtual disk perties Get in depth information on the properties of selected hard disk Format Partition Format a partition Burn Partition to CD or Back up the selected partition and burn the resulted image to DVD CD DVD Restore the selected partition from a backup image Move Resize Move Resize the selected partition Convert File System Convert file system of the selected partition Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 47 Change Partition ID Change identifier of the selected partition Make Partition Primary Make the selected partition Primary Make Partition Logical Make the selected partition Logical Ireversibly destroy all on partition information Clear Free Space Destroy any remnants of deleted files directories left on disk Test surface of the selected partition block of free soace Check File System Check the selected partition
239. nded partition on the disk only three primary partitions are allowed That is why if a GPT disk contains several volumes the program enables to choose the number of primary partitions The rest of them if any will automatically be converted to logical disks within the Extended partition Plt Convert the basic GPT hard disk to a basic MBA hard dick F there are more than four volumes on the disk only the first three may become primary and ihe resi logcal The hard disk afer convert Boasc Had Disk 3 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dew g New Volume H The resuked hard disk should have at least 1 primary partiion s Please select how many primary parifions you need F The program can only process dynamic GPT disks containing solid simple A N volumes without extension Changing Primary Slot Different operating systems apply different approaches to enumeration of the primary partitions In Linux In Linux every partition has a special symbolic name that encodes a hard disk containing a partition and a partition itself Partitions are addressed and accessed by using their symbolic names Symbolic names are automatically generated by Linux in accordance with the order of hard disks in BIOS and Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 127 the order of partition records in the Partition Table Thus changing enumeration of the primary partitions can lead to changing of paths to some i
240. ne of ins as oe partitions or its free space Then activate the Partition pull down menu and select one of One Button Copy Wizard the partitioning operations Wipe Wirard Express Resee Wizard File Transfer Wizard Boot Corector 1 Network Configurator Log Saver Eject CD DVD Stat the command line 4 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 5 Select a disk where the system backup Is stored from the pull down list in the right pane of the page Source arc _ 280508 e277 53 E gt G DIFF 1285651847 10000000 ve ane_ 80508134527531 PBF m arc_280508134617531 pim ied rr rere Decumerhs and Settings G Program Files O RECYCLER G System volume Information WINDOWS od cles sw igr i AUTOEXEC BAT NTOETECT COM 7 Select files you want to copy and place them to Clipboard by pressing the left arrow button Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 216 E O l0g E 001947_1mp St ARJ PIF Total data size 4 Kb Click the Calc button to estimate the resulted data size 8 On the Select Destination Type choose the way the data will be stored Select the Save data to any local drive or a network share item Please select how would you like to save the data Save data to any local drives or a network share Choose this option if you want to save your data to be al mounted or physi al panition t USB or FireWare external drives and t
241. network share or manually enter a path to it e Define a letter from the pull down list of available drive letters e Click the Connect as user button at the foot of the dialog page to specify a user name and password to access the selected network share if necessary By clicking Disconnect Drive you can delete an existing network share if necessary 5 Click the Network identification tab to change a network name of your computer generated automatically and a workgroup name Computer Hame MININT S6SDG6 Workarsuip Primary DNS sufix 6 By default the wizard saves all network settings in the netconf ini file located on the WinPE RAM drive thus it will only be available until you restart the computer However you can just once configure your network device and then save this file to some other destination for instance a local drive and this way avoid constant re configuration just by providing a path to it So Click Save to file to save the netconfig ini file to the required destination Saving log files The program enables to simplify the procedure of sending support requests to the Paragon Support Team In case of having difficulties with handling the program you with the help of this very function can address the company support engineers and provide them with all the information they need such as the disk layout performed operations etc in order to tackle the encountered problem Information of that kind Is st
242. ng It s done especially to increase the program usability For instance if you ve got a high capacity hard drive containing both very large more than 100 GB and rather small less than 10 GB partitions you can select the logarithmic type to make all partitions readable otherwise selecting the linear type you won t be able to see small partitions at all but thing strips On the other hand if the proportional disk layout is critical for you the linear type is exactly what you need Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 52 Nevertheless there s a compromise solution linear scaling with the minimal limit to small partitions So if a partition is too small it will remain readable Just click on the arrow icon on the top right side of the Disk Map to select the desired scaling type Linear Linear Scaling Min Width Disk Map Is synchronized with the Explorer Bar Thus by selecting a disk on the Disk Map the Explorer Bar will automatically display detailed information on it A The drag and drop functionality is not available when the logarithmic type of the disk layout is selected Explorer Bar The Explorer Bar is located in the center of the main window which emphasizes its importance The bar displays reference information including e The help system e General information on the product including its name version and a list of helpful links e Detailed information about disks selec
243. ntains a set of options that will be taken into account during partitioning operations e Enable 64 KB cluster size for FAT16 Mark the checkbox to enable 64KB clusters for FAT16 partitions Thus you will be able to create FAT16 partitions up to 4GB in size FAT16 partitions larger than 2GB are not reliably accessible under these Due to the maximum cluster size of 32KB for Windows 95 98 ME or MS DOS operating systems e Request confirmation before partition deletion Mark the checkbox to activate an additional security mechanism Thus when going to delete a partition you will be automatically requested to enter its label e Request confirmation when converting FAT16 to FAT32 Mark the checkbox to automatically request confirmation before converting FAT16 to FAT32 There are a number of situations when this kind of conversion is the only way out to accomplish the operation For instance you are going to migrate your system to a larger hard disk with the proportional resize of existing partitions what is very convenient As a result you can get original FAT16 partitions go beyond the 4GB limit Thus without conversion to FAT32 this operation will in no way be possible to accomplish The same goes for any copy hard disk partition or restore hard disk partition operation involving an extra Upsizing Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 60 General Copy and Backup Options G Edit settings General options v
244. ntains vacant drive letters that can be associated with the restored partition Partition Restores Options Assign the fohowing dive letis F Restoring Hard Disk Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 70 e Copy data and resize partitions proportionally If this option is activated the program proportionally changes the size of partitions keeping their relative order intact The option can be useful when restoring to a larger hard disk e Perform surface test Define whether the surface test will be accomplished during the operation or not Your hard disk after the changes Hase Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virina 5 SCSI Disk Dev i Q Local Disk gj Local Disk i a g Unalloc SSH ff EIE Hard Disk Restore Options Copy data and resize partitions propoetionally In this mode the Vizard changes the size of partitions in the same proportion with keeping intact their reiative onder This option can be useful in resting an image of hard disk io a lanar one Pevform suface test Set the opion f you want the Wizard to pesform the surface test on the target hard dek in the case F the program finds bad and unreliable sectors t will mark them as unusable ones All contents on the disk selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation Result The wizard will restore the archived data and make it available to use in the operating system To make a Win2K operating sy
245. o the point when run smoothly To restore your system partition from a backup image located on a local disk please do the following Launcher 1 Click the Restore item of the Wizards menu any of the ways described earlier can also be used here 2 On the Restore Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 196 3 On the Browse for Archive page specify the required archive By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any shwa amp B ik Type Creation Date Source Object Size 9 3 2009 3 57 21 AM Local Disk 24GB S 2 2005 524 27 AM Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Vidual 5 SCS Disk Dev 10 GE 9 2 2009 5 20 25 AM New Volume F 2468 2 2005 SILA AM Fledevel Archive 113 1 KB 22005 50603 AM Filedevel Archive KB bea LR i J200 22101 AM Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Desk Dew 10GB Local Disk C My system backup No label NTFS Total size 495 5G8 8568 Free space 4914 GE G at_ arem oe sem PBF To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser l
246. o FAT32 The program enables to enlarge NTFS partitions system locked without rebooting Windows and interrupting its work providing 100 percent guarantee that your data is kept intact 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Available operation scenarios e Increasing size of a system partition by taking unused soace from any other e Shrinking a system partition to increase size of a data partition Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 119 Converting File System With our program you can change type of the used file system without destroying its data While performing the operation it first checks the current file system for consistency and then verifies whether the on partition data meet the requirements of the desired file system or not After having passed the testing the program re organizes the file system metadata and user files The program enables to convert the following file system types FAT16 gt NTFS FAT32 FAT32 gt NTFS FAT16 NTFS gt FAT16 FAT32 Ext2 gt Ext3 In order to convert a file system you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Call the Convert File System of Partition dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it e Select in the Main menu Partition gt Convert file system e On the Explorer bar click on the current file system type e Call the popup menu for
247. o a larger hand disk Mark the checkbox to proportionally change the size of partitions while keeping ther 8 On the Revise Copy Results page review all parameters of the operation Bese Hard Disk 1 Viware VMware Virtual S SCS sk Dew i ha pF al u nains E i uj Local Hia o oj Credo 3 468 FATA 7468 NTFS ee 22 GE Hard disk copy Ease Hard Disk 3 Vdware VMware Virtual 5S SCS Disk DET Bar g Local Dy 2 ie 1205 G8 NTFS 134 6GB Proportional sr the copy wil take SOGE 100 of target disk apace BIE 1S SIEIS Se Se SS Se a Se SS Min Copy Size 627 5 MB Max Copy Size 500GB PA Select the ranpa of the disk space thal wi be occupied on the destination disk with copied 10 When copying is completed shut down the computer 11 Disconnect physically the source hard disk 12 Boot the computer from the destination hard disk A To make a Win2K operating system bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 248 Virtualizing the current system P2V Let s assume that you re about to migrate to a brand new hardware platform with the latest operating system available for it Your current system is quite obsolete but you still need access to some of its software You don t want to waste time re installing the old software to the new system and you do know for sure t
248. o a mounted network share You will be prompted to choose a boc ation you wanito save the archive to O Burn data to CD DVD Choose this option if you want the Wizard to burn the data to CO or DVD You will be prompted to choose a CD or DVD RW drive 9 On the Select Destination Path page select your system disk to copy the data to by pressing the standard browse button Select path E INtServicePackUninstall C AppPatch O Config O Connection Wizard G Cursors O Debug D Downloaded Program Files O Driver Cache i gt EHome File name mntdisk hdalAVNDOWS File ype 10 On the Transfer Summary page check all parameters of the operation Click the Next button to accomplish the operation Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 217 11 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Operations list Suboperation progress 1 Transier userdata TA Operation progress CE Time elapsed 00 00 04 Time 10 finish 00 00 00 Copied so far 0 9 Mb Overall progress ona Transiering AMINDOWS system to mnidiskihndal WINDOWS system tem 1of1 All operations have been finished 12 After the operation is completed close the wizard by pressing the appropriate button 13 Turn off the computer This operation can al
249. od 3 Click on the required operation to start Hints on the selected at the moment item will help you make the right choice 4 Consult the help system by pressing ALT F1 to know more on the subject Boot menu The Boot menu contains the following commands F Normal Mode Hain recovery Safe Hode em ironnent 4 Low Graphics Safe Mode Floppy disk amp Hard disk H HER amp Find OSes on your hard disks e Normal Mode Boot into the Linux normal mode This mode uses the full set of drivers recommended Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 26 Safe Mode Boot into the PTS DOS mode This mode can be used as an alternative of the Linux normal mode if it fails to work properly Low Graphics Safe Mode Boot into the PTS DOS safe mode In this case only the minimal set of drivers will be included like hard disk monitor and keyboard drivers This mode has simple graphics and a simple menu Floppy Disk Reboot the computer from a system floppy disk Hard Disk 0 Boot from the primary hard disk Find OS s on your hard disks The program will scan hard disks of your computer to find any bootable operating system To move within the menu please use the arrow keys of the computer keyboard While working with the recovery environment you might experience some Norma inconvenience caused by possible video artifacts It is just a result of changing video modes and in no way will affect th
250. oe hi You can see the algocthm description and set the level of verficahon on the next page Create your can Data Sandizatian method You can create your own Data Saniization method In case you preferred to use a specific algorithm the next page of the wizard enables to get detailed information on the selected algorithm choose whether to carry out residual data verification or not specifying the percentage of sectors to check and estimate the time required to accomplish the operation Wine mathod US DoD 3220 22 M Overate all addressable locations wih a character ie complement then a random character and vey Erase passes count 3 Veefy passes count 1 vii Veny wipe results Percentage of sectors fo check 100 Aporoimate wine time 14 02 40 You can ship veriying completely or partly by disabling or reducing percentage of sectors to check Please note E would be p deviation from US DoD 5220 272 M A The current version of the program provides support of one military standard i e US DoD 5220 22 M In case you preferred to create a customized algorithm the next page of the wizard enables to define up to 4 wiping patterns number of passes for each wiping pattern and for the group of patterns The Mask spinner control allows you to set a two figure hexadecimal character value 00 by default The available range is from 00 to FF You can also choose whether to carry out residual data verification or n
251. of data Let s assume that you re a rank and file user who is most likely to have only one hard disk with only one partition the only partition is always system To secure yourself against a system malfunction or a virus attack you ve got nothing to do but make a backup of the whole partition which besides the operating system itself contains all your family photos favorite films and music program distributives whatever As a result you ll get a very huge backup image You can easily tackle this issue however by detaching your operating system from the rest of data To create a new partition on your hard disk please do the following Express Launcher Click Switch to Full Scale Launcher in the Express Launcher l Click the Express Create Partition item of the Wizards menu any of the ways described earlier can also be used here On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button Choose a method you find the most suitable to create the partition The wizard is especially designed to minimize your participation in finding an appropriate place for it and its resulted size The only thing you re to do is to choose between several modes The most relevant thing here is the amount of soace that will be allocated for that partition For easy perception you can see the resulted disk layout on the disk map by selecting this or that mode 7 pt iin F K a Taeun Ti A ERU YOU Wil g ater AERE g a H C Ep Basc Hard Disk 0 VM Veware
252. of sectors to check tA Piense note i would be a deviation from US DoD 5220 22 M 5 Review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved P a ee Ley LA 282 9 GB NTFS 2 0 i data Z4 217 GE NTFS 6 Complete the wizard and then apply the pending changes Extra Scenarios for WinPE Adding specific drivers Our WinPE 2 1 based recovery environment offers excellent hardware support Anyway you ve got the option to add drivers for soecific hardware with a handy dialog To add drivers for specific hardware please do the following 1 Once you accept the agreement you will see the Universal Application Launcher Click Load Drivers 2 Inthe opened dialog browse for an INF file of the required driver package located ona floppy disk local disk CD DVD or a network share Then click the Open button to initiate the operation Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 28KB TOKE 925 200 6 43 53 AM 4 16 2008 3 15 50 AM 72 2009 7 08 07 AM 18 17 2008 2 41 05 AM 7 10 2008 2 51 04 AM 77008 11 45 04 PM 6 15 2009 7 46 37 AM 6 18 2009 11 28 46 PM Fe 200s 3 1536 AM 5 18 2009 10 31 34 PM 18 2009 10 33 53 PM 5 12 2009 10 33 53 PM 9 12 2008 1 21 12 AM 9 12 2008 1 21 12 AM Se ee ee ee MM 271 To know how to map a network share please consult the Configuring network A N scenario
253. of this kind you ve got the option to inject any 3 party driver either by providing a path to your own driver repository collection of all drivers to your hardware devices located in one folder for the program automatically pick and install only those drivers required for your OS recommended or manually specifying drivers critical for the guaranteed startup of your system on the new hardware Adaptive Restore Application Let s consider a number of situations when the Adaptive Restore feature can help you out e If you need to upgrade to newer hardware while keeping all your programs and settings intact e If you need to replace failed hardware and cannot find an exact match for your original system specifications Known Issues 1 After transferring Microsoft Vista and later versions to different hardware you will need to re activate license of the system It s normal behavior as these systems keep tracking any change of hardware Re activation is legally justified in this case as you transfer your system to another PC 2 If you ve installed several operating systems on one partition we can only add drivers to the latest version of OS Microsoft highly recommends that you install an operating system on a separate partition 3 Please note drivers are not cached during selection That s why if you select a driver to add to the system but It s already unavailable during the operation the program will end the operation with
254. oftware Group All rights reserved 83 e Compression level for the backup image including the No compression variant e Whether the archive will be split if yes you can set the maximum size for the archive files Splitting images enables to tackle issues caused by a file size limitation of some file systems e Whether the archive will be protected by password e Whether the selected disk or the selected partition will be copied in the sector to sector mode including unused sectors as well e Whether the OS auxiliary files pagefile sys hyberfil sys will be included in the backup image e Whether backup images stored in the Archive Database will be processed during the backup operation A Skipping backups of the Archive Database may considerably decrease the resulted image file and time to carry out the operation e Recording soeed when the user wants to burn the backup image onto CD DVDs e ISO image folder where the archive that is fo be recorded on a disc is placed e Whether the operation will be performed without rebooting the system The program needs to reboot the system in order to have exclusive access to processing data In a Windows environment this is difficult to achieve because even when all the other applications are closed the system service programs are still running However there is a way to avoid rebooting The mode of processing the backup operation without rebooting is named Hot Processing You ca
255. olume 460 3GB NTFS e e a u e 5 On the next page of the wizard you need to confirm the operation by selecting the appropriate option Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 226 The Vizard has not apoed your changes yet On this page you can eihar accept or reconsider ihe changes Piesse note thet f you accent the changes the Wizard wil physically pedo al the neccessary operations and t wil not be possible to undo the changes i may take some time to apply the changes You may also be assed to restart your computer during this process Would you ike to apply your changes 7 Yes apply the changes physically OG T a a Le No let me reconsider 6 That s basically it By clicking the Next button the wizard will start modifying your disk layout If you ve got to do with the system partition resize like we do in our case you will be asked to restart your computer in a special boot up mode to accomplish the operation So click the appropriate button to agree System restart is required to complete the operation Tre operstion Redisinibute partitions nesis eeclueve scceds to the volume C and cannot be completed without system restart After restart the operation vill continue in boottime mode Do not tum off the computer until the operation completes Pee confirm restart of your computer The operation wil be continued ser Manually close used files and retry the operati
256. om System Requirements Windows based set of utilities To use the Windows utilities you should install them first But before that please make sure your computer meets the following minimum system requirements e Operating systems Windows 2000 XP Vista 7 and XP SP2 Vista 7 64 bit e Internet Explorer 5 0 or higher e Intel Pentium CPU or its equivalent with 300 MHz processor clock soeed e 128 MB of RAM 256 recommended e Hard disk drive with 100 MB of available soace e SVGA video adapter and monitor e Mouse Linux DOS based recovery environment To use the Linux DOS recovery environment on your computer if doesn t matter what operating system is installed please make sure that it meets the following minimum system requirements e IBM AT compatible computer with i486 or higher CPU e 256 MB of RAM e SVGA compatible monitor e Mouse recommended WinPE based recovery environment To use the WinPE based recovery environment on your computer it doesn t matter what operating system is installed please make sure that it meets the following minimum system requirements e Intel Pentium Ill CPU or its equivalent with 1000 MHz processor clock soeed Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 21 e Atleast 512 MB of RAM e SVGA compatible monitor e Mouse recommended Additional requirements There may be additional requirements if you want to use advanced features e Network card to send retrieve
257. on 7 Inthe Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out at the moment Suboperation progress aragon SOFTWARE GROU Redistribute partitions COSS Work timeoo 01 15 Time to finishoo 00 05 Done 0 77 Mb Read 72 Hb 4 0 Mb s All Mb Write 0 0 Hb 0O 0 Mb s Overall progress Quick data moving Flushing systems buffers please wait Modifying drive t on hard disk Checking parameters Scanning dir structure Scanning data structure may be a few minutes jo not reset or turn off your computer to avoid the data loss Iperation in progress press ESC or Ctrl C to interrupt operation After completing the operation your computer will be automatically restarted back to Windows where you can see that your system partition is bigger now Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 227 Increasing size of a system partition by taking unused space from any other Let s assume you ve got several partitions on your hard disk After installing a number of resource consuming applications and system updates your system partition has started to suffer from the lack of free space But one of your partitions has a plenty of redundant space That s just enough to make your system partition suffer no more To increase size of a system partition by taking unused space from any other on disk partition please do the following Express
258. on Date Source Object Sira EE ee ee r 2009 7 35 58 AM 2008 7 1035 AM Fie tewel Archive 444 KB amp 9 2 2009 3 57 21 AM Local Disk 7 24GB Ej 9 2 2009 5 24 27 AM Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev 10GB amp 9 2 2009 6 20 25 AM New Volume F 24GB F 9 2 2009 5 11 41 AM Fimevel Archive 113 1 KB F g22009 5 06 03 AM Filetiewel Archive 4 KE amp 9 2 2009 2 33 00 AM Local Disk C 499 9GB EI 9 2 2009 2 21 01 AM Base Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev 10GB a F vto File Vi Archive File Details Comment No comment ia avalabis Backup date 9 2 2008 7 36 58 AM Total size 136 3 KB 140 120 Bytes Archive size 1 8 KB 1 865 Bytes File Gat _images DIFF 12894623 20000000 FL i O00archive pfi Base archive G arc_images arc_images PBF To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details disolay a short description A To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter e By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 206 Lookin E Archives G d xg Name Size Date A E Archives G H Ji arc_disk 9 2 2009 5 25 00 AM V d arc_doc
259. on about the contents of the archive Select the required item to restore In our case it is the first partition of the disk Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved Please select one of the obtectis to sioe Name Typa E Basic Hard Disk 0 Unknown Modal Basic Hard Diak Drive 40GB fm Local Disk Primary NTFS 2556 1 3 GB LB Loca Desk Primary NTFS 77GB 2528 MB Total sze 422 59GB Fea spaca 11GB 7 On the Where to Restore page specify a hard disk then one of its partitions to restore the image to if several in your computer By default the program offers to restore the archive exactly where It belongs That s what we actually need Fiesse select a place you would lite to restore the wrtha to Note that F you select an existing hard disk or partion ds content wil be deleted and replaced with the one from the archive Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware Virtual IDE Hard Drive t Applicati f g Backup C f Unallocated s7GaNTrS Ml 95GB E 726 A f All contents on the partition selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation 8 On the Restore Results page you can see the resulted disk layout Besides there s the possibility to change size of the partition and Its location if necessary as well as assign a particular drive letter Your hard disk after ihe chanpes Besic Hard Disk 0 VMware Viduel IDE Hard Dive B
260. on on the Disk Map 2 Call the Check File System Integrity dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do It Select in the Main Menu Partition gt Check File System Integrity Call the popup menu for the selected partition right click of the Mouse button on the Disk Map then select the menu item Check File System Integrity 3 Initially the program suggests some consistent values for all parameters In most cases you can just press the Yes button to confirm the operation Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 145 EBC Check volume C No label NTFS for errors Please note that check operation needs exclusive access to the volume You may be asked to restart your computer to compete the operation Check disk options Scan for and attempt recovery of bad sectors e Scan for and attempt to recover bad sectors Mark the checkbox to additionally process sectors marked bad in the file system metadata for the purpose of their possible recovery 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Check Archive Integrity The program provides the ability to check integrity of a backup image The function allows distinguishing between valid and corrupted images before using them The Check Archive Integrity Wizard will helo you do that Startup There are several ways to start the Check Archive Integrity Wizard Launcher e Inthe Main Menu select Wizards
261. oning operations ie i Wipe Wirard Express Rese Wizard File Transfer Wizard Boot Corrector Network Configurator Log Saver Eject CD DVD Stat the command line ES ETSE 4 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 5 Select a disk where the files you need are stored from the pull down list in the right pane of the page Source C NTFS 0 on Disk 0 WinxP if My computer Wf Rootdin My Computer My computer W mn Mounted resources W mntdisk Local disks W media Removable disks ah IDE CD DVD NEC VMWa VMware IDE CDRI tt NTFS 0 or Disk Wink Dl NTFS 1 one isk 0 Applic ation e Ej BackupCapsule 7 on Disk 0 UFSD di Penne Fo Dele Fa 6 Select files you want to copy and place them to Clipboard by pressing the left arrow button Clipboard Source s Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 213 Click the Calc button to estimate the resulted data size 7 On the Select Destination Type choose the way the data will be stored Select the Burn data to CD DVD item Please galeri how would you like to save the data Save data to any local drives or a network share Choose this option if you want to save your data to boc al mounted or physical partition to USB or FireWare external drives and t a mounted network share You will be prompted to choose a location you wani io save the archive to Burn data to CODVD
262. operation 8 The wizard will provide a detailed report on successful accomplishment of the operation You can save It by clicking the appropriate button Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 255 Operations details Parthian Ofram a 399 9 GE backup image located in anc_system arc_system_PEF has been successfully bangeredio VMware Workstaben virtual dsk Eis 499 59 GE in size and is placed to C disk 1 vend The folowing OSes have been successtuly adjusted to the required virtual hardware e Microsoft Windows 7x86 on pimay partion 0 Save report 9 Now you can connect the resulted virtual disk to your virtual machine Your old system has been virtualized from its backup image You need to close the program to unlock the virtual disk Otherwise you won t be able to connect it to a virtual machine Making system bootable on virtual hardware P2V Adjust OS Let s assume you had to migrate to a new hardware platform Willing to conserve your system you decided to virtualize it with a 39 party tool but unsuccessfully you got a virtual disk as a result of the operation but the system was failing to start up You had nothing to do but forget about your old system With our program you ve now got the option to make your virtualized system bootable To recover bootability after migrating your physical system to a virtual disk with a 3 party tool please do the following Launcher 1 Click the
263. ophcation Data g E Cookes el Desktop J E So Favonas z E Local Settings lt a i A Fal My Documents cts F ES NetHood e 7 EE PrntHood i Gl Ascent a EA GandTn El To continue cick Nerd Desta sze to restore 1 7 KB 7 On the How to Restore page specify the way the selected data will be restored In our case we d rather restore contents of the backup fo its original location with replacing existing files as well Restore files to ae location I lesve acting fles Rapace acsting fies 8 On the Restore Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Planet overview the estores options You can retum tothe comesponding page and change the options by cliking on tithe hyparinks Object 3 selected 1 Total data size 1 7 KB 1 743 Bytes Destination pane H Space available on destination 1 GB 1 057 349 696 Bytes el 9 On the next page of the wizard confirm the operation by selecting the appropriate option eee eee een 10 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 220 11 Affer completing the operation close the wizard and then reboot the computer This operation can also be accomplished under Windows File Transfer Wizard To restore separate file
264. opriate checkbox to accept If you do not agree with any conditions stated there you won t be able to use the program 3 Once you accept the agreement you will see the Universal Application Launcher Launch P2P Adjust OS Wizard Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 265 Our WinPE 2 1 based environment offers excellent hardware support However in case it doesn t have a driver for your disk controller your hard disks will be unavailable Please consult the Adding specific drivers scenario to know how to tackle this issue The Vizard has faded to find any OS that can be modiied Please note the Viren can only work with Mhcroeoit Vifindows 2000 and later Close i Depenckng on your stem configuration and hardware some diske can be unayveeable for the program 4 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 5 From the list of all found Windows based operating systems if several select one you need to adjust to your new hardware If you re willing to adjust them alll just re launch this wizard for each Local Disk D3 No label 4 8GB A The wizard can only work with Microsoft Windows 2000 and later operating systems 6 Choose whether you re going to add drivers for the new hardware to the selected operating system or not and the way it s to be done Actually you ve got three options e Upload drivers automatically from the provided driver repository Generally tog
265. opying of data from the corrupted system disk to another hard diSKk ssssssessssssrrrrreseeessrsrrrrrerssrrrree 208 Burning of data from the corrupted system disk to CD DVD saesssssssreessesssrrtrrrresssrsttrrrressssrtererreseseererereesss 211 Copying of data from a backup to the corrupted system partition esseessseessssrrreseesssrrrrrereesssrrrrrreesesrsreee 214 Restoring separate files and folders from a ACKUP sssssesssssrrressessrsrrrrrressssrttttressssstttrrressssstererssssseeerreressss 217 Rese ed gio ilo een ee T er ete ee 223 Creating a new partition to detach operating system from the rest Of CATA cccecceceessseeeeccseseeeeeeees 223 Increasing size of a system partition by taking Unused space of an adjacent partition eee 225 Increasing size of a system partition by taking unused space from ANY Other ccecccccceceeeeseeeeceseeeeeeees 227 Shrinking a system partition to increase size of a data partition ssssssssrreessessssrrrrereessssrrrrreesesserreereeeses 230 Re ZNO DOINONS OrAPOIS BOOT GC ONIO reenn E EE OEA NA A CTA 234 Creating DUG BOOT SVSIGINS ainceiciirrcionsi ni E a i a A 236 FOR WING OWS COMPUTES S arasen e a a a 236 System Migration and Virtualization SCENATIOS sccessccsesccesccescccssccesccesccnsccescccesccesceesceees 246 Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 8 Migrating system to another hard disk Clone HDD eessssssssssesereeeesessessssssseeserer
266. or partition then select Move Resize Partition Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 260 Powe kerte Parton Convert File System TIE Change Volume Label Hide Partition Mark Partition as Active aE p Make Partition Logical Change Cluster Size Change Serial Number Change Partition ID E Downgrade NTFS version Wipe Partition Basic GPT Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Clear Free Space Local Disk Unallocated Test Surface C lee MB Not formatied OEM se TE oe G8 _ WB Check File system Integrity SSS Edit Wiew Sectors Local Disk t a i 444 ME NTFS meet Properties ME NTFS TFS FA F lin Baz Uru b mune Ext sar Mets E T2 B rare F B2 T Ext Liras E Rees M E In case you ve got more than two partitions on the disk and the required space donor is not adjacent to the system partition you can still use this A N scenario by consecutively redistributing free space between all partitions involved in the operation 4 Inthe opened dialog drag and drop the left edge of the partition to the right to release the required amount of the free space displayed in aqua green You can also do it manually by entering the exact size of free space b Are you sure you want to move resize volume You ae about to move resize NTFS volume Privet
267. or such system dependent modules as Hot Processing Copy Operations Hard drive duplication nowadays is becoming highly popular among PC users That is due to some definite advantages it can offer First of all many people clone hard disks just to back Up data for security reasons The present day copy utilities enable to successfully transfer all on disk information including standard bootstrap code and other system service structures thus maintaining the operating system s working capability In case of a system malfunction the user can get the system back on track in minutes No additional configuration is required what is very convenient The second possible application is the upgrade of a hard disk to a new one The capacity of a modern hard drive doubles every two years thus opening up new possibilities for software developers As a result programs become more complicated and require considerable amount of free soace One day the user realizes that there is no more free space left on the hard disk and the only way out is to upgrade Usually that means that besides purchasing a new hard disk the user is to face a large re installation procedure spanning several days of tedious work But all of this can be avoided just by copying the contents of the old hard disk to a new one proportionally resizing the partitions And the last but not least is the copying of hard disks for cloning purposes It may be of great use when setting up similar co
268. or system process terminated unexpectedly with a sta tus of Ox ci system has been shut down All the mentioned above operations can also be accomplished with the WinPE recovery environment 11 Install Windows XP on the newly created partition We won t go into details as for its installation as you can find all the necessary information in documentation that comes with the product However to avoid any problems we consider it necessary to draw your attention on the following issues You need a bootable distributive CD of Windows XP to install it To automatically start your computer from this CD make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD first or press F12 during startup to select a bootable device Do not forget to select the newly created partition as destination hows the existing yn this computer H ARROW A N Installation of Windows XP will make Windows Vista non bootable Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 243 12 Launch the Boot Manager Setup wizard As your Windows Vista is non bootable any more you need to install our program once again but this time in Windows XP to activate Boot Manager A N To avoid double installation please use our WinPE recovery environment to activate Boot Manager 13 Click Boot Management and then select Boot Manager in the Express Launcher 14 Set up the Boot Manager wizard The most relevant option here is the possibili
269. ordinary physical disk thus opening up all functionality available for physical disks to virtual e P2V Copy to migrate a Win2K physical system to a virtual environment in the online mode e P2V Restore to migrate a Win2K physical system backed up with a Paragon disaster recovery tool to a virtual environment e P2V Adjust OS to recover the startup ability after unsuccessful virtualization with a 3rd party Tool e Support for major virtualization software vendors including Microsoft Virtual PC Microsoft Virtual Server Microsoft Hyper V VMware Workstation VMware Fusion VMware ESX Server e Next generation Adaptive Restore P2P Adjust OS to successfully migrate a Win2K physical system to a different hardware platform P2P by allowing automatic injection of all required drivers and the other actions crucial for a migration of this kind e Easy Partition Resize to resize partitions directly on the Disk Map with the drag and drop technique e Express Create Partition Wizard to create a new partition in the most appropriate place of a hard disk format it to NTFS and then make it available in the system by assigning a drive letter e Express Resize Partitions Wizard to increase free soace on one partition by up taking the Unused space of an adjacent partition of a hard disk including partitions of Apple Boot Camp e Safe Defragmentation Mode to guarantee data loss free defragmentation of any version of NTFS and FAT Copyright
270. ored in log files To prepare a log files package please do the following 1 Once you accept the agreement you will see the Universal Application Launcher Click Log Saver 2 Inthe opened dialog browse for the required location of the log files package or manually provide a full path to it Click Collect to initiate the operation Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 210 Path to the larget mp file Browse a Log files do not contain any confidential information on the operating system A N settings or the user documents Connecting Virtual Disks to a Virtual Machine With our program you can only create virtual disks not virtual machines Thus to work with your virtualized system first you need to connect its virtual disk to a virtual machine Actually you ve got two options e Connect the virtual disk to an existing virtual machine e Connect the virtual disk to a new virtual machine Connecting virtual disks to an existing virtual machine For VMware Workstation To connect a VMware Workstation virtual disk to an existing virtual machine please do the following 1 Open an existing VMware Workstation virtual machine Windows Vista TEST State Powered off Guest 05 Windeas Yeta Location C Wsers Administrator Doouments Wir tua Machines Windows Vista TEST Windows Vista TEST vinx Version Workstation 6 5 virtual machine Commands Devices Options Power on thes virtual mach
271. ork connection under Linux A If you are going to use network resources first launch the Network Configuration Wizard to establish a network connection e Log Saver helps to collect and send the necessary log files to the Technical Support e View the mounted partitions the list of all mounted partitions will be displayed The Linux DOS recovery environment assigns drive letters to partitions the way it is done in DOS i e one after another primary partitions at first Thus mounted partitions may have different drive letters from Windows e Eject CD DVD e Command Line allows experienced users to execute any operation e Reboot the computer e Power off the computer To move within the menu please use the arrow keys of the computer keyboard Safe Mode When the Safe mode is selected the PTS DOS launch menu appears It has nearly the same functionality as for the Normal mode except the Network Configurator and Log Saver commands Besides due to certain limitations of the PTS DOS environment there is no possibility to burn CD DVD discs Low Graphics Safe Mode When the Low Graphics mode is selected the PTS DOS launch menu appears It has the same functionality and looks similar to the Safe mode but graphically simpler Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 28 Hard Disk Hanager 7418 You can create delete and Simple Restore Hizard format hard disk partitions One Button Copy Hizard using th
272. ot specifying the percentage of sectors to check Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 130 Wipe parameters Mask 00 Pass count 1 E Mask 00 Pass count 1 Mask 00 Passcout 1 C Mask 00 Pascoe 7 E Fas count ler he aoup d pation 1 5 F Very wipe results Percentage of sectors to check 1 co e Revise your changes This page informs on all the actions to be made in the wizard in a bright graphical form Your hard dsk before the changes arc VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev A BE 217 GE NTFS Your hard disk after the changes f are Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Wizard Result After the operation is completed you can see a well informative summary page providing structurally divided in depth information on all the actions made in the wizard Hard Disk Info foal Hard Disk Basic GPT Hard Desk 2 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev Capacity 570GB General Info Object Local Giese 7 Free Space Only Ne E Start Time 12 30 2009 24 12 AM End Time 12 30 2009 2 40 51 AM Algorithm Info Disian Wina meka L Name The program also enables to store the resulted report To do that just press the Save button and choose the exact location in the opened dialog Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 131 To make sure that all on disk data is irreversibly destroyed call the
273. ou can browse it to specify a more exact location for your backup image Mame Gre Daie D Paragon FT Pimaster paagonsoiwae com Backup Edit the archive name if necessary Pleese spec y the archive mame Archive name wil be used as a subfodder where backup data fies wil be stoned Archive details Archive name ere 03050907 1001085 Estimated archive size 4 4 GB Spore svealable on backup destination 33 GB Add comments to your backup describing its contents Pease enter a shot comment to descibe the achwa F A Ho comment Choose whether to accomplish the operation immediately set a time table for it or generate a script On the Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 160 This operation can also be accomplished with the WinPE recovery A N environment Backing up a dual boot Mac to an external USB drive To back up a dual boot Mac Mac OS X and Windows XP Vista 7 and then place the resulted image to an external USB drive please do the following 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Recovery Media Builder can help you prepare the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery environment either on a CD DVD disc or a thumb drive To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD
274. ove this restriction that in its turn might result in some boot problems e Partition size There is no restriction on size of the future partition merely depending on space available on the hard disk If there is not enough free space in one block the wizard enables to redistribute free space joining all free soace blocks together into one united block and moving partitions when necessary If the total amount of free space is still not enough it is possible to split a fragment of soace from one of the existing partitions thus resizing It Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 10 Your hard disk before the changes Basic GPT Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dew i g Unallocated Your hard disk after the changes Basic GPT Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual SCSI Disk Dev Mew volume cuTent sre ig 565 2 GE Min Volume size O Bytes a Max Volume Size 569 8 GB If a partition to resize is locked and cannot be processed the wizard makes A N the system reboot to create the partition and then automatically boots the system again The rebooting mechanism is different for different versions of Windows You can also choose whether the future partition will be primary or logical by marking the appropriate checkbox e Partition properties On the next page of the wizard you can set a number of additional parameters Your hed dsk sher ihe changes Basic GPT Ha
275. p Tasks G Back ae ee Starting the Sector Backup Wizard to create an archive of a hard disk ack up Disk or Partition or separate partitions Figs One Button Copy Disk ad Back Up Files Starting the File Backup Wizard to create an archive of particular files and folders Starting the Manage Backup Capsule Wizard to create resize or A Manage Backup Capsule delete the backup capsule Starting the Restore Wizard to restore a hard disk separate partition or files from the backup image WS P2P Adjust OS Starting the P2P Adjust OS Wizard to make your system bootable on different hardware Virtualization Tasks P2V Copy Starting the P2V Copy Wizard to migrate a Win2K physical system to a virtual environment in the online mode PIV Restore Starting the P2V Restore Wizard to migrate a Win2K physical system a backed up with a Paragon disaster recovery tool to a virtual environment Starting the P2V Adjust OS Wizard to recover the startup ability after unsuccessful virtualization with a 3rd party tool Tools m ee eee Starting the File Transfer Wizard to transfer data from any media File Transfer Wizard Besides if provides access to Paragon backups as regular folders to browse through their contents or copy required files P2V Adjust OS Starting the Boot Manager Setup Wizard to easily manage several operating systems on one computer i Boot Manager Wizard Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Softwa
276. pe to make If available for your operating system Modify file system parameters make active inactive hide unhide change serial number partition ID volume label etc Install New OS Wizard to make a system ready to install a new operating system Undelete Partitions Wizard to recover an accidentally deleted partition File System Optimization Facilities 27 defragmentation strategies available to defragment FAT and NTFS file systems MFT defragmentation and shrinking fo improve performance of NTFS Safe Defragmentation Mode to guarantee data loss free defragmentation of any version of NTFS and FAT Low free space defragmentation less than 1 of the free soace required to successfully defragment almost full disks Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 15 Defragmentation is accomplished with a separate component called Paragon Total Defrag To know more on the subject please consult its help Wipe Facilities e Data wiping to successfully destroy all on disk information including the standard bootstrap code and other system service structures e Free space clearing to destroy any remnants of deleted files directories left on disk without affecting the used data Automatization Facilities e Task scheduling to automate routine operations It can be particularly effective when you have to repeat a sequence of actions on a regular basis Scheduling is only available for the Windows insta
277. pes of backup images created with the program It provides easy to understand instructions to configure and perform all the necessary settings Moreover you can get an in depth description to any setting control or field of the wizard just by clicking the hint button and then the object you need Startup There are several ways to start the Restore Wizard Express Launcher e Click the Backup and Recovery button and then select Restore Launcher e Inthe Main Menu select Wizards gt Restore e On the Common Tasks Bar click the Restore item of the Wizards menu e Inthe Toolbar click the Restore Wizard button Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the restore operation e A backup image to be restored The Browse for Archive page enables to find a backup image you need By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 87 Typa Creation Date Source Object Sum i F 9 2 2009 50609 AM Fiefevel Archive 4 KE E 9 2 2009 2 33 00 AM Local Disk C 499 968 FF 9 2 2009 22101 AM Basic Hard Disk 1 WMiwane VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dav 10 G8 F Archive File Details Backup date 5 2 2009 5 06 03 AM Total size 4 KB 4 096 Bytes Archive size 445 Bytes He G farc_doc FLODDOOD0O00 00000000 archive pfi Base archive To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required
278. pied sofar 223 9 Mb Read so far 276 0 Mb 23 0 Mbys To copy L 6Gb White so far 276 0 Mbd27 6 Mb s Overall progress ETT l Restore Disk 0 irom iibe Jar 27050814520967 Nar 27050814520967 1 PBF Opening archive arm _ 27030814520907 1 0000p 000 Restore Primary partition 0 disk 0 from file Jarc 27050814520967 Mar 27050814520967 1_0000p 000 Data writing 10 After completing the operation close the wizard and reboot the computer This operation can also be accomplished with the WinPE recovery environment To make a Win2K operating system bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Restoring a system partition from external media CD DVD Let s assume that your computer fails to boot because of a virus attack or corruption of some system critical files But you ve got a backup of your system partition on a bootable DVD disc That s just enough to easily get your system back on track again To restore your system partition from a backup image located on CD DVD when the current OS is down please do the following 1 Insert a CD DVD disc containing the previously prepared backup image into a CD DVD drive the BIOS must be enabled to boot the system from the CD DVD device This scenario implies that you have got a bootable archive on your CD DVD AN In case the backup image is stored on several CD DVD disks please insert the first one 2 Re
279. plete the P2P Adiust OS Wizard Hard Disk Optimization To defragment an NTFS or FAT partition please do the following Express Launcher You must have administrator s privileges to accomplish defragmentation of the AN system partition 1 Click the Security and Optimization button and then select Defragment Partition 2 Inthe main window select a partition you want to defragment on the Disk Map New Volume F 21 2 GB NTFS 1 Boac Hard isk 1 VMware PS Disk Der Local Disk E Free 147368 jeated 268 3GB NTFS 231 6 GE 3 Launch the Defragment Partition dialog by calling the popup menu for the selected partition right click of the mouse button and then selecting the menu item Defragment Partition Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 268 Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Ksk Dev Vista C i mm a iila 1c 152 7 GB NTFS rel Analyze Fragmentation P Defragment Partition Basic Hard Disk 1 VM Defragment MET Compact MFT Test Surface Local Disk E 268 3 GB NTFS Rasic GPT Hard Disk E E ns E aT F Check File Sy gter Integrity lt a wo a4 Properties UwB 4 Inthe opened dialog define settings of the operation To improve the performance we recommend you to mark the Do not save content of the Pagefile sys or and Hiberfile sys checkbox as these files are only needed for the current Windows session Defrag
280. port button to see a well informative summary page The program also enables to store the resulted report To do that just press the Save button and choose the exact location in the opened dialog i Reporting Repon Paragon Boot Conectors Repon Operations perornnd Operation 1 Change drive leners Partition tangeted Hard disk 0 Partition 0 Info System Root folder is Status Successful Date and Time 2009 Jan 14 Wed 16 14 16 13 Click the Finish button to close Boot Corrector 14 Reboot the computer Restoring a hard disk from the bootable Backup Capsule Let s assume that your computer fails to boot because of a virus attack or corruption of some system critical files But you ve got the bootable backup capsule containing a backup of your hard disk That s just enough to easily get your system back on track again To restore your hard disk from a backup image contained in the backup capsule when the current OS is down please do the following 1 Start up the computer from the bootable backup capsule By default the program offers to use the Fl hot key to boot from it amp Floppy disk Hain recovery JA Hin XP HinxP environment AC A Safe Mode Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 186 A N This scenario implies that the backup capsule is bootable 2 In the boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment more preferable or Safe Mode to use the PT
281. pplementary technique called Differential Sector Backup A differential archive only contains data changed since the time of creating a full archive which forms a base or a parental image in this case thus considerably saving your system resources It is realized by the exact bit wise comparison of the previous partition s data saved in the parental image with the current data that is actually the partition itself To restore this kind of backup you will require a full image and one of its differentials what is very convenient Differential Base to a Sector Backup Sunday Monday Tuesday Saturday Full Sector Backup Monday restore point st Tuesday restore point Saturday restore point OO IAN This function is only available for single primary and logical partitions Full and Incremental File Backups A full file based archive only contains files and folders It is really efficient when backing up an e mail database or particular documents as no redundant data is processed But if you care about Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 32 maintaining a files history you can benefit from one more supplementary technique called Incremental File Backup An incremental archive only contains data changed since the time of creating a full or incremental file based archive It is smaller and takes less time to create but you will require the initial full image and all of its increments to restore
282. r accept o A reconsider the changes Please note that F you accept the changes the wizard val physically partam al the neccessary operations and vall not be possible to undo the changes It may take some ima bo apply the changes You may also be asked lo restart pour computer Guning this Process Would you like to apply your changes O No let me reconsider 6 That s basically it By clicking the Next button the wizard will start modifying your disk layout If you ve got to do with the system partition resize like we do in our case you will be asked to restart your computer in a special boot up mode to accomplish the operation So click the appropriate button to agree System restart i required to complete the operation What would pou like to do The operation Redistribute partitions needs excise access to the volume C and cannot be completed vathoul system restat After restat the operation wil continue in boot ime mode Do not turn off the computer until the operation completes Please confirm restart of pour computer The operation vall be continued alter Scher restan Manually close uted hies and retry the operation 7 Inthe Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out at the moment SubOperation progress Redistribute partitions SS SSS Work timeoo 01 15 Time to finishoo 00 05 Done 0 77 Mb Read 72 Hb 4 0 Mb s All Mb Wri
283. racle databases located on multiple volumes the way it is recommended by Microsoft to improve the level of database performance and reliability Thus providing 100 percent data consistency To use VSS it is necessary to have a mounted 300 MB NTFS partition Dynamic Disks As you probably know MS DOS Microsoft Windows 95 98 Me NT 2000 XP Vista Server 2003 2008 support four primary partitions per physical hard disk one of which can be extended Certainly there is the possibility to create logical drives within the extended partition Such types of disks are called basic Windows XP Professional Windows 2000 Windows Vista and Windows Server 2003 2008 follow the same strategy You can have a maximum of four primary partitions one of which can be an extended partition with logical drives However these operating systems also introduce a new disk configuration type dynamic disk which must be understood to effectively configure and manage hard disks Dynamic disk is a physical disk that doesn t use partitions or logical drives Instead it contains only dynamic volumes Regardless of what format you use for the file system only Win2K computers can access dynamic volumes directly However computers that aren t running Win2K can access the dynamic volumes remotely when connected to the shared folders over the network Dynamic disks can co exist on a system with basic disks The only limitation is that you cannot mix Basic and Dynamic disks on t
284. ragon Engine Copyright Copyright 1888 2008 Paragon Technologie GabH All rights reserved Please walt Universal File Systes Driver initialization Getting partitions info Flushing systern buffers please wait Restore Primary partition disk 0 from file G arc_sustem arc_susten PBF Data writing To avold data loss please do not reset or turn off the computer Operation in progress press ESC or Ctrl C to interrupt operation After completing the operation the program will automatically reboot the computer This operation can also be accomplished with the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery environments To make a Win2K operating system bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 199 Restoring a dual boot Mac from an external USB drive Let s assume that your Mac fails to boot because of a hard disk malfunction But you ve got a backup of your hard disk on an external USB drive Just replace the failed disk with a new one and carry out a bare metal restore To restore a dual boot Mac from a backup image located on an external USB drive please do the following 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Recovery Media Builder can help you prepare the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery environment either on a CD DVD disc or a thumb drive To automatically boot from the recove
285. ration dependency options Virtual mode options File system conversion options Cop Beckup exciuce options Fle Backup exclude options He Backup incuode optons Log fies options Wipe ootiers rhe Dalasa Fis ay wi Lalea fiar ppi Diea fa eer a Dalasa jhar wpd Dasa fhar wpa eles fer pos Leisa fhe wks Dasa fiber mag Dalsia fiber In this section you can find a lot of ready made include filters to effectively control contents of your file based backup images Please note by selecting certain filters you specify what data will be processed during file based backup operations thus you automatically ignore files that do not match so they won t be added fo the resulted archives Anyway you ve got the option to create your own filfer by clicking the Add category button Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 72 Name Description You can use wikicands and as file name mask Wildcards ae In the opened dialog the program allows the user to define the following parameters e Name Give fo the filter any name you like but try fo use an informative one e Filter Press the Browse button to select files or folders you would like to be excluded or specify a filter mask by using or wildcards e Description Add a short description to the filter not to miss it Up later Click the OK button and you will get a new item on the list of filters
286. rd Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev raion ypa kisi 7 i Wiles ie i koum AoA hen OUTA Pasig tha folowing dave latter E Partition type From the pull down list select a file system the newly created partition will be formatted to otherwise the partition will remain unformatted so that if will not be ready to use Volume label Enter a label for the selected partition in this textual field It is an irrelevant parameter usually used for drive identification Surface test level Define the level of the surface check to make the program find bad and unstable sectors and mark them unusable in the file system metadata Dialog Setup Initially the program suggests some consistent values for all parameters In most cases you can just press the Yes button to confirm the operation Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 102 2 eae Are you sure you want lo create a new partition on disk 37 You are about fo create a new partition in Unallocated 19 9 GB area Pease select sit position and ile sysiem of the new partition Basic Hand Dick 3 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev Create new partition as Primary partition y Please specify new partion sze 2479 gt MB 20479 MB Please specify size of free space before the partition 0 OMB 20 465 MB Please specify size of free space aier ihe patton 0 OMB 20 472 MB Please saadi file sysiem lor new parti
287. re Group All rights reserved 5 Starting the Install New OS Wizard to install a new operating system News and Documentation Launching the help system you can also do it by pressing F1 Opening the page which contains information about the program Si About Hard Disk Manager This page will be displayed in the Explorer Bar es ae Opening a brief review on the Paragon Scripting Language Disk Map The Disk Map is displayed in the Explorer Bar when the Disk View tab is selected It is located either at the top or at the bottom of the window depending on the state of the Disk Map Location option Main Menu View gt Disk Map Location As the name infers the Disk Map displays the layout of physical and logical disks Physical disks are represented with rectangle bars that contain small sized bars These small sized bars represent logical disks Their color depends on the file system of the appropriate partition Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev Local Disk C 499 3 GB NTFS Large sized bars display the following information about physical disks e Manufacturer e Model Small sized bars display the following information about logical disks e Serial number e Drive letter e Total size e File system Furthermore it is possible to estimate the used disk soace by looking at the size of the bar s shaded area The program offers to choose from several types of the disk layout scali
288. reeeeressssssssseeseesereeeeresssessss 246 Virtualizing the current system P2V sssesssesesessessssssseeseserreereresssssssssseeeesscreeeesesssssssssseesesecreereeeesesssssssseseeseeees 248 Virtualizing system from its backup image PZV essessesseresessssssssssessesecreeeesesssssssssseeseseceeeeeressssssssssseseeeeeees 251 Making system bootable on virtual hardware P2V Adjust OS esessssreesseessssrrrseesssssrerresessssrrrereeeseseeeeees 255 COmeciind Tyrnrvaradik COnmneci VD ernie a a N E E E A 257 REDONON OA YNGA K parean e eaea EE EEEE OOE O TAE OTET OOOO 259 Exchanging data between physical and virtual environMentS sessesessssssssssssssrerrrrreressesssssssseererreerreeees 262 Copying data from a parent virtual disk to one of its SAGDOSNONS vise tcctinnchoscaweaaserainicieteatamdiienerasasdenns 263 Migrating from one virtual environment to another V2V ausssssssssssesssrrrreseesssssrrrrreessssrrreresesssrrrrerreessrsrreres 264 Making system bootable on different hardware P2P Adjust OS ssseesssesssrrrreseesssrrrerrsesssrrrrrrreesesrreeee 264 Migrating from a virtual environment to physical VZP esssssssrreessesssrrrrrrsesssrsrrrrersssrrrrreresssssrtreresessrersreen 266 MIIMA VY COW Sis VIS eaen e E E EE AAT OOO alae 267 Hard DISK OTM ZATION nrs a A E 267 Hard DISK UTM ZA OI sananne E E E E E EE E ENAN 268 EXN SCenarios Tor WINPE aannaaien E T 270 ACARO SPECICATION OOO atte ena eta eos 270 COS I SV Ge aaen cen saccesecuniteince t
289. resessserees 168 Creating an increment to a full file DACKUP eeeesssssssssssssrsserreesssrrsereeersessssettresssssssettersssssserteesssssseererteereessseens 171 Backing uvo witho mar BaCKUD WZA I or E aie taeaesaueaeraa cae dacseieds 173 Creanga Cycle OGIO ly OCC KUO arrira n E TOE EOI EOT TA E OOE 174 Merging a full partition backup with one of its differentials essesssssseeeseesssrrrrrrseessssrrrrrrresssrrrrrrreeserrsseens 176 RECOVENY SC SIGN OS srn E A AER I E E TRS 179 FIXING MBR Cer COOOL YUS OAC Koe EEE REN E EE ATE EAE 179 FANO WNdOwWS STONU ODIY eraa E E E T Donaneaaceens 181 Restoring a hard disk from the bootable Backup Capsule ssssessssrrrresessssrrrrereesssrstrrrreessssrtterreessseeeeeeeeessss 185 Restoring a system partition from external media CD DVD sssssssssssesssrrrrrereesssrsrrrreressssrcrreresssseseerereessss 188 Restoring a system partition from a network drive essssssseersrreeessesssesrreesssssrettteessessseeteeresssseerteerssssseeeereesesse 191 Restoring a system partition from a IOC GI diVE eeesssssreessesssrrrrressssrrrtreressssssttterrsssssstetrresssestetereeesssssseereeeeeee 195 Restoring a dual boot Mac from an external USB drive eessesssssssssrserrsesserrerrreeseesrresrreersssseerteerssssseerreeresess 199 RESTON aie NCE NnNenN oraaa n E E O EE OO EE AE EN EEE E NT 202 Restoring q file increment to a partition DOCK UD esssesssessesrsrreeessssssecrteesssssreettersrsssseeteerssssseetteessessseseereesese 204 C
290. rtition for the merge operation the contents of which will be placed in a folder on the resulted joined partition By default the Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 110 program offers an easy to understand folder name to store files of the second partition which however can be customized Sesc an piacenti partition to merge wih the target partition This partition wil be merged to the one you have selected on the previous page The content of the second partition wil be placed in a folder inside the resulting A h me pani Basic Had Ksk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Ask Der Local Disk C RS 257 9GENTFS opecty a folder name to keep content of the selected partition Folder Name menged_parttion coment Be particularly careful when selecting system partitions to process since the A N incorrect order in which two partitions have been chosen will result in inability to boot the operating system Result After the operation is completed the disk soace of the two adjacent partitions will be consolidated Redistributing Unused Space between Partitions This operation can be accomplished either with the Express Resize Partitions Wizard or the Redistriboute Free Space Wizard Express Resize Partitions Wizard The Express Resize Partitions Wizard enables to easily increase free soace on one partition by up taking the unused space of an adjacent partition of your hard disk Start
291. rtual S SCS Disk Dev a Local Disk C 499 9 GB NTFS hard disk copy Basic Hard ask 3 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SiS Kk Liev i g Local Disk 7 Copy al sectors one to one Palom incremental copy Resize options Ramove free blocks between partions J Copy data and resize parbheons proportionally Operation wall startin 2 sec There are a number of options you can modify e HDD raw copy to copy the hard disk in the sector by sector mode thus ignoring its information structure e g unallocated space or unused sectors of existing partitions will be processed as well This can help to avoid problems with hidden data created by certain applications or the system administrator However it will take more time to accomplish the operation e Partition raw copy to copy the on disk partitions in the sector by sector mode to successfully process unknown file systems However it is not recommended to enable this option when working with supported file systems as it fakes more time to accomplish the operation e Perform incremental copy to only copy changes on the hard disk from the moment of the last copy operation The program will perform Comparison between a previous copy of the hard disk and its current state Only sectors that are different will be updated thus considerably decreasing the amount of data to write e Change masks for files to exclude from copy to manage contents of the resulted duplicate By default the program w
292. ry media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Connect an external USB drive to the computer 3 Restart the computer 4 In the boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment since It s the only mode that enables to work with USB devices f Normal Mode Hain recovery amp Safe Hode emironnent d Low Graphics Safe Mode Floppy disk amp Hard disk H KER amp Find OSes on your hard disks A By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period 5 In the Linux launch menu select the Simple Restore Wizard Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 200 A You can create delete and format hard disk Paragon Hard Disk Manager partitions using Paragon Hard Disk Manager which will stan now Upon the stan please select the drive and one of its partitions or its ree space Then activate the Partition pull down menu and select one of One Button Copy Wizard the partitioning operations Simple Restor Wizard Wipe Wirard Express Rese Wizard File Transfer Wizard Boot Corrector Jer Network Configurator Log Saver Eject CD DVD Stat the command line 6 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 7 On the What to Restore page click the standard browse button to find the required archive When done double click on it to select Select archive Ar hive tikes i
293. s The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Remove Drive Letter In order to Un mount a partition you should take the following steps Launcher l 2 A Select a partition on the Disk Map Call the Remove Drive Letter dialog to define appropriate settings There are several ways to do it Select in the Main Menu Partition gt Remove Drive Letter Call the popup menu for the selected partition right click of the Mouse button on the Disk Map then select the menu item Remove Drive Letter The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Modifying drive letter of the system partition will result in inability to boot the operating system After having processed partitions with installed software some programs may Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 142 not run properly Downgrade NTFS Version With our program you can decrease version of an existing NTFS partition This feature can be particularly useful when for instance dealing with different versions of the Windows NT family operating systems In order to start the operation you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Call the Downgrade NTFS Version dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it e Select in the Main menu Partition gt Modify gt Downgrade NTFS Version e On the Explorer bar click on the current
294. s 05 2 HPFS fie system Other funkisted file system To begin search cick Next e A partition to undelete if several By default the program searches records of any deleted partition ever existed on the selected block of free soace So you can get several partitions to choose from f Search deleted pattions fram sector 40 to sector 27i The fodowing partitions have been found Fie system Type Capacity Used Space 4 Used Stop search Most likely the required partition will be found first If so you may abort the search operation by pressing the Stop search button Result After the operation is completed you receive a fully functional partition Installing a New Operating System Getting your computer ready to install a new operating system especially when it is going to be an additional OS in the system is a rather complicated task that implies quite a number of operations from allocating space to create a new partition resize redistribution of free soace to formatting of the newly created partition to a particular file system and checking Its surface for bad sectors to Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 115 avoid possible data loss Operating systems today are being supplied with basic tools of partitioning that only enable to create a partition in case there is enough unallocated space on the disk and then format it to the specified file system type Our program offers a
295. s 144 CHS CK FIIS SY SHSM MAT SOP Veia aa O E O SA 144 CHIC CK ATC AV GCC ainara A T O T E ET OA 145 CHeEcCk RECOVERY DISC Serian tina aE E TETTEN AO EOE OEE ETOT OEE TTN 147 EAIM VIEW SGC O essenin opa in n a N E sien 147 SS Le idl Bree FIO ai E E A N E E E E es eee ee 148 VI MO OG isan N R ANE E E R E eeaeevenen eos 150 MV OIG GL SCENAS sss nn E E EE ess 150 BGCKUD SCOMGIIOS pacon aT 150 CHS CMO INS BAC KU C GP UIG orner a E E NA T eee E 150 Backing up a hard disk or partition to the Backup Capsule aesessssscsessesssssrrrereessrsrtrrressssssrrrereesssseerereeesses 152 Backing up a hard disk or partition to external media CD DVD esessesssrsrrresessssrrrrreresseserrreressssesrrrereeesss 154 Backing up a hard disk or partition to a network drive essssssesesssssrreessessssrrerereesssrsttrrrressssterrrressssrerrereeees 155 Backing up a hard disk or partition to an FIP SEV CSM esssssreeeseesssrrcrrrreessssrtrrrrresssrstrereeessestetereessssereerereesss 158 Backing up a dual boot Mac to an external USB driv eseseesssseseesereerreresessssssseesrsecreereressesssseseeeecreeeereeeee 160 Backing up files to a local mounted unmounted without drive letter assigned partition eseese 162 Creating a difterential tod t lparton OE CRUD seriero E OE A EON 165 Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved Creating an increment to a full partition OE CK UO ssseesseessssresessesssecrreessesrerrteessessseettressssssettresssssseattee
296. s a block of free soace adjoining its borders In our case it s between two logical disks So we need to move it To do that please select the first logical partition and then call the context menu for if right click of the mouse button to launch the Move Resize dialog Disk View Scheduled Tasks Move HKesce Partion Convert File System Mame Base Had Disk 0 Vhhram Wi Change Volume Label j Ea Disk 0 Remove Drive Letter E opioa E Hide Partition 3 E Extended Lam Make Partition Primary GP dee F E Unalocated Change Cluster Size TEMP G Change Serial Number bee E Base Hard Disk 1 VMware VI Change Partition ID BF Local Disk f Downgrade NTFS version wat Base GPT Hard Disk 2 Vwa EP Loca Desk 7 Wipe Partition GF Lnalocated Clear Free Space a 4 4 F Test Surface E E check Fie Sytem Integy Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VI Editie Sectors Properties Data F E E 200 G8 NTFS Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 229 6 At first shift the right edge of the partition to the right then do the same with the left edge Make sure the partition size has been left unchanged Are you sure you want to move resize volume F You are about to movereaize NTFS voume Data F Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev
297. s and folders from a backup image with the File Transfer Wizard please do the following Launcher 1 Call the popup menu for the required backup image right click of The mouse button in the Archive Database and then select the menu item Restore File from Archive Thus you automatically open it with the File Transfer Wizard Creation Date Source Object Size Flags a M2009 7 45 37 AM Fiedevel Archive 1356K p 3 9 2 2009 7 38 58 AM Filedevel Archive 1365K ke 3 Type amp 9 3 2009 3 57 21 AM Local Dsk 99 an Archive to the Database E 9 2 2009 5 24 27 AM Basic Hard Delete the Archive from the Database a IH S 2 2009 5 20 25 AM Hew Volume 9 2 2009 5 11 41 AM Fledevel Arc Y 9 2 2009 06 03 AM Aledevel Arc eg Incremental File Backup S2 2009 2 33 00 AM Local Disk ff W220 2201 AM Basic Hard L Restore Files Re hore File From Archive 5 m 2 Select files you want to copy and place them to Clipboard by pressing the left arrow button Clipboard Hame Sourne Path images 0 Users use Desktoo images Cam mages Total data size 412 KB 3 On the Select Destination Type choose the way the data will be stored Select the Save data to any local drive or a network share item There are several ways the Vizard can store your date Fiese select how would you like to save the data amp Save data to local network dives F Overwtte edsting files
298. s contained in the Archive Database if any Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 203 T Show all l amp fe ik Tye Creation Date Source Object Cse i IL 9 3 2009 7 10 36 4M Fletevel Archive 444 KB E 9 4 2009 3 5721 AM Local Disk 24GB E 9 2 2009 5 24 27 AM Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Vitual 5 SCS Disk Dev 10GB E 9 2 2009 5 20 25 AM New Volume F 24GB IF 9 2 2009 5 11 41 AM Fledevel Archive 113 1 KB F 9 2 2008 5 06 03 AM Filedevel Archive 4KE E 22008 2300 AM Local Disk C 499 9 GE E 9 2 2009 22101 AM Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Vitual 5 SCSI Disk Dev 10GB a F Switch to File Vien Archive File Details Backup date 9 9 2005 7 10 36 AM Total sire 444 KB 254 737 Bytes Archive size 3928 KB 402 229 Bytes Fie Cae images FL12893671014435157 srchive ph Base archive C arc_imagesFLOODDDO00RI00000000 archive ph To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description A To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter e By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Look in Archives 3 TXE Name Sie Date Archives G ak at disk S209 5
299. s differentials thus getting a new full partition archive please do the following Launcher 1 Click the Synthetic Backup item of the Wizards menu 2 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 On the Browse for Archive page you only need to specify the required differential archive The program then will automatically find its base image e By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of Images contained in the Archive Database if any Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 177 S Show al e amp be k Type Creation Date Source Object Size E 9 2 2009 2 27 01 AM Basie Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Dsk Dev i E 9 2 2009 5 24 27 AM Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev El F 9 2 2009 5 06 03 AM Filedavel Archive IF 9 2 2009 5 11 41 AM Fledevel Archive WW ee Sco ae AM a Lask 5 A A A APid ai Local Disk No label NTFS Total sze 24GB 33MB Free space 23GB Jarc imagpes d T_030909105713295 det_090909105713295 PBF To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description A Toknow more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties A N chapter e By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image
300. s reserved 158 Backing up a hard disk or partition to an FTP server To back up an entire hard disk or a separate partition and then place the resulted image to an FIP server please do the following Launcher 1 Click the Back up a Disk or Partition item of the Wizards menu any of the ways described earlier can also be used here 2 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 On the What to back up page mark the appropriate option opposite a hard disk s name or a partition s name depending on the chosen task Oick the check box next to any hard disk deve or partition you want to back up Name Tyre z A My Computer My Computer iil F Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev intemal Hard Desk Certs f First Hard Disk Track Fret Track P Mester Boot Record MBR Local Lisi i Hard Disk 1 WMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev First Hard Disk Track First Track GP Master Boot Record MBR EF Local Disk E Primary Gp Loca Disk 7 Primary CS Loca Disk 7 Primary GP Loca Disk 9 F Basic Hard Disk 2 Vitwane VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev The size of obiectis to back up 499 9 GB Estimated archive size 7 2 GB You ve got the option to modify the default backup settings by marking the appropriate checkbox on this page A 4 On the Backup Destination page select the Save data to FTP locations option By default the program will take
301. s very chapter General Layout When you start the program the first component that is disolayed is called the Launcher It enables to run wizards and dialogs to specify program settings to visualize the operating environment and the hard disk configuration The Launcher s window can be conditionally subdivided into several sections that differ in their purpose and functionality Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 42 h Walram eto Para OON Hard Disk Miar manh E lj ut aer Y ard Dis Bz Lolita bam be Se oe Tools SAIE Wizards Hard Disk P GARRETT LX PRI 2c E Basic GPT Hard Disk 2 VMware EP Local Disk 07 yea Viste C New Volume F J 138 7 GE NTFS Bi 3i2GB8 NTFS Local Disk E 263 3 GB NTFS 1 Main Menu 2 Tool Bar 3 Virtual Operations Bar 4 Common Tasks Bar 5 Explorer Bar 6 Disk Map 7 Partition List 8 Properties Bar Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 9 Legend Bar 10 Status Bar A number of panels offer similar functionality with a synchronized layout The program enables to conceal some of them to simplify the interface management All panels are separated by vertical and horizontal expandable sliders allowing the user to customize the screen layout Main Menu The Main Menu provides access to the entire functionality of the program The available functions are as
302. selected file system type Result After the operation is completed you receive a fully functional partition Available operation scenarios e Creating a new partition to detach operating system from the rest of data Formatting Partitions Any partition should contain some file system to be used for keeping data The process of installing a file system is commonly known as formatting A huge variety of file systems have been developed these days Supported File Systems The program provides the ability to format partitions of the following file systems FATI2 amp FAT16 FAT32 NTFS Ext2 Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 104 Ext3 Ext4 Linux Swap v 2 This operation can be accomplished either with the Format Partition Wizard or the Format Partition Dialog Wizard Startup There are several ways to start the Format Partition Wizard Express Launcher Click the Partitioning button and then select Format Partition Launcher e Inthe Main menu select Wizards gt Format Partition e On the Common Tasks bar click the Format Partition item of the Wizards menu Dialog Startup In order to start the operation you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Call the Format Partition Dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it e Select in the Main Menu Partition gt Format Partition e Call the popup menu for the
303. sic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev 9 2 2009 5 20 25 AM New Volume F 45 Fi 9 2 2009 5 11 41 AM Fledevel Archive 1137 22009 06002 AM Pletevel Archive Local Disk C My system backup No labe NTFS Tota sze 499 9 GE 856GB Free space 491 468 G arc_system arc_system_PBF To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter e By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Look in Archives G 7 EKKE Name Sine Date H mas YIA EAAS AM Sl arc_system 9 2 2009 2 41 04 AM arc_system 001 18GB 9 2 2009 2 41 04 AM 19G8 2200 237 32 AM 156 Byes M22009 247903 AM SEJRE SAAHA 2 41 04 AM 7 Local Disk C My system backup No labe NTFS Total sire 499 9GB 85GB Free space 491 4GB G arc_system arc_system PBF A To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter 4 The Archive Content page displays detailed information about the contents of the archive It includes a full description of properties about the partition In addition there is the possibility to modify backup settin
304. so be accomplished with the WinPE recovery A N environment Restoring separate files and folders from a backup The program provides a very convenient option to access backup archives and restore only data you need the so called selective restore functionality This operation can be accomplished either with the Restore Wizard File Transfer Wizard or Volume Explorer Restore Wizard To restore separate files and folders from a backup image with the Restore Wizard please do the following 1 Start up the computer from our WinPE recovery media Recovery Media Builder can help you prepare the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery environment either on a CD DVD disc or a thumb drive To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Once it has been loaded read the agreement and then mark the appropriate checkbox to accept Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 218 SS Press Page Up and Page Down to scroll the teat End User License agreement eT Heer PARAGON Technologie GmbH Syitemprogranmenng Reinsich yon Stephan Str 5 79100 Freiburg Germany YOu 8 eng user Eygu accepi the temma of the agreement click the check box below he ACCEDE the terms in the License Agreement Acent Decline A If you do not agree with any conditions stated there you won t be able to use the program 3 Once you accept the a
305. st point of this kind of backup e File backup to a sector image It is a Unique technology on the market so far that bridges two principally different approaches of the data backup the file based backup and the disk imaging backup With its helo you can now create a sector based backup of your system to get it back on track in minutes in case of a virus attack or a hardware malfunction and then just make file based incremental images to the previously created sector based backup to keep updated only information that is critical for you Thus you will considerably save your system resources e Cyclic backup to automate the backup of separate partitions It is an ideal option if you want to establish a self acting data protection system Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 13 Cyclic Backup is only available for the Windows installation of the program e Synthetic backup to change any property merge a given differential image with its full image split Un split compress de compress etc of an existing backup image without carrying out a physical backup operation e Bootable Backup Capsule to get the choice to launch the Linux or PTS DOS recovery environment every time you start up the computer With its helo you will be able to run utilities under Linux or PTS DOS and that way to get access to your hard disk for maintenance or recovery purposes This feature is only available for the Windows installation of
306. start the computer 3 Inthe boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment more preferable or Safe Mode to use the PTS DOS recovery environment in case you ve got problems with Linux Moreover you ve got the option to boot into the Low Graphics Safe Mode PTS DOS safe mode to cope with a serious hardware incompatibility In this case only the minimal set of drivers will be included like hard disk monitor and keyboard drivers This mode has simple graphics and a simple menu Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 189 d Safe Hode d Lou Graphics Safe Mode Floppy disk Hard disk H HBR Find OSes on your hard disks A By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period 4 In the PTS DOS launch menu select the Simple Restore Wizard You can find the same wizard in Linux as well A Provides Restore for hard disks parittions All Paragon Hard Disk Manager drives including NTFS are already mounted i as c d et tis possible to eject your t Simple Restore Wizard CDROM One Buton Copy Wizard Siart the command line keJ Reboot the computer 5 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 6 On the What to Restore page you can see a list of available images if several Most likely the required archive will be there too If not click the standard browse button to find it When you find your image do
307. stem bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Available operation scenarios e Restoring a hard disk from the bootable Backup Capsule e Restoring a system partition from external media CD DVD e Restoring a system partition from a network drive e Restoring a system partition from a local drive e Restoring a dual boot Mac from an external USB drive e Restoring a file increment e Restoring a file increment to a partition backup e Copying of data from the corrupted system disk to another hard disk e Burning of data from the corrupted system disk to CD DVD e Copying of data from a backup to the corrupted system partition e Restoring separate files and folders from a backup Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 9 Copy Tasks In this chapter you will find all the information necessary to make a copy of a hard disk or a separate partition Cloning Hard Disks You can clone a hard disk of any file system During the hard disk copying process the program moves controlling records of used partitioning scheme the bootstrap code and on disk partitions That s why this operation cannot be substituted by simply copying all on disk partitions The program offers two wizards that can help to clone a hard disk i e the Copy Hard Disk Wizard and the One Button Copy Wizard Both wizards provide nearly identical functionality but different in the work concept Copy Hard D
308. stem independence e You can place a backup image to a special secured place on the hard disk called the Backup Capsule that has an independent system layout e g a separate partition and will stay operable should the active file system be damaged To avoid an accidental removing or Unauthorized access of the backup data this partition is hidden and thus cannot be mounted in the operating system However it won t help you in case of a hardware malfunction e You can place a backup image to external media CD DVD to guarantee a high level of data protection as long as the backup media is kept secure Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 33 e You can place a backup image to a network drive to stand a better chance of success in case of a hard disk failure Moreover by storing it on a special purpose server you may be pretty sure nothing will happen to it e Finally you can place a backup image to an FIP server to provide a new level of system and data protection Known Issues on FIP 1 You need to check out yourself Windows Firewall or programs of this kind let our program work with the required port 21 by default 2 File backup and restore to from FIP including the selective restore functionality are not available 3 SSL login password encryption is not supported 4 You can browse an FIP server in the passive mode only 5 Parallel access to several FIP servers Is limited only one password for
309. sult the Viewing Image Properties chapter By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also disolay a short description of the selected image Lookin Local Disk C3 ggg Name S Date o fa E iarere 9 2 2009 22604 AM E S8KB IL200927 28AM a arc new pim 1K 9 2 2009 47610 AM are_new _0100p 000 972 7 KE 9 2 2009 2 21 02 AM a arc_new_O100o pim LIRR 5 2 2005 22102 AM are_new_0101p 000 43 1 MB 9 2 2009 2 91 10 AM a are new Diiia eden 41KR 9 7 7008 77 0R AM Mame Basic Hard Disk 1 Unknown Model Comment My hdd Type intemal Hard Disk Drive Tota sze 10GB Hie Cva new ae new PBF Moreover on this page you ve got the possibility to create new folders delete existing files folders or map network drives by clicking the appropriate buttons A To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter Result After the operation is completed you can see results of the check Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 147 Check Recovery Discs You ve got the ability to check whether backup media created with the program is 100 percent error free and ready to use The Check Recovery Disc Wizard will helo you do that Startup There are several ways to start the Check Recovery Disc Wizard Launcher e Inthe Main Menu select Tools gt Che
310. t Paragon Hard Disk Manager 2010 under Windows please click the Windows Start button and then select Programs gt Paragon Hard Disk Manager 2010 gt Paragon Hard Disk Manager modification so just to be on the safe side please make a backup of your The program provides wide opportunities in the field of hard disk structure data before carrying out any operation The first component that will be displayed is called the Express Launcher Thanks to a well thought out categorization and hint system it provides quick and easy access to wizards and utilities that we consider worth using on a regular basis With its help you can also start up the traditional launcher the help system or go to the program s home page Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 23 Partitioning Pa rt ti on n g What would you like to do Backup and Recovery Create Partition Crese p nen pation and set is properties Copying and Migration Format Partition Foma cuartitien to a fike system of your choise Note all date this patton coniens wi ba dastad Security and Optimization Delete Partition Delete misting partition and al data it contains Boot management Resize Partitions Move border of adiacent partitions of the same type Goth logical or both primary to receinbute space between them Noe thes wizard covers only bac resize soeranos E rere opersben cant be cecied out with Exqoress Resize Vicar please Support
311. t Record MBR EP Loca Disk E Primary E Loca Dik Primary Loca Disk 7 Primary Ge Local Disk f Primary F Basic Hard Disk 2 Vitware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev intemal Hard Desk Drs a The size of objects to back up 499 59 GB Estimated archive size 7 2 GB You ve got the option to modify the default backup settings by marking the appropriate checkbox on this page By default the program will take into account exclude filters set in the Settings dialog 4 On the Backup Destination page select the Burn the data to CD or DVD option Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved A 6 7 8 A N 155 There are several ways the Wizard can store your data Please select how wouid you like to save the archive Save data to the Backup Capsule Save data to local network dives Save data to physical partitions Save data to FTP locations Bum the daa to CD or DVD Select a recordable device on the list of available CD DVD devices and edit the archive name if necessary Select a recorder te bum archive images to Name Disc ipes a Gatian UYO ANY AL 71 AA CO AW RAW DVD WAW DVD RAM DVD R RW k CD Bumer Emulator CD R RW a OVO Burner Emulator DVD R RW Archive detalls Archive name BPOW0S0S Mo more than symbole and oniy in Engish Estimated archive size 4 4 GB Please take into account the Estimated archive size value It can give you a hint about the number of
312. t file completes its work e tisrecommended to use external commands programs in the following format Start wait program exe The wait option will help to start an application and wait until it completes its work This will guarantee that all included commands programs complete their execution before the batch file does This function is only available when the Hot Processing mode is enabled The program enables to set parameters for an executable file directly from the line However if the file path contains word gaps it is necessary to enclose it in quotes in order to make the program distinguish between the path and the used parameters Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 65 By clicking the link at the bottom of the window you can jump to the Hot Processing Options E Mail Options G Edit settings fa chide ti a nrg DA E mail options Pareiorung opbons Copy and backup options Spocky your o mall account options sag OO Ouigoing mail server SMTP eer emal aciness Ny ouigoing server requinss authentication actions he Specify e mail notification options Ma Send E Mail notihcation on apo OK Cancel This section contains a set of options that will be taken into account during the Send log files and Send e mail notification operations Outgoing mail server SMTP To send messages by using the built in mail client it is necessary to have access to a computer running
313. t to resore from Marne Type Sine he FE Archive File Level Archive 113 1 KB 115 869 Bytes B Bec 3 E So Users E user F databackupandrescu File 33 KB i databackupandescu File 13 5 KE restoresystemanddate File 23 9 KE restoresysiemanddata Fie 34 6 KB To continu cick Mex Data size io restore 46 5 KB A place to restore From the pull down list you can choose whether to restore contents of the backup image to its original location or specify some other one Restore files to Original localtion The files and fo eee place when they were arched from When soing far umea Sees your computer Leave edsting files Replace existing fies Besides if you select the Original location option you can additionally define whether to replace already existing files during the restore operation good for recovering presumably corrupted files or leave them intact good for recovering accidentally deleted files Sector Backup Restore Data to restore You ve got the option to restore not only the entire archive but separate items of it the so called selective restore functionality by marking checkboxes next to the data items you need Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 89 Please select one of the objectis to restore heme Type Pie system Siz Usad E Basic Hard Disk 1 Unknown Model intemal Hard Disk Deive 10GB Local Dek 7 Prmary Linu Swap 505 8 MB 4 H
314. t values of the parameters Estimated archive size and A N Space available on backup destination if the archive size exceeds the available space another drive needs to be selected 11 Add comments to your backup describing its contents a Archiv xt Comment Please enter backup comments to describe the archive Archive Img D0 pbi created 2008 06 05 13 42 39 12 Choose whether to accomplish the operation immediately or generate a script 13 On the Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process A This operation can also be accomplished with the WinPE recovery environment or under Windows Backing up files to a local mounted unmounted without drive letter assigned partition To back up required files or folders and then place the resulted image to a local mounted unmounted drive please do the following Launcher Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 163 1 Click the Back up Files item of the Wizards menu any of the ways described earlier can also be used here 2 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 On the What folders and files to back up page you can see a list of all partitions both mounted and unmounted available in the system Mark a checkbox opposite a file folder or even a whole partition to build up contents of the future backup image Chek the check bor next to
315. te 0 0 Hb 0 0 Mb s Overall progress SSS eT Quick data moving Flushing systems buffers please wait Modifying drive t on hard disk 0 Checking parameters Scanning dir structure Scanning data structure may be a few minutes step i step 2 Jo not reset or turn off your computer to avoid the data loss Iperation in progress press ESC or Ctrl C to interrupt operation Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 236 After completing the operation your computer will be automatically restarted back to Windows where you can see that your system partition is bigger now Creating Dual Boot Systems For Windows computers Release of Windows Vista has given a new impetus to the problem of establishing a dual boot system In this connection we decided to consider two the most frequently used situations a rank and file user may face i e Windows Vista Windows XP and Windows XP Windows Vista Please note that for reasons of better security and system independence these operating systems will be installed on different partitions That is why we need to hide the first system partition before installation of the second OS Windows Vista Windows XP Suppose you have got Windows Vista coming with your brand new computer Everything is great except one thing your favourite applications simply reject to work correctly on it Software updates are expected to release in the near f
316. te the disk soace which originally belongs to two adjacent partitions into a single larger partition The order in which two partitions have been chosen is important since all contents of the second selected partition will be placed in a folder on the resulted joined partition The program provides the ability to merge only NTFS FAT16 or FAT32 partitions Startup There are several ways to start the Merge Partitions Wizard Express Launcher e Click the Partitioning button and then select Merge Partitions Launcher e Inthe Main menu select Wizards gt Merge Partitions e On the Common Tasks bar click the Merge Partitions item of the Wizards menu Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e The partition to expand Select a partition the size of which you need to Increase by up taking contents of an adjacent partition if sm ly le a h Em T ine ia f B m ob E el d ya OT _ a D WS a TOU Cf Pa etl L a E Lose apsnoed ge PIDDE eee im Por TRG ge lS ms 0 a ae il Ea m as hl ad A ak ret P l Tn ga e I E z possibla to select only FAT FAT SZ or NTFS partitions Tou wil mot be able to oroceed further f no adiacent r a i partbons of these toes ae present on the disk Hasc Hard Ack U VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Lev dames W Local Disk C 2 9 GB NTFS P bwi Bp 217GB NTFS e The partition to merge with Choose the second pa
317. ted 9 2 2009 at 1207 47 PM Ariat at 1221 16 T Stated 9 2 2008 at 1221 18 PM Arsh at 123015 Started 52 2009 at 12 30 15 PM Arshad at 12 31 33 Stated 2 008 at 1231 39 PM Arighed at 12 41 47 Stated 5 2 2009 at 144 44 PM Ainished at 12 58 35 J Started 3 2 2005 at 1 06 03 PM Basic Herd Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dew OF Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev OF o C geo NTFS NTFS Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev Of Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev OH B Cems jorma Basic Hard Dak 2 VMware VMware Vetual S SCS Diek Dev Off Base Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Diak Dev OF BD Comes Unallocated IM FREE EE FREE Typical Scenarios This chapter lists a number of the most frequently used scenarios that may be accomplished with the program You can find here useful recommendations and descriptions of operations Backup Scenarios Creating the Backup Capsule Let us take a computer of a rank and file user who is most likely to have only one hard disk with only one partition the only partition is always system Suppose that there is enough free space on the hard disk to create the backup capsule as well It can be created with the Manage Backup Capsule Wizard Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 151 Launcher 1 Click the Manage Backup Capsule item of the Wizards menu any of
318. ted on the Disk Map e List of scheduled operations e List of scripts e List of archives e Volume Explorer utility e Disk Editor utility According to these categories the Explorer Bar has several tabs e Disk View which offers the user the following options Partition List to get a clear cut picture of the current state of the system hard disks partitions Disk Editor to view edit sectors of the selected partition hard disk Volume Explorer to browse and export contents of the selected partition hard disk Properties to view detailed information on the selected partition hard disk in the bright graphical form Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 53 You can switch between these three components by clicking tabs on the left A N side of the Explorer Bar e Scheduled Tasks which gives the user the possibility of browsing and editing scheduled operations and the program scripts e Archives which enables to manage the Archive Database e Help which contains the program help and general information on the product You can access the desired information by clicking on the appropriate tab The Explorer Bar is a fully functional embedded HTML browser which offers the possibility to address for example the company s website to look through important technical notes or download the latest updates without having to close the program The program help is also HTML oriented You can read it
319. tered parameters of the required operation you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Make sure the virtual mode of execution is enabled 2 Carry out with the program all operations you need to be scripted 3 Call the Generate Script dialog in the Main Menu Tools gt Generate Script Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 136 Setup Initially the program suggests some consistent values for all parameters In most cases you can just oress the Generate button to confirm the operation a cE Generate script Al vival operations you have made vil be witen to the scrip No operations wil be aniad Pease specty a name for the task scmpt file scrot_ A080S_ 125123443 pal J Addio Task List zl More options e Script file name and location By default the program offers to add the script to the Task List with a name containing its creation date and time Unmark the Add to Task List checkbox to define an exact location and a filename for the script file The default file extension that is reserved for scripting files is osl which however can be modified In addition there Is the possibility fo make further detailed settings although the default values will do in most cases To activate the advance mode you need to click the More options button at the foot of the dialog page so you will be able to define Please select script generation options Above to interact with the user Tum
320. the backup operation would take about 3 5 less time e Setimage file names automatically Mark the checkbox to make the program automatically set a file name for every volume of a complex backup image Otherwise you will need to do it manually during the backup operation e Compression level From the pull down list you can select the desired compression level for backup images that will be used by default e Enable image splitting Mark the checkbox to automatically split every backup image to volumes of a particular size Splitting images enables to tackle problems caused by a maximum file size AN limitation of some file systems e Maximum split size With the spinner control you can specify a maximum size for backup volumes Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 59 Partitioning Options Edit settings p a S Partitioning Options Enable 64 KE clusters for FAT 16 a nike e 74 bart al ee a Fia i 1 ra i Choose this option io enable 4 KB custers for FAT16 partitions Wah this setin E mi P na ip you wil be able to create FAT16 partitions wih capacity upto 4 GB Please note that only Vivinowe NT famiy aysteme will be able to access such partitions Lonhnmations if Ask for volume label before patton delete i n ra Fa ey Age conbmation when conveting FATTE to FATS2 Fie Backup exclude options Fie Backuo include options n Ppa ete z e a Wipes options GR E e This section co
321. the capacity needed for the backup If the wizard cannot find enough free space in one block it will redistribute free space joining all free soace blocks together into one united block and moving partitions if necessary If the total amount of free space is still not enough it is possible to split a fragment of soace from one of the existing partitions thus resizing it If the partition is locked and cannot be resized the wizard makes the system A N reboot to create the backup capsule and automatically boots the system again The rebooting mechanism is different for different versions of Windows Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 152 5 Activate the bootable recovery environment if needed With its help you will get the choice to boot directly from the backup capsule for maintenance or recovery purposes every time you start up the computer Abow to start recovery getem from backup capsule Time to display the backup capsule startup message 45 seconds Choose a hot key for starbup from the backup capsule Fi im Press F1 to start recovery from Backup Capsule Do not allow to start recovery system from backup capsule This operation will result in overwriting of the current MBR thus in case of having a third side boot manager it will be removed To avoid that you can A N save the current MBR with the help of the Edit View Sectors tool The backup capsule can only be bootable if it is locate
322. the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Recovery Media Builder can help you prepare the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery environment either on a CD DVD disc or a thumb drive To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Inthe boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment more preferable or Safe Mode to use the PTS DOS recovery environment in case you ve got problems with Linux Moreover you ve got the option to boot into the Low Graphics Safe Mode PTS DOS safe mode to cope with a serious hardware incompatibility In this case only the minimal set of drivers will be included like hard disk monitor and keyboard drivers This mode has simple graphics and a simple menu F Hormal Hode Main recovery amp Safe Hode environment d Low Graphics Safe Mode Floppy disk amp Hard disk H KER amp Find OSes on your hard disks A By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period 3 In the Linux launch menu select the File Transfer Wizard You can find the same wizard in PTS DOS as well Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 215 Ls f pan i A You can create delete and format hard disk B Paragon Hard Disk Manager partitions using Paragon Hard Disk mia Manager which will stan myw Upon ihe Simple Restore Wizard yan please select the drive and o
323. the latest point of this kind of backup Incremental Chain to a File Backup Sunday Monday Tuesday saturday Increment 1 Increment 2 E Increment n Monday restore point a Base File Backup Tuesday restore point Saturday restore point a File Increment to a Sector Backup File Increment to a Sector Backup is a unique technology on the market so far that bridges two principally different approaches of the data backup the file based backup and the sector based backup With its help you can now create a sector based backup of your system to get it back on track In minutes in case of a virus attack or a hardware malfunction and then just make file based incremental images to the previously created sector based backup to keep updated only information that is critical for you Thus you will considerably save your system resources Backup Storage Our program supports all present day techniques of storing backup images Let s take a closer look at them all fo understand what kind of storage Is able to provide better security e You can place a backup image to a local mounted or unmounted without drive letter assigned partition Despite the fact that it is the most convenient way try not to use it You can delete your backup just by accident or lose it as a result of a hardware malfunction or a virus attack e You can place a backup image to an external mounted storage to provide for a higher level of data protection and sy
324. the level of the surface check to make the program find bad and unstable sectors and mark them unusable in the file system metadata e The amount of sectors per boot This parameter is available exclusively for FATI 6 and FAT32 file systems Set the number of sectors to be reserved for the boot area on the partition with this spinner control e The amount of root entries This parameter is available exclusively for FAT16 file system Set the maximum amount of files directories to be placed in the Root Directory on the FATI 6 partition e The amount of sectors per cluster Define the Cluster Size for the formatted partition with this spinner control Number of available options depends on the selected file system type Result After the operation is completed you receive a fully functional partition formatted to the specified file system Deleting Partitions With the Delete Partition Wizard or the Delete Partition Dialog you can delete a partition on a hard disk partitioned with the DOS partitioning scheme Unlike the majority of other utilities Windows Disk Manager included the program can not only remove references to the deleted partition from the Partition Table thus making if unavailable for the operating system but also enables to irreversibly destroy its data This feature will guarantee security of your personal information Wizard Startup There are several ways to start the Delete Partition Wizard Express Launcher e Clic
325. the selected partition right click of the mouse button on the Disk Map or on the Partition List then select the menu item Convert File System 3 Initially the program suggests some consistent values for all parameters In most cases you can just press the Convert button to confirm the operation Ea Are you sure you wani to convert system volume C You are about fo convert file systemi on volume C No label NTFS Your computer may no longer boot or work comecty Piaase select new file system Da aS MEN GURE TIE e New file system From the pull down list choose a file system you would like to convert to Actually the program only displays variants available for the operation taking into account the current parameters of the selected partition and limitations of the used file system e New cluster size Define the cluster size for the partition This parameter can have a profound effect on the overall performance In a nutshell larger clusters waste more Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 120 space but generally provide for slightly better performance because of less fragmentation So be particularly careful with it The cluster size value is expressed in sectors per cluster To get it in Kbytes A N please divide it into half You may only decrease the current cluster size e Surface test level Define the level of the surface check to make the program find bad and unstab
326. the ways described earlier can also be used here 2 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Select a place on the disk where the backup capsule will be created It can be created as a primary partition or as a logical drive within an extended partition It can be inserted into any place on the hard disk at the end preferable at the beginning or somewhere in the middle between other partitions On this page you can select a hard disk where a backup capsule wil be crested as well as the relative postion of the capsule on the hard disk Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dew l g Local Disk C Basic Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev Be Archives G Lise the buttons io move the maker Backup capsule wil be created where the marker is By default the program allows the user to create the backup capsule only as A the last primary or as the last logical drive within the extended partition However by activating the advance mode on the first page of the wizard you can remove this restriction that in its turn might result in some boot problems 4 Set the size for the backup capsule It will be created at the expense of free space of the selected disk Backup capsule current size is 245 3 GB Van capsule size 0 Bytes lel Max capsule size 490 6 GB There is no restriction on the size of the backup capsule merely depending on the available space of the hard disk and
327. thing seems quite OK you can see the standard startup messages on the screen but at some moment it hangs up To fix your Windows startup ability please do the following 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 182 Recovery Media Builder can help you prepare the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery environment either on a CD DVD disc or a thumb drive To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Inthe boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment more preferable or Safe Mode to use the PTS DOS recovery environment in case you ve got problems with Linux Moreover you ve got the option to boot into the Low Graphics Safe Mode PTS DOS safe mode to cope with a serious hardware incompatibility In this case only the minimal set of drivers will be included like hard disk monitor and keyboard drivers This mode has simple graphics and a simple menu f Normal Mode Hain recovery d Safe Hode em ironnent Low Graphics Safe Mode Floppy disk Hard disk H HER amp Find OSes on your hard disks A By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period 3 In the Linux launch menu select Boot Corrector You can find it in PTS DOS as well l A You can create delete and format hard disk Paragon Hard Disk Ma
328. this option off E you do mot wand io get confirmation dalogs when the soip is J Commit after each operation Tum this option on to ensure the changes will be committed after each operation J Check for arom afer each operation Tum this option on to make senpt interpreter to check the result of each operation Discard all operations on dose Tum thes optien on to discern al the pending operations afer generating the soip e Interaction with the user Mark the option to pause the script interpreter during the execution to prompt the user s confirmation or other input Otherwise the program will not stop using default values for parameters if needed e Commit after each operation Mark the option to commit changes after each operation e Check for errors after each operation Mark the option to insert a soecial code in script which checks the status of the last executed operation and stops the script processing if there are errors of any kind e Discard all operations on close Mark the option to empty the List of Pending Operations after generating the script Result After the operation is completed you receive a new script file It is placed into the specified destination its features defined in the dialog Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 137 This command is unavailable if there are no operations on the List of Pending Operations To learn more about scripts please consult the Paragon Scriptin
329. tion a Clear Free Space fl Test Surface Data Properties F TEMP F 3 T MB 200Ge NTFS IL 160 3GB FAT32 Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved J 4 oF 228 In the opened dialog shift the edge of the partition to the right by the drag and drop technique While doing this free soace from the partition will be released displayed in aqua green You can also do it manually by entering the exact size of free space Click the Yes button to continue Are you sure you want to movwe resize volume G YOu are about to movevreaze FATS2 voume TEMP G Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev p Unallocated J TEMP G l 100 7 GE FAT3Z2 Volume sine 103 167 39MB H 26MB 164 156 MB Free space before G0 98255MB Obytes 164 070 09 MB Free space after 0 Bytes e O byes 164 070 05 MB Select this option to move partition areas that dont contain any data The allows you to keep the partitien s content ster move actly os A was but wil require more time Now you ve got a block of free soace to add to the system partition You cannot do it directly however but by carrying out a number of extra move resize operations A E Data F E E m E m mcns e Since the block of free space is within the extended partition you need to take it out first The program enables to resize the extended partition only when there
330. tion NTFS A Please enter mew voume label Rew Volume Pease specdy dive letter H 5 Mom oto e Define whether the partition will be Primary Extended or Logical You can choose the desired partition type from the pull down list As a matter of fact the available alternatives fundamentally depend on the selected block of free space within the Logical free space only Logical partitions can be created Within the Primary free soace both Primary partitions or the Extended Partition can be created e Partition Size Define the size in Mb of the new partition e Free space before Define the position in Mb of the new partition relative to the beginning of the block of free space e Free space after Define the amount of trailing free soace in Mb at the end of the new partition Partition size and position may also be defined by using the drag and drop A N technique To do that just carry out the required operation on the Disk Map The virtual operations are to be available e File system for new partition From the pull down list select a file system the newly created partition will be formatted to otherwise the partition will remain unformatted so that if will not be ready to use e Volume label Enter a label for the selected partition in this textual field It is an irrelevant parameter usually used for drive identification e Drive letter assignment The pull down list contains vacant drive letters that can be associate
331. tition boot record O Modify parition parameters C Correct boot parameters boot ini BCD To begin click Next 5 On the next page choose the required hard disk from the pull down list if several and then select the Update the MBR executable code option Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 181 Please choose the hard disk to correct boot problems Please point out the operation penorm View the MER Update the MBR executable code O Reorder primary partitions change skris 6 Confirm the operation j A Update the MBR executable code of the Basic Disk 0 40 0 Gb 7 After the operation is completed click the Report button to see a well informative summary page The program also enables to store the resulted report To do that just press the Save button and choose the exact location in the opened dialog p Reporting You have successfully completed boot correction To view the repan on the operations performed click Report Report Report Paragon Boot Corrector s Repon Operations perormed Operation 1 Correct the Master Boot Record Hard disk targeted Basic Disk Status Successtul Date and Time 2009 Jan 14 Wed 14 01 09 8 Click the Finish button to close Boot Corrector 9 Reboot the computer Fixing Windows startup ability Let s assume that due to an unknown reason your Windows fails fo complete the startup procedure At first every
332. tition raw copy to copy the on disk partitions in the sector by sector mode to successfully process unknown file systems However it is not recommended to enable this option when working with supported file systems as it fakes more time to accomplish the operation Perform incremental copy to only copy changes on the hard disk from the moment of the last copy operation The program will perform comparison between a previous copy of the hard disk and its current state Only sectors that are different will be updated thus considerably decreasing the amount of data to write Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 93 Change masks for files to exclude from copy to manage contents of the resulted duplicate By default the program will take info account exclude filfers set in the Settings dialog If you need to change them please mark the checkbox and specify additional filters on the next page of the wizard Resize options Remove free blocks between partitions not to keep blocks of free soace between partitions on the targeted hard disk Copy data and resize partitions proportionally to make the program proportionally change the size of partitions keeping their relative order intact The option can be useful when Upgrading the hard disk to a larger one Verification options This section allows you to define whether the Surface and or the Writing verification tests will be accomplished during the operation
333. ton 3 The wizard will automatically select Windows the NTFS file system and Mac the Apple HFS file system partitions of your Boot Camp configuration The wizard val resize space between Local Disk and Wins F C on Retained Batic GPT Hard Disk 0 VMware Virtual IDE Hard Drivel Select left partion from a pair of adjacent partitions pou would like to resize Aight adjacent partition vill be selected aubomaticalhs Hetamed Basic GPT Hard Disk O VMware Virtual IDE Hard Drive as a 128 megabyte free block between Mac and Windows partitions made On the disk map you can also see the GPT service partition called EFI as well with Boot Camp It s just for your information 4 Increase size of your Windows partition with the slider or manually by entering the required value Please note when you change size of one partition the size of the other will be changed as well thus redistributing the Unused space between the partitions Please specdy new sizes of telected partions Selected pat of Retained Batic GPT Hard Disk 0 VMware Virtual IDE Hard Drive I a WinXP C 1 1 GB NTFS i ine E Left volume size Fight volume tie 41250MB MB A 795MB HMB 5 On the next page of the wizard you need to confirm the operation by selecting the appropriate option Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 235 The Wizard has not apphed yow changes pet Dn this page you can ethe
334. tton to browse for the required network share or manually enter a path to it Define a letter from the pull down list of available drive letters Mark the checkbox to make this connection permanent Otherwise it will only be available for the current Windows session Click the Connect as user button at the foot of the dialog page to specify a user name and password to access the selected network share if necessary 6 Edit the archive name if necessary Please specty the achive name Archive name wil be used as a subfolder where backup data fies wil be stored Archive detads Archive name arc 03050907100 1085 Estimated archive size 4 4 GB Spent ovelable on backup destination 38 GB Please take into account values of the parameters Estimated archive size and A N Space available on backup destination if the archive size exceeds the available space another network drive needs to be selected 7 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Pease enter a short comment to descibe the achwa i A Ho comment 8 Choose whether to accomplish the operation immediately set a time table for it or generate a script 9 On the Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process This operation can also be accomplished with the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery environments Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All right
335. tware Group All rights reserved 113 Undeleting Partitions When simply deleting a partition without additional wiping disk management software only removes references fo it in the Partition Table thus leaving the possibility to recover it later The program enables to find and recover these partitions A restored partition will be fully functional as long as other partitions were not created moved or exceeded the disk soace occupied by that partition That is why the program offers this function only for blocks of free space The operation can be accomplished with the Undelete Partition Wizard Startup There are several ways to start the Undelete Partition Wizard Setup In the Main Menu select Wizards gt Undelete Partitions On the Common Tasks Bar click the Undelete Partition item of the Wizards menu Select a block of free soace on the Disk Map and click the Recover Lost Partitions item on the page that appears in the Explorer Bar Call the popup menu for the block of free space right click of the mouse button then select the menu item Recover Lost Partitions The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the Undelete partition operation Free blocks to scan for lost partitions Choose a free block from a tree like list of available hard disks Chek ihe check box next to any hard disk diwe or ires black you want to umne Name Type El My Computer My Computer a Bass Hard Disk 3 VMware VMware Vr
336. tween the two lies in the way data Is treated A sector based backup operates with an image or a snapshot of the whole disk system or its separate partitions It not only includes the contents of all User made files but additionally contains the exact structure of directories information about file allocation file attributes and other related data Thus it enables to successfully process system or encrypted partitions of any file system type no matter what kind of information they contain In contrast a file based backup takes into account a file system structure and only functions on a file or folder level So it is very efficient when archiving separate files or folders but in no way will help you back up a system partition You should understand pretty well that each of the two approaches is only good when properly chosen In the comparison table below you can see when this or that approach will suit you at most Sector Based Backup File Based Backup Merits It does not dependent on a particular file Functioning on a file folder level it is ideal system Thus it can successfully process for archiving separate files or folders system or encrypted partitions of any file system type no matter what kind of information they contain It can create an exact image of a It enables to automatically build up partition including its service data Thus it contents of the future backup image by is ideal for a backup restore of a system using
337. ty Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 14 Copy functionality can also be used as an alternative way of data protection Boot Management Facilities Boot Manager Setup Wizard to easily manage several operating systems on one computer Partition Hard Disk Management Facilities Basic functions for initializing partitioning and formatting hard disks create format delete Instead of the standard Windows disk tools the program supports all popular file systems Express Create Partition Wizard to create a new partition in the most appropriate place of a hard disk format it to NTFS and then make it available in the system by assigning a drive letter Merge Partitions Wizard to consolidate the disk soace which originally belongs to two adjacent partitions NTFS FATI 6 FAT32 into a single larger partition Redistribute Free Space Wizard to increase free soace on one partition by up taking the on disk unallocated space and the unused space of other partitions Express Resize Partitions Wizard to increase free soace on one partition by up taking the Unused space of an adjacent partition of a hard disk including partitions of Apple Boot Camp NTFS hot resize upward to enlarge an NTFS partition system locked without rebooting Windows and interrupting its work Convert a file system FAT16 32 NTFS Ext2 Ext3 without reformatting Mount a partition assign a drive letter of any file system ty
338. ty to hide other primary partitions except the one selected to boot and it is by all means should be activated to make Windows Vista and Windows XP unaware of each other The rest of the parameters offered by default will do in our case so just complete the wizard and it will automatically find the two operating systems and update the MBR Boot manu options o Normal mode Timeout for booting last used cordiguration 15 seconds Hidden mode Tina to display the BootManacer startup massage 15 Choose a hot key for startup Boot Manager 15 Now restart the computer to make sure you have got a dual boot system Windows XP Windows Vista If you ve got Windows XP and are willing to try the latest Windows Vista but not sure your favorite applications will flawlessly work on it the best way out Is to leave the time proved Windows XP intact and install Windows Vista for studying purposes As this very situation is very close to the previous one please use the Windows Vista Windows XP scenario However please take into consideration one more step you need to accomplish if you decide to use the traditional scenario l Besides hiding of the system partition before installation of the second OS you need to make it inactive as well To do that please call the context menu for it right click of the mouse button and launch the corresponding dialog Click the Yes button to continue Fike custom Ale pou sure pou wani to sel the vol
339. u would like to resize and peleci Nowe Resize Partition Merge Partitions Merge two adiacent partitions wih the same file system and the same type primary to primary or logical to lager Ea Restat G Shutdown 5 Consult the helo system by pressing ALT F1 to know more on the subject Our WinPE 2 1 based recovery environment offers excellent hardware support However in case it doesn t have a driver for your disk controller your hard d disks will be unavailable Please consult the Adding specific drivers scenario to know how fo tackle this issue Basic Concepts This chapter explains terms and ideas that show how the program works To understand these helps to obtain a general notion of the operation performance and makes it easier for the user to operate the program Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 30 System and Data Protection The data protection issue is a growing cause of worrying for more and more people today Indeed it is hardly to find a person who will be particularly happy when all precious information on the hard disk Is irreversible lost as a result of its malfunction So how this tragedy can be prevented File Backup versus Sector Backup Since the advent of the computer age people were in the search of ways to guarantee data safety AS a result we ve got now two principal approaches the file based backup and the sector based backup The main difference be
340. ual machines Keep Existing Format C Convert aw 14 That s all You can now launch the virtual machine Windows Vista TEST State Powered off Location C Wises Adeinistrator Doouments Wir tual Machines Windows Vista TEST Windows Vista TEST wma P e t wir l W Memory 1024 MB b Edit virtual settings Gm Hard Disk SCSI 166 covo IDE Auto detect G Enable ACE features What is ACE H Roppy Auto detect ry Sound Card Auto detect Eel Display Auto detect W Processors 1 For Windows Virtual PC 1 Click Start and then select Windows Virtual PC E Windows Vitwal PC i indows Virtual PC gt gt All Programs Share wath Create le machine New folder Thes wizard helps you create a virtual j E machine Machine 4 This folder is empty Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 28 3 Give aname to the new machine and modify the default location if necessary Specify a name and location for this virtual machine Name Old Windows XP You can choose a mame that helps you identey the virtual machine For example you can use the name of the virtual operating system Location C Users UserappDatalLocanMicrosbtt windows Vi gy Select a location to store the virtual machine file 4 Specify an amount of RAM to allocate 512 MBs for Windows XP is recommended then choose whether you need the network support or not by marking the appropri
341. uble click on it to proceed Select Image 2008 May 27 14 52 55 anm_270506145209671 PBF 2008 May 28 080753 BPZ80508 PRF Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 190 7 On the Image Properties page make sure that you select the correct image by viewing the provided information about the archive Panitien preview Type Image of the partition Archive name BP 80508 PBF C re ated 2008 May 26 Wed 08 03 54 File system NTFS Drive leter h Yolume label WinkP Size capacity 3 0 Gb 3 715 057 244 bj Used space Lab 60 Free space L2Gb 39 Sectors Cluster l 8 On the next page specify a hard disk then one of its partitions to restore the image to if several in your computer By default the program offers to restore the archive exactly where it belongs That s what we actually need Basic Disk 0 40 0 Gb E NTFS 9 86b Applic ation BackupCapsule 100Gb Mo babel Free 17 2 Gb All contents on the partition selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation 9 On the Partition Start and Size page you can change size of the partition and its location if necessary Panton preview NTFS WimXP New sire 1859 3067 Mb J er me Free space before 0 1208 Mb Free space afer 0 1208 Mb 10 On the Restore Summary page you can see your hard disk layout before and aft
342. ude masks manage files and folder that wil be eocluded from archive Specify exclude masks EwcuaWhe amp installations E fiters Delete fiter ere Delete i ocx iste tier wed Delete fiter cab Delete fiter ma Delete fiber map Jelete fiber Aacciliary files 15 fitters Add ike Rename category Delete category 8 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Pease enter a short comment to descibe the archrre i RY He comment 9 Choose whether to accomplish the operation immediately set a time table for it or generate a script 10 On the Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process A This operation can also be accomplished with the WinPE recovery environment Creating a differential to a full partition backup To update an image of the selected partition please do the following Launcher 1 Click the Differential Partition Backup item of the Wizards menu 2 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 On the Browse for Archive page specify the required full oase partition archive e By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of Images contained in the Archive Database if any Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 166 F Show all be fk Type Creation Date Source Object Size J 9 2 2009 5 24 27 AM Ba
343. ult values of parameters will correspond to the disk settings Viewing Image Properties General information on backup archives can be obtained either with the help of the Restore Wizard or the Archive Database Using the Restore Wizard There are several ways to launch the Restore Wizard e Inthe Main menu select Wizards gt Restore e Im Common Tasks bar click the Restore item of the Wizards menu e Select a hard disk partition and then click the Restore an image of the entire disk Restore the logical disk from an image link on the Explorer Bar page At first the wizard displays the Welcome page simply click the Next button at the foot of the dialog window The next page refers to Browse for Archive By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 76 Name Basic Hard Disk 1 Unknown Model Comment My hdd Total sze 10 GE Hie Cya _new are new PEF To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description including Information on a type of the archive contents whether it is sector based or file based Whether the archive is compressed or not Whether the archive is password protected or not The date when the archive was created In addition there are some special
344. ume at mactive You ate about to cet the volume Wing P NTFS ac macive You computer may no longe boot cocnecthy 5 5 Not formatted amp Pa i NTFS ry 184 8 GB NTFS NTFS E FAT32 E FATE Linu Ext Lirwune Eat Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 244 Reviving the system partition In case you are not able or not willing to complete the mentioned above scenarios but have already reached the point when all changes are applied and everything Is ready to install the second OS please do the following to make your system bootable once again only relevant for the traditional scenario 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Recovery Media Builder can help you prepare the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery environment either on a CD DVD disc or a thumb drive To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 In the Linux launch menu select Hard Disk Manager r A You can create delete and format hard disk Bi Paragon Hard Disk Manager partitions using Paragon Hard Disk Manager which will stan now Upon the sian please select the drive and one of its partitions or its free space Then activate the Partition pull down menu and select one of One Button Copy Wirard the partitioning operations Simple Restor Wizard TESORO Wipe Wrard Express Res e Wizard File
345. unction of boot management software In order to update MBR of a hard disk you should take the following steps Launcher Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 125 1 Select a hard disk on the Disk Map 2 Call the Update MBR dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it Select in the Main Menu Hard Disk gt Update MBR Call the popup menu for the selected hard disk right click of the mouse button on the Disk Map then select the menu item Update MBR Ea Are you sure you wart to update master boot recon Current MBR contents for hard disk number 0 val be lost after thes operation Your computer may no longer boot conecthy 3 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Converting Dynamic MBR to Basic The program allows you to convert a dynamic MBR disk containing simple volumes into a basic one while keeping its contents intact In order to convert a dynamic MBR disk into basic you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a dynamic MBR disk containing simple volumes on the Disk Map 2 Call the Convert to Basic dialog selecting in the Main Menu Hard Disk gt Convert to Basic 3 Set the required number of primary partitions if necessary According to the DOS partitioning scheme a hard disk can have up to four Primary partitions If there is an Extended partition on the disk only three primary partitions are allowed That is why i
346. up There are several ways to start the Express Resize Partitions Wizard Express Launcher e Click the Partitioning button and then select Resize Partitions Launcher e Inthe Main menu select Wizards gt Express Resize Partitions e On the Common Tasks Bar click the Express Resize item of the Wizards menu Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e Adjacent partitions to resize Click on the left partition of the pair of partitions you need to redistribute the Unused space between as the right one will be selected automatically Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 111 The witerd wil resize space between Local Disk C and data 2 on Basic Hard Disk 0 VWidware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dew Select left partition from a par of adiacent partitions you would lke to resize Hight adiacent partition wil be seecied sulomaicaly Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev f i Local Disk C 262 5 GE NTFS e Resulted size of partitions Redistriobute the unused space between the partitions with the slider or manually by entering the required value Fiers soecty new eres of seiected partitions Selected part of Basic Hard Dek 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev Left volume sre Foght volume size 28577HMB jf MB 222221 MB A MB Result After the operation is completed the unused space between the specified partitions will be red
347. ust OS to virtual hardware to make sure the operating system will be bootable after the operation Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 254 repan a a A E eal Basic Hard I Disk 4 VMware wiria meyi Virtua image _ _ LL Posie Available options Curent ares 10 251 ME 34 GB la 50 GB Resize partitions proportionally J Aduet S to virtual hardware Te continue chek Mead The maximum limit you can downsize the virtual disk is the capacity of its first A N partition 7 On the next page of the wizard set a file name for the resulted virtual disk and its location Besides you can also provide a path to the integration package of your virtualization software Hie name for the virtual disk Co wekale T vmdk Browse The virtual disk wil take abouli 8 5 GE on Local Desk C There wil be si 465 2 GE of free space on the volume afer creating the file Helo me to find an sopropriate place for the disk Speciy a path for addtional divers C Program Fies VMware VMware Wodcstation windows isa Browse Please provide a path to WM Tools Additens ISO image g wandows Bo for Viwe Tooks te use when a virtual device driver is requined F you transfer Windows XP to a VMware SCSI disk i should be done anyway if you transfer Windows XP to a VMware SCSI disk otherwise your system won t It s strongly recommended to provide a path to VM Tools Additions ISO image boot after the
348. uture but you cannot wait any more Thus the best way out Is to leave Windows Vista intact and install the time oroved Windows XP Most likely you have only one hard disk with only one partition the only partition is always system To install the second operating system you need to repartition your drive first as it requires a separate primary partition If this is the case you can do your job either with the Install New OS Wizard a specially designed tool for that or traditionally with a number of the corresponding wizards and dialogs Install New OS Wizard A This scenario implies that operating systems will be installed on different partitions to provide better security and system independence Express Launcher 1 Click Boot Management and then select Install New OS in the Express Launcher 2 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Select the appropriate option to create a new primary partition on your hard disk Where would you le fo instal an operahing system i wart to create a new pimay partition to nstal OS Anew pation wil be created by using unafocated space of your hard disk or unused space of endsting parties amp is the most preferable way as no sytem or users data wil be aflected dunng the metalation process want io use an ecdeting pimay partition to instal OS m case creahon of a mew piner patton is net possive there are sireedy four pimay pattons on the P T he laa I um ia a mall ee Sg t
349. vacant drive letters that can be associated with the newly formatted partition In addition there Is the possibility fo make further detailed settings although the default values will do in most cases To activate the advance mode you need to mark the appropriate option at the foot of the page When it is marked the next page enables to define ERE ay lay Sere ES of ee Oa pus in foemat nouiine a Kigase sect sectors per cluster 8 xl e Use OS built in routine Mark the checkbox to restrict the available values according to the used OS e Whether the surface test will be performed Define the level of the surface check to make the program find bad and unstable sectors and mark them unusable in the file system metadata Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 106 e The amount of sectors per boot This parameter is available exclusively for FATI 6 and FAT32 file systems Set the number of sectors to be reserved for the boot area on the partition with this spinner control e The amount of root entries This parameter is available exclusively for FAT16 file system Set the maximum amount of files directories to be placed in the Root Directory on the FATI 6 partition e The amount of sectors per cluster Define the Cluster Size for the formatted partition with this spinner control Number of available options depends on the selected file system type Dialog Setup Initially the program suggests
350. vailability requirements but it won t be accomplished until all active transactions are complete The point is fo provide a coherent state of all open files and databases involved in a process taking into account that applications may still keep writing to disks As a result an online data processing cannot boast high operating speed Our program supports both offline and online methods of data processing As far as online method is concerned It offers its own hot processing algorithm together with the possibility to use snapshot technologies provided by the Microsoft VSS framework Paragon Hot Processing Technology Paragon Hot Processing is an online copy backup technology for Windows NT family operating systems Developed back in 2001 nowadays it is integrated with all copy backup solutions offered by the company Paragon Hot Processing is not exactly a snapshot technology though it has much in common with it During an online copy backup the program uses the kernel mode driver HOTCORE SYS to intercept and control disk write activity of applications and the operating system The hotcore driver as an integral part of the program is installed during the setup procedure that s why the system reboot is required to complete the setup procedure For the most part the driver is in the idle mode until it is activated with the program While in this mode it bypasses any calls having no effect on the overall system performance but a few kilobytes of
351. very Media Builder can help you prepare the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery environment either on a CD DVD disc or a thumb drive To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 192 2 Once it has been loaded read the agreement and then mark the appropriate checkbox to accept SS Press Page Up and Page Down to scroll the teat End User License agreement beteeer i m J PARAGON Technologie GmbH Ma Tenit arm ara ee Sumeru e PEN Oe a PRE HIF Heinich von SrephanrSir 5 oc 79100 Freiburg Germany ang You a8 eng user Eygu accepi the temma of the agreement click the check bow below Iw l BETERE the terms in the License Agreement Becline A If you do not agree with any conditions stated there you won t be able to use 4 the program 3 Once you accept the agreement you will see the Universal Application Launcher Select the Restore Wizard 4 On the Restore Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 5 On the Browse for Archive page you need to specify the required backup image So you should take the following steps to do that e Select Network as a backup destination Wf Esckup Capsules Backup Capsule on Hard Disk O C Netverk places e Map a network disk where your archives are placed Call the Map Network Drive dialo
352. wee tanta an T ob lieen oaenuae ba renee tne nenenee eke oreaeae tance 271 SOV MOT E E E E EE 272 Connecting Virtual Disks to a Virtual Machine sccccsscccsscccssccssccesscccssccnssccesccescceescceees 273 Connecting virtual disks to an existing virtual MACHINE sssssssssssessssssssssssssssesrerrerereersssssssssseertererreesesesesssses 273 Connecting virtual disks to a new virtual MACHINE eeessssersessesrrecrreesserresrtressessseeteerssssseetereressseerteereesresserees 276 TFOUDIGSIOOION oiriin E E 282 GIOSS OFV oiire nann O sus nde 284 Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved Introduction Paragon Hard Disk Manager 2010 Professional is an integrated set of powerful tools that is soecially designed to tackle most of the problems you might face while using PC Its functionality covers all aspects of a computer life cycle beginning from carrying out all the necessary partitioning operations to install the system from scratch and providing its data reliable protection to secure utilization of an outdated hard disk In this manual you will find the answers to many of the technical questions which might arise while using the program Our company is constantly releasing new versions and updates to its software A N that s why images shown in this manual may be different from what you see on your screen What s New in Hard Disk Manager 2010 e Connect VD to connect a virtual disk as if it s an
353. when the Virtual operations are disabled Available operation scenarios e Hard Disk Utilization Task Scheduling Automation of operations can really help you out when you ve got to accomplish certain routine operations on a regular basis as it enables to execute them without your involvement while optimizing your computer s work load Setting a Timetable Thanks to the embedded Scheduler you can set a timetable for execution of any operation It has two categories for time settings these correspond to appropriate items in the Schedule type menu e Initiating the operation by an event One time only i e the Once item When the system starts i e the At System Startup item When the user logs on i e the At Logon item e Initiating the operation periodically i e Daily Weekly Monthly Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 132 Please spect how md when would you lke to pafom the task You need to select one of the variants Depending on your choice the scheduler displays a form that enables to set a timetable Please specty how and when would you like to peor the task Shutdown system after backup J Generste unique names for scheduled backups Run the task on i 2s a 200 AM Every 1 A weekis on J Monday Friday Tuesday Saturday Wednesday Sunday Thursday De not num the task after To run the task in the log off mode please specify administering login info
354. with the Create Partition Wizard or the Create Partition Dialog Besides there s the Express Create Partition Wizard that will analyze your disk subsystem to help you create an NTFS partition in the most appropriate place of your hard disk by up taking all the Unallocated disk space if any and or an innocuous slice of the unused space of an adjacent partition and then make it available in the system by assigning a drive letter Restrictions 1 Do not use the Create Partition function in order to undelete the last deleted partition 2 The program cannot create new partitions on Dynamic Disks The current version of the program supports only hard disks that use the DOS partitioning scheme in Windows 2000 and XP these disks are named Basic Disks 3 According to the rules of the DOS partitioning scheme the following combinations of partitions cannot be created Two Extended Partitions on one hard disk Five or more Primary partitions on one hard disk lf there is an Extended Partition on the disk only three Primary partitions are allowed 4 The program allows creating new partitions only within blocks of un partitioned space It cannot convert a free soace on an existing partition to a new partition Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 99 Express Create Partition Wizard Startup There are several ways to start the Express Create Partition Wizard Launcher e Inthe Main menu select Wizards gt
355. y Unallocated BB recs Please specify the size ofthe restored partion 2067 1849 MB 2067 MB Plaase specify size of free space before the patton 7 2 0MB 1217 MB Plaase specify size of free space afterthe partition 7 0MB 1217MB 9 On the next page of the wizard confirm the operation by selecting the appropriate option Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 195 Virlould you lke to apply your changes 7 C No et me recomider 10 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Reston from archive LT Time eapsed 00 00 17 Time remaining 00 03 45 Shutdown system on complete Mark the checkbox at the bottom of the window to automatically switch off the computer on the successful accomplishment of the restore operation 11 After completing the operation close the wizard and then reboot the computer This operation can also be accomplished with the Linux DOS recovery environment To make a Win2K operating system bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Restoring a system partition from a local drive Let s assume that your operating system gives trouble after having installed brand new software But you ve got a backup of the system partition on a local disk That s just enough to easily roll it back t
356. y get several blocks of the unallocated space on the hard disk So choose whether to merge them all and place at the beginning of the disk or at the end by selecting the required operation from the pull down list Merge free blocks options mange free blocks f Marge free blocks at tne and Af t T De not merga free blocks Merge free blocks at the beginning of the disk Dialog Setup Initially the program suggests you just to remove references to the selected partition from the Partition Table oi Are you sure you wand to delete volume F o You ae about to delete volume F Mo label NTFS Your computer may no longer boot or work cocecthy F E 7 Do not ask volume label nest time Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 109 e Enter the volume label to confirm deleting To confirm deletion of the selected partition enter its Volume Label The current volume label is disolayed above e Do not ask volume label next time Mark the option to inhibit confirmation next time you start the dialog Result By default the operation takes only a fraction of a second However the program waits until Windows completes the modification of the disk layout Advanced Partitioning Operations Here you can learn how to accomplish advanced partitioning operations merge redistribute free space undelete etc Merging Partitions The Merge Partitions Wizard enables to consolida

Paragon PSG-155-PRG-PL

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents